5D / Sportstourer
Leon
Owner’s manual
5FA012720BP
Inglés
5FA012720BP (06.21)
SEAT Leon 5D / Sportstourer Inglés (06.21)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.21
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Introduction
Thank you f
or your trust choosing a SEAT ve-
hicle.
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology
and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety infor-
mation concerning the passenger
's
front airbag
›››
page 35, Fitting and us-
ing child seats.
About this manual
This instruction manual is v
alid for all variants
and versions of your SEAT model. It describes
all equipment and models without specifying
whether they are optional equipment or
model variants. As a result, equipment not fit-
ted to your vehicle or only available in certain
countries may be described. Find out about
your vehicle's equipment in the documenta-
tion supplied with it and please contact your
SEAT Official SEAT Service if you require
more detailed information.
All information provided in instruction manual
corresponds to the information available at
the time of going to press. As the vehicle is
under continuous development, it may have
differences to the data included in this man-
ual. For this reason, no claims can be made in
the event of mismatching data, illustrations
and descriptions.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or
lend it to third parties. In addition, SEAT rec-
ommends resetting the infotainment system
to factory settings to delete all personal data.
Some details on the drawings may vary from
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a
standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-
ted.
This instruction manual has been written for
left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive
vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif-
fers partly from that shown in the illustrations
or described in the texts.
Technical modifications to the vehicle or
safety-critical issues that have arisen since
the time of going to press will be included in a
supplement to the on-board documentation.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
It indicates that the section continues on
the next page.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
®
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about saf
ety and warn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
CAUTION
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage t
o the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about the pr
otection of the environ-
ment.
Note
Texts after this symbol contain addition-
al inf
ormation.
Digital instruction manual
The digit
al version of the manual can be
found on SEAT's official website:
Fig. 1 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
››
Fig. 1
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manual
s-offline.html
and select your vehicle.
Related videos
The oper
ation of some of the vehicle's fea-
tures can be shown as an instruction video:
Fig. 2 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
››
Fig. 2
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manual
s-offline.html
choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
cer
tain languages.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Gener
al views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 18
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 21
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Information, assistance and emergency
call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 52
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Instruments and warning/control
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 139
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
auxiliary heating (additional heating) . . . . . . . 163
Stationary air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5
Table of Contents
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Driving with electric drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Operating mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
bo
x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Lane departure warning (Side Assist) with
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) and door
opening warning (Exit Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 279
Assisted parking system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . 279
Parking aid parking and manoeuvring
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Parking System Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 291
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Electrically unlocking trailer hook . . . . . . . . . . 300
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
High-voltage battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Conservation of the high-voltage bat-
tery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Charging settings in the infotainment sys-
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Charging the high-voltage battery . . . . . . . . . 308
Charging cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Engine management and emissions control
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
48-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 354
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Accessories and modifications to the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 363
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 365
Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Information about the EU Directive
2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Indications about the technical data . . . . 371
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Fig. 3
Leon
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 238
Front multifunction camera
Front radar
Parking aid sensors
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Levels control
–
Oil
›
››
page 330
–
Brake fluid
›››
page 335
–
Battery
›››
page 337
Bonnet
–
Unlocking lever
›››
page 328
–
Open/close
›››
page 328
Towing the vehicle
A
B
C
–
T
owline anchorage
›››
page 58
–
Tow-start
›››
page 56
Charging socket (hybrid vehicles)
–
Charging process display
›››
page 311
–
Emergency unlocking
›››
page 313
D
7
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Fig. 4
LEON Sportstourer
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 238
Front multifunction camera
Front radar
Parking aid sensors
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Levels control
–
Oil
›
››
page 330
–
Brake fluid
›››
page 335
–
Battery
›››
page 337
Bonnet
–
Unlocking lever
›››
page 328
–
Open/close
›››
page 328
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 58
A
B
C
–
T
ow-start
›››
page 56
Charging socket (hybrid vehicles)
–
Charging process display
›››
page 311
–
Emergency unlocking
›››
page 313
D
8
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Fig. 5
Leon
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 238
Rear view camera
Parking aid sensors
Rear radars
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Rear lid
–
Opening fr
om outside
›››
page 110
–
Emergency opening
›››
page 114
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 58
–
Tow-start
›››
page 56
Opening and closing
–
Doors
›››
page 108
–
Central locking
›››
page 99
A
B
C
–
Emer
gency lock
›››
page 108
Fuel tank
–
Fuel capacity
›››
page 371
–
Open/Close cap
›››
page 317
Action in the event of a puncture
–
Anti-puncture kit
›››
page 45
–
Wheel change
›››
page 47
D
E
9
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Fig. 6
LEON Sportstourer
Driving assistance sensors
›
››
page 238
Rear view camera
Parking aid sensors
Rear radars
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
Rear lid
–
Opening fr
om outside
›››
page 110
–
Emergency opening
›››
page 114
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 58
–
Tow-start
›››
page 56
Opening and closing
–
Doors
›››
page 108
–
Central locking
›››
page 99
A
B
C
–
Emer
gency lock
›››
page 108
Fuel tank
–
Fuel capacity
›››
page 371
–
Open/Close cap
›››
page 317
Action in the event of a puncture
–
Anti-puncture kit
›››
page 45
–
Wheel change
›››
page 47
D
E
10
General views of the vehicle
Overview (left hand drive)
Electric windows
›
››
page 114
Exterior mirror adjustment
›››
page 129
Control for lighting and demisting win-
dows
›››
page 119
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 120
Cruise control
›››
page 242
Warning lamps
›››
page 87
Wipers and rear window wiper
›››
page 127
1
2
3
4
5
6
Driver information system
›
››
page 85
Infotainment system
›››
page 89,
›››
page 170
Open bonnet lever
›››
page 328
Fuses
›››
page 60
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 17
Hazard warning lights
›››
page 124
Starter button
›››
page 216
Electronic parking brake
›››
page 272
Central locking
›››
page 99
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
11
General views of the vehicle
Overview (right hand drive)
Infotainment system
›
››
page 89,
›››
page 170
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 120
Cruise control
›››
page 242
Warning lamps
›››
page 87
Wipers and rear window wiper
›››
page 127
Driver information system
›››
page 85
Control for lighting and demisting win-
dows
›››
page 119
1
2
3
4
5
6
Exterior mirror adjustment
›
››
page 129
Electric windows
›››
page 114
Open bonnet lever
›››
page 328
Starter button
›››
page 216
Central locking
›››
page 99
Electronic parking brake
›››
page 272
Hazard warning lights
›››
page 124
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 17
Fuses
›››
page 60
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
12
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
Armrest
›
››
page 146
Isofix anchors
›››
page 36
Headrest adjustment
›››
page 134
Seat belts
›››
page 18
Panoramic roof
›››
page 116
Interior mirror
›››
page 129
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag
›
››
page 29
Electronic parking brake
›››
page 272
Seat adjustment
›››
page 132
7
8
9
13
Safety
Safety
Saf
e driving
Advice about driving
Safety first!
WARNING
●
This manual cont
ains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle,
both for the driver and the passengers. The
other sections of the on-board documenta-
tion also contain further information that
you should be aware of for your own safety
and for the safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-
pecially important when lending or selling
the vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, al
ways note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››
page 139.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors
properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the headrests in the in-use po-
sition
›››
page 134.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests
according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
›››
page 33.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position
›››
page 15.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly
›››
page 18.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers.
–
Al
ways pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol,
drugs, medication or nar
cotics may result
in severe accidents and even loss of life.
●
Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
may significantly alter perception, affect
reaction times and safety while driving,
which could result in the loss of control of
the vehicle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger
. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
14
Safe driving
risk of injury. The following points cover part
of the saf
ety equipment in your SEAT
1)
:
●
three-point seat belts,
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
●
belt tensioners for the front and rear side
seats,
●
front airbags,
●
knee and central driver airbags
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
side airbags in the rear seat backrests,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points on the front passen-
ger seat and on the rear seats for child seats
with the “ISOFIX” system,
●
height-adjustable front headrests,
●
rear headrests with in-use position and
non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct sitting position of
vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig. 7
The correct distance between the driver
and the st
eering wheel must be at least 25 cm
(10 inches).
Fig. 8 Correct belt web and headrest positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and
passengers ar
e shown below.
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct sitting position,
contact a specialised workshop for help with
any special devices. The seat belt and airbag
can only provide optimum protection if a cor-
rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-
mends taking your car in for technical serv-
ice.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
following positions:
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
●
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head, or
»
1)
Depending on the version/market.
15
Safety
as close as possible to the same level as the
t
op of your head and under no circumstances
below eye level. Keep the back of your neck
as close as possible to the headrest
›››
Fig. 8.
●
Short people must lower the headrest com-
pletely, even if your head is below its upper
edge.
●
Tall people must raise the headrest com-
pletely.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
●
Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly
›››
page 21.
The following also applies to the driver:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the steering wheel so it is at least
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum
›››
Fig. 7 and you can hold it with both hands
on both sides, on the outer part, with your
arms slightly bent.
●
The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
●
Move the seat in such a way that you can
step on the pedals with your knees slightly
bent and with a distance between the knees
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-
ches)
›››
Fig. 7.
●
Adjust the height of the seat so that you
can reach the top of the steering wheel.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell so
that you have the vehicle under control at all
times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-
board check translation). If you are sitting
closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot
protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the fr
ont and 3 in
the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety
belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear
seats.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may in-
cr
ease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring, in case of collision or accident and if
the airbags deploy.
●
Bef
ore starting the car, all passengers
must be sitting in a correct position and
stay like that for the entire journey. This al-
so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
●
The maximum amount of people in the
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats
with seat belts.
●
For children, always use a certified pro-
tection system, certified and suited for their
weight and height
›››
page 33.
●
While driving, always keep your feet in
the footwell. Never place them over the
seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-
side the window. Otherwise the airbag and
seat belt may offer insufficient protection
and also increase the risk of injury in the
event of an accident.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
tion
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the risk of se
vere or lethal injuries increases.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
sitting positions substantially reduce the pro-
tective function of seat belts and, therefore,
increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-
ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-
cially heightened when a deploying airbag
strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed
an incorrect sitting position. The driver is
16
Safe driving
responsible for all people, particularly chil-
dr
en, inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incor-
rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear seats.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never place your feet on the bench or on
the backrest of the seat.
●
Never travel in a footwell.
●
Never sit on the armrests.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases
the risk of se
vere or fatal injuries in the
event of accidents and sudden braking or
manoeuvres.
●
All occupants must sit correctly during
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
are not at a proper distance of the airbag
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,
especially if the airbags deploy and strike
them.
Steering wheel position adjust-
ment
Fig. 9 Lever in the lower left side of the steer-
ing column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
only when the v
ehicle is stationary.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 9
1
lever down, move the
st
eering wheel to the desired position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment function and an incorr
ect adjustment
of the steering wheel can result in severe or
fatal injury.
●
After adjusting the steering column, push
the lever
›››
Fig. 9
1
firmly upwards to en-
sur
e the steering wheel does not acciden-
tally change position while driving.
●
Never adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
adjustment.
●
The adjusted steering wheel should be
facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
tection in the event of an accident.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
airbag deploys.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
»
17
Safety
you may sustain injuries to your arms,
hands and head.
Pedal area
P
edals
–
Ensure that you can always press the ac-
cel
erator, brake and clutch pedals unim-
paired to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
pair
ed to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use fl
oor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners
for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
R
estricting pedal operation can lead to
critical situations while driving.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation.
Seat belts
The whys and wher
efores of
seat belts
Control lamps
It lights up red
The driver or one of the passengers have not fas-
tened their seat belts.
The control lamp lights up t
o remind the
driver to fasten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight
›››
page 33.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
while driving, a warning sound will be heard
for a few seconds. The warning light will also
flash .
The lamp goes out when the ignition is on
and all occupants have fastened their seat
belts.
18
Seat belts
Rear seat belts fastened display
Fig. 10
Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-
pied and corr
esponding seat belt fastened dis-
play.
Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is s
witched on, the seat belt status
display
›››
Fig. 10 on the instrument panel in-
forms the driver whether the passengers in
the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
It indicates that the corresponding seat
is empty.
Indicates that the seat is occupied and
the occupant is wearing the seat belt.
The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An
audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-
cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).
If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-
onds. The indication can be hidden by press-
ing the
button on the dash panel.
The protective function of seat
belts
Fig. 11
Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thr
own forward in the event of sud-
den braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper position. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driving
around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and
improving the chances of survival when in-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Important safety instructions for
the use of seat belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
»
19
Safety
–
Ensur
e that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts ar
e worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
etc.) because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
ducing their capacity to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other objects, as
this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in
the e
vent of an accident. Therefore, you
must check the condition of all seat belts
at regular intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an
accident and have been stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage
should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 12
A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thr
own forward violently.
Fig. 13 The unbelted passenger in the rear
seat is thr
own forward violently, hitting the driv-
er who is wearing a seat belt.
The effects of the laws of physics in the case
of a head-on collision ar
e easy to explain: the
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
both the vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-
gy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
20
Seat belts
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Ev
en at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
thrown forward and will make violent contact
with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
screen or whatever else is in the way
›››
Fig. 12.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants
›››
Fig. 13.
How to properly adjust your
seat belt
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 14 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt in-
t
o the buckle.
Fig. 15 Release the seat belt's buckle.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
otects
them in the event of an accident or sudden
braking
›››
.
F
astening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly
›››
page 15.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
●
Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-
bing e
venly across your chest and lap. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so
›››
.
●
Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corr
esponding seat
›››
Fig. 14.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
››
Fig. 15. The latch plate is released from the
buckle.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
»
21
Safety
WARNING
●
The seat belt cannot off
er its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
●
The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
from hard areas of the body to soft areas
(e.g. the stomach).
Correct seat belt position
Fig. 16
Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
tions, vie
wed from front and the side.
Fig. 17 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the e
vent of an accident and reduce the risk
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat
belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
therefore always be worn and the webbing
correctly positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe
or even fatal injuries
›››
page 15, Correct sit-
ting position of vehicle occupants.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind
the shoulder.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up
any slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the
stomach and must be worn properly at all
times during the pregnancy
›››
Fig. 17.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing
to your size
The position of the seat belt can be adapted
by adjusting the height of the front seats.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause se
vere or fatal injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over
the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
the stomach
›››
Fig. 17.
22
Seat belts
●
Do not twist the seat belt whil
e it is fas-
tened.
●
Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
ly, don't pull it away from your body with
your hand.
●
Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
●
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
or similar instruments to alter the position
of the belt webbing.
Note
If your physical constitution prevents you
fr
om maintaining the correct position of the
belt webbing, contact a specialised work-
shop for help with any special devices to
ensure the optimum protection of the seat
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking
your car in for technical service.
Seat belt tensioners
Ho
w the seat belt tensioner works
The seat belts for the front seats and the side
r
ear seats are equipped with belt tensioners.
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,
although only in severe head-on, lateral and
rear-end collisions, or in the event of the vehi-
cle overturning in the plug-in hybrid version of
the vehicle.
This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re-
ducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination
with the airbag system. The belt pre-tension-
ers activate in combination with some of the
airbags, depending on the collision type.
Note
●
If the seat belt t
ensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. Specialised
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
Maintenance and disposal of seat
belt t
ensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that ar
e installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence
may be that, in the event of an accident, the
belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to the
specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
●
Impr
oper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other re-
pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
changed if they have been activated.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
cont
ain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-
quirements for their disposal.
23
Safety
PreCrash system
Ho
w it works
The PreCrash system is an assistance system
that activ
es a series of measures to protect
the occupants of the vehicles in potentially
risky situations, but which cannot prevent a
collision.
It only works completely if no special driving
profile is selected and if there are no operat-
ing anomalies.
Basic features
Depending on the legal provisions of the
country and the features of the vehicle, in crit-
ical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emer-
gency braking or loss of control of the vehicle
by the driver) the following functions can be
activated separately or at the same time
when the vehicle is travelling faster than ap-
proximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
●
Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that
ar
e fastened.
●
Operation of the hazard warning lights.
●
Automatic closing of the windows until they
are just cracked open and, depending on the
equipment, of the sunroof.
●
In the event of overturning, depending on
the equipment, activation of the belt tension-
ers.
Depending on how critical the driving situa-
tion is, the belts are either tightened individu-
ally, or both belts at the same time.
In addition to Front Assist
In vehicles with Front Assist
›››
page 245,
within the limits of the system, information is
assessed on the risk of collision with the vehi-
cle in front. The functions of the PreCrash
system may also be activated if there is a
high likelihood of a rear-end collision, or dur-
ing the activation of Front Assist.
In addition to the Emergency Assist system
In vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta-
tus information is assessed within the limita-
tions of this system. The following PreCrash
systems may be activated if a lack of activity
is detected:
●
Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv-
er's seat belt.
●
Automatic closing of the windows until they
are just cracked open and, depending on the
equipment, of the sunroof.
Activation of the PreCrash system
The PreCrash system can be partially deacti-
vated by deactivating the traction and / or
stability control, depending on the equip-
ment. When these vehicle safety controls are
switched on (by default, every time the igni-
tion is turned on), the system is fully activated.
Driving profile selection settings
In vehicles with driving profile selection,
PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicle
configuration of the corresponding profile
›››
page 234.
Limited operation
The PreCrash system is not available or only
has limited availability in the following situa-
tions:
●
When the TCS and/or the ESC are discon-
nected.
●
When driving in reverse.
●
When the airbag control unit is not operat-
ing properly.
●
When there is a fault in the system itself, in
the ESC or in the Front Assist.
Problems and solutions
If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the
message System unavailable or System
with limited features is shown perma-
nently on the dashboard display. Have the
system checked by a SEAT workshop.
WARNING
The PreCrash system cannot overcome the
limits imposed by the l
aws of physics; it on-
ly works within the limits of the system.
Risks that compromise safety are never jus-
tified by the use of this system. The system
24
Airbag system
is not a replacement for driver awareness
and cannot pr
event a collision.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions.
●
The system is not always able to recog-
nise objects.
●
The system may not react to people or
animals or objects that cross length-wise
or that are hard to detect.
●
Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el-
ements of the public road or adverse
weather conditions can hinder its operation
and thus its ability to detect collision risk.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps that light
up or the messages shown on the dash-
board.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
t
o an accident and cause injuries.
●
Never change settings on the Infotain-
ment System while driving.
Airbag system
Brief intr
oduction
Why is it so important to wear a
seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
pr
otection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it
is most important to properly wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
quired by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 18, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case
, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.
This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are activated de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
head-protection airbags will not be triggered.
Take into account that the visible damage in
a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter
how serious, is not a determining factor for
the airbags to have been activated.
WARNING
●
W
earing the seat belt incorrectly or as-
suming an incorrect sitting position can
lead to critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is
»
25
Safety
triggered. Children up to 12 years old
shoul
d always travel on the rear seat. Nev-
er transport children in the vehicle if they
are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or
weight.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
erly
›››
page 18.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system offers additional protec-
tion f
or the occupants in combination with the
seat belts.
The airbag system comprises the follow-
ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Knee airbag for the driver
●
Side airbags
●
Central airbag for the driver
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel
›››
page 27
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger
airbag
●
Control lamp for disabled/enabled status
of the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
›››
page 27,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pr
o-
vide maximum protection if the occupants
are seated correctly
›››
page 15.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
tem, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise
there is a danger that during a collision, the
system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
corr
ectly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousands of a second, t
o provide additional
protection in the event of an accident. A fine
dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire
in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
Airbags do not activate in the event of minor
head-on and side collisions or rear-end colli-
sions. Airbags only activate if the vehicle
overturns in the hybrid plug-in version of the
vehicle.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
26
Airbag system
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
t
ory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
accident may cause extensive damage to the
car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
●
Knee airbag for the driver.
●
Head airbags (depending on the severity of
the crash).
In the event of serious side collisions,
some (or all) of the following airbags can
be activated (depending on the severity of
the collision):
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Central airbag.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut;
●
in hybrid vehicles, the high voltage system
is switched off;
●
an emergency call is started
›››
page 43.
Operation of the airbags
Airbag system control lamps
It lights up on the combi-instru-
ment
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .
Hav
e the system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up on the roof console
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated
It lights up on the roof console
Front passenger front airbag activated.
The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds
after the ignition is switched on
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system
control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-
cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system
›››
. Have the system
check
ed immediately by a specialised work-
shop.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
the warning lamp re-
mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that
the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front
passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the
control lamp on the instrument panel,
there is a fault in the airbag system
›››
. If
the contr
ol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in
the disabling of the airbag system
›››
. Have
the syst
em checked immediately by a speci-
alised workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt t
ensioner system, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
●
The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the
system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
»
27
Safety
●
Do not mount a chil
d seat in the front
passenger seat or remove the mounted
child seat! The front passenger front airbag
may deploy during an accident in spite of
the fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control
l
amps and to the corresponding descrip-
tions and instructions to avoid damage to
the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
Front airbags
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering
wheel
.
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in
dash panel
.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the
st
eering wheel and that of the front passen-
ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified
by the word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers fold open and remain at-
tached to the steering wheel
›››
Fig. 18 and
the dash panel
›››
Fig. 19when the driver and
front passenger airbags, respectively, are
triggered.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-
ditional protection for the head and chest in
the event of a severe frontal collision
›››
.
Their special design all
ows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The depl
oyment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
28
Airbag system
Activate and deactivate front pas-
senger fr
ont airbag
Fig. 20
Switch for activating and deactivating
the fr
ont passenger airbag.
Fig. 21
On the roof console: control lamp for
the deactiv
ation of the front passenger front
airbag.
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag
only if you hav
e to use a rear-facing child
seat in the front passenger seat.
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the
front passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
vated, this means that only the front passen-
ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other
airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passen-
ger front airbag
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the door on the front passenger side.
●
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
›››
Fig. 20. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
●
Turn the key gently to change its position to
(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
●
Close the front passenger door.
●
When deactivating the airbag, switch the
ignition on and check that the control lamp
remains lit where it says
in the roof console
›››
Fig. 21.
●
When reactivating the airbag, check that
when the ignition is switched on, the
control lamp does not light up and the
lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns
off.
WARNING
●
The driv
er of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
deactivation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
able or disable the airbag during driving.
●
If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
can fulfil its protective function.
29
Safety
Knee airbag
Fig. 22
On the driver side: location of the knee
airbag
Fig. 23 On the driver side: airbag action radius
f
or the knees.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
bel
ow the dash panel
›››
Fig. 22. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
›››
Fig. 23 is covered by the knee airbag when
it is deployed. Objects should never be
placed or mounted in this area.
WARNING
●
The knee airbag is depl
oyed in front of
the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-
ment areas of the knee airbags free.
●
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-
tween your knees and the location of the
this airbag. If your physical constitution
prevents you from meeting these require-
ments, make sure you contact a special-
ised workshop.
Central airbag
Fig. 24 In the inner padding of the driver's seat
backr
est: central airbag.
Fig. 25 Fully inflated central airbag (deploy-
ment z
one).
The central airbag is installed for the front
seats and is l
ocated in the inner padding of
the driver's seat backrest.
The location of the central airbag is indicated
by the inscription “AIRBAG”
›››
Fig. 24.
When triggered, the central airbag fills the
zone marked in red (deployment zone)
›››
Fig. 25. For this reason, never place or fix
objects in this zone
›››
.
The centr
al airbag triggers in the case of a
side collision or if the vehicle overturns, re-
ducing the risk of vehicle occupants suffering
injuries.
WARNING
When triggered, the airbag inflates at high
speed in milliseconds.
●
Always keep the central airbag deploy-
ment z
one clear.
30
Airbag system
●
Ne
ver attach objects to the central air-
bag cover or the deployment zone.
●
Do not allow other people, animals or ob-
jects to get between the occupants of the
front seats and the airbag deployment
zone. Make sure that all vehicle occupants,
including children, follow this rule.
●
Never use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
seats of the vehicle. Otherwise, the side air-
bag will not be able to deploy if triggered.
WARNING
Improper manipulation of the driver and
fr
ont passenger seats can prevent the cen-
tral airbag from operating correctly and
cause serious injuries.
●
Never remove the front seats from the ve-
hicle or modify their components.
●
If the backrest side bolsters are subjec-
ted to a lot of force, the central airbag may
not trigger correctly,it may not trigger at
all or if may trigger unexpectedly.
●
Have a specialised repair shop immedi-
ately repair any damage to the original
seat upholstery or seams in the area of the
central airbag module.
Side airbags
Fig. 26
Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 27
Illustration of completely inflated side
airbags on the l
eft side of the vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the backrests
of the fr
ont seats and in the sides of the rear
seat, depending on the vehicle's configura-
tion
›››
Fig. 26,
›››
Fig. 27.
The locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG” in the lower region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
In a side collision, the side airbags r
educe the
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the
body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal protection, the seat belts also hold
the passengers in the event of a side collision;
this is how these airbags provide maximum
protection.
WARNING
●
If you do not w
ear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
risk of injury if the side airbag system is
triggered in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed
sitting position must always be maintained
with seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressure increase on the inte-
rior of the doors, due to air escaping
through the areas with holes or openings in
the door panel.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels
have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
»
31
Safety
●
Ne
ver drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
ers in the door panels have been removed,
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
els.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no circumstances should protec-
tive covers be fitted over seats with side
airbags unless the covers have been ap-
proved for use in your vehicle. Because the
airbag deploys from the side of the back-
rest, the use of conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
●
Any damage t
o the original seat uphols-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag
units must be repaired immediately by a
specialised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag com-
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
of the front seat) should only be performed
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system
operation.
Head-protection airbags
Fig. 28
Location of head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the int
erior above the doors
›››
Fig. 28 and are identified with the text
“AIRBAG”.
In combination with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the up-
per body in the event of a severe side colli-
sion or the vehicle overturning
›››
.
The ar
ea framed in red is covered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed
›››
Fig. 28 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area
›››
.
In the e
vent of a side collision the head-pro-
tection airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.
WARNING
●
In or
der for the head-protection airbags
to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be
maintained with seat belts fastened while
travelling.
●
For safety reasons, the head-protection
airbag must be disabled in those vehicles
fitted with a screen dividing the interior of
the vehicle. See your technical service to
make this adjustment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
32
Transporting children safely
outer seats and the deployment space of
the head-pr
otection airbags so that the
head-protection airbag can deploy com-
pletely without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore,
sun blinds which have not been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle may not be
attached to the side windows.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
coat hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such
as removal of the roof lining) should only
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-
bag system operation.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and head-protection air-
bags neither the doors nor the door panels
should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-
aged, the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly. All work carried out on the front door
must be done in a specialised workshop.
Transporting children
saf
ely
Child safety
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident st
atistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 20. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
(not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and appr
oved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
SEAT recommends securing the child seats
shown on the website as described below:
●
Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-
el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (RO-
MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE /
PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE).
●
Child seats in the direction of travel (group
1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS
+ TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE).
●
Child seats directed towards the front of
the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX
(ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX
2
S).
●
Child seats directed towards the front of
the vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATA
MAXI).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note
›››
page 35.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
33
Safety
Child seats group classification
Fig. 29
Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
pr
oved and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or
ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Age group Weight of the child
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
pr
oved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129
standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129
test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
child seat for your model and age group at
SEAT dealers.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats may have the approval category
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
(all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).
●
Universal: child seats with universal appro-
val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
●
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
in addition to the standard requirements of
universal approval, requires safety devices to
lock the child seat, which require additional
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
proval include a list of vehicle models for
which they can be installed.
●
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a
list of vehicle models for which they can be
installed.
●
i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements set out in the ECE-
R129 standard in relation to installation and
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
cle.
34
Transporting children safely
Fitting and using child seats
Fig. 30 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
visor
Fig. 31 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door
Warnings about fitting a child seat
T
ake the following general warnings into ac-
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
are valid for all child seats regardless of their
attachment system.
●
Please read and follow the child seat man-
ufacturer's operating instructions.
●
The child seat should preferably be fitted to
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
pavement side.
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts to the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
To correctly use a child seat in the back,
the front backrest must be adjusted so that
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the
direction of the car. In the case of front facing
restraint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
●
For a correct assembly of the child's seat
on the rear seats, adjust or dismount the
headrest, in order to prevent contact with the
seat.
●
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the
car is through the seat belt and support
bracket, it should never be installed in the
central rear seat as the ground clearance is
lower than in other places and the support
bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ciently stable.
●
When fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat, the seat must be moved back-
wards as far as possible and placed in the
highest position. The backrest must also be
put in a vertical position
1)
.
Important information about the front pas-
senger front airbag
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is located on the passeng-
er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
door frame
›››
Fig. 30.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag
›››
page 25.
»
1)
Compliance with current national legislation
and the manuf
acturer's instructions is required
when using or installing child seats.
35
Safety
●
Ob
jects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag
›››
in Front airbags
on page 28.
The passenger side fr
ont airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch
›››
page 29.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
›››
page 34.
WARNING
●
If a chil
d seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if necessary, the front
passenger front airbag must be deactiva-
ted
›
››
page 29. If the passenger seat has a
height adjustment option, move it to the
highest, most upright position. If you have a
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a
key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
the vehicle must be taken to a technical
service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-
bag when an adult wants to sit in the front
passenger seat.
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or in the vehicle.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
the abdominal and neck areas during a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
dent.
●
When a child seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be
activated
›››
page 109.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attach-
ment syst
ems are used for safely installing
child seats.
Attachment systems overview
●
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-
ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
tween the child seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
called connectors. These connectors are fit-
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
between the seat cushion and the backrest
of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
Europe
›››
page 37. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
tachment may have to be supplemented with
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
●
Automatic three-point seat belt. When-
e
ver possible, it is preferable to attach the
child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than
attaching them with an automatic three-point
seat belt
›››
page 41.
Additional attachment:
●
Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided
over the back of the rear seat and attached
to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
36
Transporting children safely
are located at the back of the rear seat back-
r
est on the boot side
›››
page 39. The rings
for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked
with an anchor symbol.
●
Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat
from tipping forward in the event of impact.
Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats
›››
. For the assembly of
this type of seat you should also consult the
list of appr
oved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.
Recommended systems for attaching
child seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:
●
Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-
site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
bracket or i-Size.
●
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
FIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or f
atal injury.
●
Make sure the support bracket is correct-
ly and safely installed.
Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system
Fig. 32 Rear seat: die cut slots to access the
ISOFIX / iSiz
e securing rings.
Fig. 33 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX/i-Size se-
curing rings.
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and saf
ely on the rear side and passenger
seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether sys-
tem.
Two “ISOFIX” securing rings are fitted on each
rear side and passenger seat. In some vehi-
cles, the rings are secured to the seat frame
and, in others, they are secured to the rear
floor. The “ISOFIX” rings are located between
the rear seat backrest and the seat cushion-
ing
›››
Fig. 32,
›››
Fig. 33. The Top Tether rings
are located on the rear part of the rear seat
»
37
Safety
backrests (behind the backrest or in the lug-
gage compartment)
›
››
page 39.
To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-
FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table
below.
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Weight group Size class
a)
Electrical
equipment
Front passenger seat
Rear side seat
Rear central
seat
airbag enabled airbag disabled
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 X IL IL X
D ISO/R2 X IL IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL IL X
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 X IL IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL IL X
B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X
A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X
Group II 15 to 25 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3
b)
X IL IL X
Group III 22 to 36 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3
b)
X IL IL X
IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
IL
: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's
vehicle list into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.
a)
The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class
accor
ding to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.
b)
The headrest must be removed and the backrest reclined to install it on front seats.
38
Transporting children safely
Vehicle i-Size positions
Front passenger seat
Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag enabled airbag disabled
X i-U i-U X
i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.
X
: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-
Siz
e” system
You must follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
●
Open the cut-out section behind the
marked grooves to access the retaining rings
›››
Fig. 32.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until it is heard to engage se-
curely. If the child seat is equipped with Top
Tether anchor points, secure it to the corre-
spondent ring
›››
page 39. Follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” and Top
Tether attachment system can be purchased
from technical services.
WARNING
The securing rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system
child seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether system,
or safety belts or any other objects to the
securing rings – as this can result in poten-
tially fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is correctly se-
cured to the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether secur-
ing rings.
Top Tether securing belts
Fig. 34
Rear seats: adjustment and assembly
accor
ding to the Top Tether belt.
»
39
Safety
Fig. 35
Front passenger seat: adjustment and
assembly accor
ding to the Top Tether belt.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
with a str
ap for securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-
ted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining
strap.
●
Position the belt under the headrest (de-
pending on the instructions of the seat itself,
lift or remove the headrest if necessary)
›››
Fig. 34 /,
›››
Fig. 35 /.
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest
›››
Fig. 34 ,
›››
Fig. 35 .
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
●
Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
incr
ease the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in
the luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other
items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
the upper ones (Top Tether).
40
Transporting children safely
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
Fig. 36 On the rear seats: installing the child
seat.
If you want to fit a universal approval catego-
ry (U) chil
d seat in your vehicle, you must
check that the seat is approved for your vehi-
cle. You will find any necessary information
on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-
bel. The following table shows the different
fitting options.
Weight group
Front passenger seat
a)
Rear side seat Rear central seat
b)
Airbag enabled airbag disabled
c)
Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U
Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U
Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U
Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF
Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF
X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.
U: Suit
able for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b)
For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.
c)
Seats without height adjustment shoul
d be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.
»
41
Safety
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts t
o the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
Put the seat belt in place and pass it
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured
in the v
ehicle with a restraint system suita-
ble for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information
and warnings concerning the use of child
seats
›››
page 35.
42
Self-help
Emergencies
Self
-help
Information, assistance and
emergency call service
How it works
Fig. 37
On the roof console: voice service con-
tr
ols
Depending on the equipment, there is a con-
tr
ol on the roof console.
By pressing the buttons , and
›››
Fig. 37, you can run the following voice
services:
●
information call
●
assistance call
●
emergency call service.
A built-in control unit establishes the connec-
tion.
When a voice service is activated, a connec-
tion is established with a phone line.
Control lamp
The control has a warning lamp
›››
Fig. 37
(arrow). It shows the following statuses:
●
Off: the eCall service is not available.
●
Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after
switching on the ignition: the eCall service
is off.
●
Lights up red: system failure. The eCall
service is available with certain restrictions.
SEAT suggests going to a specialised work-
shop.
●
Lights up green: the eCall service is avail-
able. The system works correctly.
●
Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice
connection.
Information call
1)
With the information call, a call is made to
SEAT, S.A. customer service.
Assistance call
1)
With the assistance call you can directly re-
quest specialised help in the event of a
breakdown.
Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is
transmitted, e.g. your current location.
Emergency call service
1)
If an emergency call is conducted manually
or activated automatically in the event of an
accident with an airbag triggering, informa-
tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast,
e.g. the current location of the vehicle
›››
page 365.
If the call is public, the person on the other
end of the line uses the language of the
country in which you are located.
If the call is private, the person on the other
end of the line will assist you in the language
you have configured in the Infotainment sys-
tem. If the configured language is not availa-
ble, English will be used.
Diversion to 112 emergency number
In some situations where the emergency call
service is limited or cannot be carried out, an
emergency call is made to 112.
»
1)
Only available in certain countries.
43
Emergencies
The following conditions may cause the
emer
gency call service to function in a limi-
ted manner or the call to be diverted to the
112 emergency number:
●
The emergency call is made from an area
with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as
well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build-
ings, garages, underground walkways, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
In areas with sufficient mobile telephone
and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone
network of the telecommunications operator
in question may not be available.
●
In some countries, the emergency call serv-
ice may not be available due to legal rea-
sons. There is no valid license for the use of
the emergency call service.
●
The components of the vehicle required for
the emergency phone call are damaged or
do not get enough power.
●
In some countries, the emergency call serv-
ice may not be available and depending on
the location of the vehicle, the control lamp
LEDs, and even the operation of the different
types of calls, could have a specific behav-
iour.
Note
Breakdown service and information calls
can incur an additional cost on your t
ele-
phone bill.
Emergency equipment
V
ehicle tool kit
Fig. 38 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
gage compartment: v
ehicle tool kit.
The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor
panel in the luggage compartment. T
o ac-
cess the vehicle tools
›››
page 140.
The tool kit includes:
Adapter for the anti-theft bolt
Towing eye, removable
Wheel spanner
Crank handle for jack
Jack
Hook for extracting the central wheel
trims
Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Some of the items listed are only provided in
cert
ain model versions, or are optional extras.
WARNING
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spar
e wheel are loose in the interior
they can be violently thrown in case of a
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-
cially in accidents, causing serious injury.
●
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
cause injury or accidents.
●
Never work with inappropriate or dam-
aged t
ools.
Note
The jack does not generally require any
maint
enance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
44
Self-help
Tyre repairs
T
MS (Tyre Mobility System)
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal
punct
ures caused by the penetration of a for-
eign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws
or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure
about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
miliar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C
(-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
t
yre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
ger
ous, especially when filling the tyre at
the roadside. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is
flat and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
porary emergency use only until you can
reach the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre
mobility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must
be cleaned immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
the reach of small children.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and put it in gear when
using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce
the risk of involuntary movement of the ve-
hicl
e .
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same perf
ormance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
ing any l
egal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
at SEAT deal
erships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the t
yre mobility system’s manu-
facturer.
45
Emergencies
Anti-puncture kit contents
Fig. 39
Standard representation: anti-punc-
t
ure kit contents.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the fl
oor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
›››
Fig. 39:
Valve insert remover
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor (depending on the ver-
sion, the model may vary).
ON/OFF switch
1
2
3
4
5
Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
in the infl
ator tube).
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the inflator tube).
Tube for inflating tyres
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at
the l
ower end for a valve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the
›
››
Fig. 39
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ace it on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››
Fig. 39
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube
›
››
Fig. 39
3
into
the seal
ant bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
›››
Fig. 39
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube into the tyre valve.
6
7
8
9
10
11
●
With the bottl
e upside down, empty all of
the contents into the tyre.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool
›››
Fig. 39
1
.
Infl
ating the tyre
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
›››
Fig. 39
8
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
››
Fig. 39
6
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector
›
››
Fig. 39
9
into the
v
ehicle's 12-volt socket
›››
page 153.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the
ON/OFF switch
›››
Fig. 39
5
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches 2.
0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).
A maximum of 8 minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
46
Self-help
and request assistance from an authorised
t
echnician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker
›››
Fig. 39
2
to the in-
strument clust
er, within the driver's visual
field.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 47.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
sor and the infl
ator tube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
rial.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 oper
ational minutes to avoid
overheating! Before switching on the air
compr
essor again, let it cool for several mi-
nutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube
›
››
Fig. 39
5
again
and check the pr
essure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP
a) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The t
yre cannot be
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP
a) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-
sur
e is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Changing a wheel
What t
o do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and
in a saf
e place as far away from traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.
●
Automatic transmission: s
witch on the park-
ing lock by pressing button P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Make sure that the vehicle tool kit
›››
page 44 and the spare wheel
›››
page 352 are ready.
●
Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Al
ways observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving.
47
Emergencies
Integral wheel trim
Fig. 40
Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for ac-
cess t
o the wheel nuts.
Removing
●
Take the wheel brace and the wire hook
from the vehicle tool kit
›››
page 44.
●
Hook the wire through one of the grooves of
the trim.
●
Insert the box spanner through the hook,
rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim
›››
Fig. 40.
Fitting
●
Press the trim against the wheel so that the
hole for the valve fits over the tyre valve.
●
Make sure that the trim is correctly fitted all
the way around the wheel. If you are using an
anti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the opposite
position to the valve.
Wheel bolt caps
Fig. 41 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools
›
››
Fig. 38)
over the cap until it clicks into place
›››
Fig. 41.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
The caps protect the wheel nuts and should
be remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a
special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking
bolts and is not for use with standard wheel
nuts.
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig. 42
Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapt
er.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
●
Remove the wheel cover or the cap.
●
Insert the special adapter
›
››
Fig. 42
1
(ve-
hicl
e tools
›››
page 44) onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt
›››
page 49.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt and k
eep it in a safe
place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a
new adapter, you can obtain it from the
SEAT Official Service, indicating the code
number.
48
Self-help
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig. 43
Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.
Fig. 44
Wheel change: tyre valve
1
and the
corr
ect position for the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt
2
or
3
.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the
car t
o loosen the wheel nuts.
Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push
on the end of the wheel wrench with your
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
take care not to slip during this operation.
Loosening wheel nuts
●
Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 43.
●
Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise
›››
.
Impor
tant information about wheel nuts
Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-
cially matched during construction. There-
fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
wheel nuts with the right length and heads
must be used. This ensures that wheels are
fitted securely and that the brake system
functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same
model.
In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
›››
Fig. 44
2
or
3
, taking the tyre valve’s po-
sition as r
eference
1
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e to mount the hubcap.
WARNING
If the wheel nuts are not properly tight-
ened, they coul
d come loose while driving
and cause an accident, serious injury and
l
oss of vehicle control.
●
Use only wheel nuts which correspond to
the rim in question.
●
Never use different wheel nuts.
●
Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
sible to screw them easily.
●
To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the
car from the factory.
●
The wheel nuts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
●
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or
to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts
have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
que, they could come loose while driving.
●
Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
rims with bolted ring trims.
●
If wheel nuts are tightened below the
prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
come loose while driving. If tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads
can be damaged.
49
Emergencies
Raise the vehicle
Fig. 45
Jack position points.
Fig. 46
Cross member: positioning the jack on
the v
ehicle.
●
Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm
gr
ound. If necessary use a large, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping
›››
.
●
Find the support point on the strut (sunk
en
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
›››
Fig. 45.
●
Turn the jack crank handle, located below
the strut support point, to raise it until the
tab
1
›
››
Fig. 46 is below the housing provi-
ded.
●
Align the jack so that tab
1
“grips” onto
the housing pr
ovided on the strut and the mo-
bile base
2
is resting on the ground. The
base pl
ate
2
should fall vertically with re-
spect t
o the support point
1
.
●
Continue turning the jack until the wheel is
slightly lift
ed off the ground.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack is only designed
f
or changing wheels on this model. On no
account attempt to use it for lifting heavier
vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
●
Make sure the jack remains stable. If the
surface is slippery or soft, the jack could
slip or sink, respectively, with the conse-
quent risk of causing injuries.
●
Lift the vehicle using only the jack sup-
plied from the factory. Other jacks, even
those approved for other SEAT models
could slip, with the consequent risk of in-
jury.
●
Place the jack only at the support points
provided on the strut and align it. Other-
wise, the jack could slip because it does
not have sufficient grip on the vehicle: risk
of injury!
●
You should never place a body limb such
as an arm or l
eg under a raised vehicle that
is solely supported by the jack.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!.
●
Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
side or the engine is running.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. The vehicle may come loose from
the jack due to the engine vibrations.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the
cr
ossbar. Place the jack only at the support
points provided on the strut and align it.
Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Removing and installing a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
nuts and r
aising the vehicle with the jack.
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-
son, please take care and get a second per-
son to assist you.
50
Self-help
Taking off the wheel
●
Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box
spanner and pl
ace them on a clean surface.
●
Take off the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the direction of rotation of the tyre
›››
page 51.
●
Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel into position.
●
Screw on the wheel nuts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
●
To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts
use the corresponding adaptor.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack.
●
Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-
agonal pairs (not in a circle).
●
Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on
›››
page 48.
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-
ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-
que checked immediately with a torque
wrench that is working perfectly.
Before checking tightening torque, have any
rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they
could come loose while driving.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have
been designed t
o operate best when rotating
in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
tyres with directional tread. Always observe
the indicated direction of rotation in order to
guarantee optimum grip and help avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
of particular importance when the road sur-
face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
sible or remount it with the correct direction
of rotation.
Works after changing a wheel
●
Alloy wheels: r
eplace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
gage compartment
›››
page 139.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
t
or, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
›››
page 351.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench
›››
page 51. Meanwhile, drive
carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
51
Emergencies
Changing the windscreen
wiper bl
ades
Wiper service position
Fig. 47
Wipers in service position.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
The wiper arms can be r
aised when the wip-
ers are in service position
›››
Fig. 47.
●
Close the bonnet
›››
page 326.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
wards briefly
›››
page 127
4
.
Bef
ore driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
tion.
Note
●
The windscr
een wiper arms can be
moved to the service position only when
the bonnet is properly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper
bl
ades
Fig. 48 Changing the windscreen wiper
bl
ades
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
st
andard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty
›››
.
If this does not pr
oduce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
be replaced immediately. These are availa-
ble from qualified workshops.
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper
arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
position
›››
page 52.
●
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's
fastening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used
›››
.
Changing the windscr
een wiper blades
●
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
52
Self-help
●
Pr
ess and hold release button
›››
Fig. 48
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
r
ection of the arrow.
●
Fit a new wiper blade of the same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
into place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
●
Separate the wiper arm from the rear win-
dow.
●
Remove the blade from the holder below
the centre. During this operation, hold the
wiper arm firmly.
●
Fit the new blade (of the same length and
type) into the housing of the wipe arm by
pressing it in place. When doing so, hold the
wiper arm by the upper end.
●
Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the win-
dow.
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
duce visibilit
y and increase the risk of acci-
dent and serious injury.
●
Always replace damaged or worn wind-
screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-
ger clean the windscreen properly.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dir
ty windscreen wipers
could scratch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 52.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Jump start
Jump l
eads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cr
oss section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
●
The v
ehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
53
Emergencies
Jump start: description
Fig. 49
Diagram of connections for vehicles
without St
art-Stop system.
Fig. 50
Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art-Stop system.
Jump lead terminal connections
S
witch off the ignition of both vehicles
›››
.
1.
Connect one end of the r
ed jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the fl
at battery
A
›
››
Fig. 49.
Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicl
e providing assistance
B
.
In v
ehicles without a Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
oviding the current
B
›
››
Fig. 49.
In vehicles with a Start-stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
id piece of met
al in the engine block, or
to the engine block itself
›››
Fig. 50.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bol-
t
ed to the engine block or to the engine
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery
A
.
P
osition the leads in such a way that
they cannot come into contact with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
5.
6.
7.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads,
switch off the dipped beam headlights if
they are switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage
peaks which are generated when the
leads are disconnected.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
minals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Pl
ease note the safety warnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 326.
●
The battery providing assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
8.
9.
10.
11.
54
Self-help
(12V) and approximately the same capaci-
t
y (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-
ply could result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!
Even after the battery has thawed, battery
acid could leak and cause chemical burns.
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an
explosion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-
ted from the battery could be ignited by
sparks. Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in
the other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could
result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise el
ectricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
Tow start and towing
Intr
oduction
Tow-starting means st
arting the engine of
the vehicle while another pulls it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another
that is not roadworthy.
Always consider the legal provisions relating
to tow-starting and towing.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
The jump start should be used instead
›››
page 53.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
tion on!
The 12-volt vehicle battery drains if the vehi-
cle is towed with the engine switched off and
the ignition connected. Depending on the
battery charge status, the drop in voltage
may be so large, even after just a few mi-
nutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle
may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In
vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the
st
eering wheel could lock
›››
.
WARNING
A vehicle with no power should never be
t
owed.
●
During towing, never switch off the igni-
tion with the starter button. Otherwise, the
electronic lock of the steering column
could suddenly get blocked and it would be
impossible to steer the vehicle. This could
cause an accident, serious injury and loss
of control of the vehicle.
●
If during towing the vehicle runs out of
power, stop towing immediately and re-
quest the assistance of specialist person-
nel.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity
change consider
ably during towing. Please
observe the following instructions to mini-
mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jury:
●
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
–
You should depress the brake much
harder as the brake servo does not op-
erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
crashing into the towing vehicle.
–
More strength is required at the steer-
ing wheel as the power steering does
not operate when the engine is switch-
ed off.
»
55
Emergencies
●
As the driv
er of the towing vehicle:
–
Accelerate with particular care and
caution.
–
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
–
Brake earlier than usual and more
smoothly.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid
and towing eye carefully.
●
Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and damage it during towing.
Instructions for tow-starting
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-
st
arted. The jump start should be used in-
stead
›››
page 53.
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed:
●
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged,
because in vehicles with the Keyless Access
locking and ignition system the steering re-
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the
electronic lock of the steering column be re-
leased if they are activated.
●
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
ly.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
tow-started (in the case of manual gear-
boxes):
●
Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
●
Keep the clutch pressed down.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ing lights of both vehicles.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
Once the engine starts, press the clutch
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding
with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
●
When t
ow-starting, unburnt fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and damage
it.
●
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m
in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-
age to the catalytic converter.
Note
The vehicle can only be jump-started if the
el
ectronic parking brake and, if appropri-
ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-
umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no
power supply or there is an electric system
fault, the engine must be jump-started to
deactivate the electronic parking brake
and the el
ectronic lock of the steering col-
umn.
Towing instructions
Towing requires some expertise and experi-
ence
, especially when using a tow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
During towing, it should be ensured that no
impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
generated. When towing on an unpaved
road, there is always a risk of overloading and
damaging the anchorage points.
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
the change of direction even with the hazard
warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
hazard warning lights will go off. When the
turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
matically reactivated.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
●
Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
not bl
ocked, and the electronic parking brake
may be deactivated and the turn signals and
wash/wipe operated.
56
Self-help
●
Mor
e strength is required at the steering
wheel as the power steering does not oper-
ate when the engine is switched off.
●
You should depress the brake much harder
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid
hitting the towing vehicle.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-
ilarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted
if it has been specially designed to be instal-
led on a tow hitch
›››
page 294.
When the vehicle has to be towed:
Check whether the vehicle may be towed
›››
page 57, Cases where towing the vehi-
cle is not permitted.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
road.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
lector lever in the N position
›››
page 226.
●
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at
speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles).
●
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with
automatic transmission are only allowed to
be towed with the front wheels suspended.
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive
(4Drive)
Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be
towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-
cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-
pended, the engine must be switched off,
otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
mitted
●
If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
cant.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-
propriate, the electronic parking brake can-
not be deactivated or the electronic lock of
the steering column released.
●
If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
elled.
●
When, for example, after an accident, the
smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
operation cannot be guaranteed.
When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
●
Observe legal requirements.
●
Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
on towing vehicles.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
cant in the aut
omatic transmission the car
may only be towed with the driven wheels
lifted clear of the road, or transported on a
special car transporter or trailer.
Note
The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-
tr
onic parking brake and the electronic
lock of the steering column are
»
57
Emergencies
deactivated. If the vehicle has no power
supply or ther
e is an electric system fault,
the engine must be jump-started
›››
page 53 to deactivate the electronic
parking brake and the electronic lock of the
steering column.
Front towline anchorage
Fig. 51
On the right side of the front bumper:
r
emove the cover.
Fig. 52 Right side of the front bumper: towline
anchor
age in position.
The housing of the removable towline an-
chor
age is on the right side of the front bump-
er underneath a cover
›››
Fig. 51.
The towing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››
page 56.
Fitting the towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 44.
●
Remove the cover by pressing down on its
base and leave it hanging from the vehicle
›››
Fig. 51.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 52
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can completely and securely tighten the
t
owing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Replace the cover and tighten on its right
side until the tab snaps into the bumper.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tight
ened. Otherwise, it could be
released while towing and tow-starting.
58
Self-help
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 53
On the right side of the rear bumper:
r
emove the cover.
Fig. 54 On the right side of the rear bumper:
t
owline anchorage in position.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
right side of the r
ear bumper behind a lid
›››
Fig. 53.
Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing
bracket do not have any housing for the
screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,
the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-
led and used for towing
›››
page 294,
›››
.
Bear in mind the instructions f
or towing
›››
page 56.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-
out a factory-equipped towing bracket)
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 44.
●
Press the bottom side of the lid
›››
Fig. 53 to
unclip it.
●
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
hicle.
●
Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-
ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 54
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can compl
etely and securely tighten the
towing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
●
The t
owing eye must always be com-
pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
could be released while towing and tow-
starting.
●
If the v
ehicle is factory-equipped with a
towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow
with a tow bar if this has been specially de-
signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an
unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow
hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-
stead, a tow rope should be used.
59
Emergencies
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Intr
oduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
el
ectrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can giv
e serious electrical shocks, causing
burns and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a curr
ent circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
perage (same colour and markings) and
siz
e.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec-
trical system, before replacing a fuse al-
ways turn off the ignition, the lights and all
electrical elements.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they
can damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component may hav
e more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig. 55
On the driver's side dashboard: fuse
bo
x cover.
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
bel
ow the dash panel
●
Open: fold the cover down
›››
Fig. 55.
●
Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks
into place.
Identifying fuses below the dashboard by
colours
Colour Amp rating
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
60
Fuses and bulbs
Colour Amp rating
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid
problems with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-
age to the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 56
In the engine compartment: fuse box
co
ver.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Open the bonnet
›
››
page 326.
●
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
box cover
›››
Fig. 56.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.
Replace a blown fuse
Fig. 57
Image of a blown fuse.
Preparations
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
cal equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›
››
page 60,
›››
page 61.
Recognise a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 57.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Fuse placement
Fuses in the vehicle interior
No. Consumers/Amps
3 Trailer 25
4 SCR, Adblue 20
5 Automatic gearbox lever 25
6 Interior light 30
8 Sunroof 20
7 Heated seats 30
9 Left door 30
11 Trailer 15
»
61
Emergencies
No. Consumers/Amps
12 Right lights 40
13 Central locking 40
14 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30
16 Airbag 7.5
17 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10
18 KESSY 7.5
19 Instrument panel 7.5
20 Connectivity Box 7.5
21 Rear camera 7.5
24 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15
25 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25
26 Right door 30
27 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25
28
PHEV. Switching off the high voltage
syst
em for rescue tasks. Identified
by a yellow label.
10
29 Trailer 15
30 Radio 30
31 Trailer 25
34 230V socket 30
35 Left lights 40
36 Air conditioner fan 40
No. Consumers/Amps
37 Electric rear lid 30
39 Heated steering wheel 10
40 Alarm horn 7.5
41 Gateway 7.5
42 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5
43
Air conditioning and heating con-
tr
ol panel, rear window heating, AA
compressor
10
44
Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light
s
witch, reverse light, interior light-
ing, lit-up door sill
7.5
45 Steering column 7.5
46 Radio display 7.5
47 Driving mode. 10
48 USB 7.5
52 12V socket 20
58
Parking sensors, parking assist
control unit, front camera, radar
7.5
59
Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec-
trochromic mirror
7.5
60
Diagnosis, headlight control unit,
headlight adjuster
7.5
61 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5
65 Sound amplifier 10
No. Consumers/Amps
66 Rear window wiper 15
67 Heated rear window 30
In-line fuse/Amps
230 V rear power sockets 30
Electric driver's seat 15
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
No. Consumers/Amps
2 Engine control unit 7.5
3 Fuel pump control unit 7.5/10/20
4 Left headlight KL 30 Signal 15
5 Right headlight KL 30 Signal 15
7 Automatic gearbox pump 30
8 KL 30 Signal brake servo 40
9 Horn 15
10 Front windscreen washer 30
11 PHEV Climate 7.5
12 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30
13 ESP control unit 25
14 Standheizung 20
15 ESP control unit 40
62
Fuses and bulbs
No. Consumers/Amps
16 PHEV, Automatic gearbox unit 50
17 PTC 40
18 PTC 40
20 Front electronic differential 15
21 Engine control unit 7.5
22 Starter motor 30
23
Engine control unit (diesel/pet-
r
ol)
15
24 Engine sensors 7.5/10
25 Engine sensors 7.5/10
26 Engine power supply 7.5/10
27 Lambda probe 10/15
28 Engine 10/20
29 Fuel pump control unit 15/20/30
30 Pressure pump 1.0 10
33 PTC 40
Note
●
In the v
ehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These
should only be changed by a specialised
workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment list
ed in the ta-
bles below pertain only to certain versions
of the model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while
correct at the time of printing, are subject
to change.
Bulbs
Changing bulbs
Full-LED headlights
Full
-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam
and route light) with light emitting diodes
(LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Fog lights, rear lights, license plate light,
side turn signals and additional brake light
Taking into account that they use LED bulbs,
they should be replaced at a technical serv-
ice centre.
63
Operation
Fig. 58 Instruments and controls.
64
Controls and displays
Operation
Contr
ols and displays
Interior view
Overview
Door handle
Air v
ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Control lever for:
–
T
urn signals and main beam
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
–
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Switches for:
–
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 86
–
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and voice control sys-
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 228
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Control lever for:
–
Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 127
–
Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
–
On-boar
d computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 29
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
USB type-C ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Depending on the equipment:
–
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
–
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 272
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Adjustable steering column. . . . . . . . . . 17
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Control for lighting and demisting
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Control for the electric adjustment
of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Note
●
Some of the equipment list
ed in this sec-
tion is only fitted on certain models or are
optional extras.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
●
The arr
angement of controls on right-
hand drive models may be slightly different
from the layout shown in
›››
page 64. How-
ever, the symbols used to identify the con-
trols are the same.
65
Operation
Instruments and warn-
ing/contr
ol lamps
Instrument panel
Introduction
The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument
panel digit
al lap timer or one Digital (SEAT
Cockpit).
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
battery that is heavily discharged or newly
changed some system settings (such as the
time, the date, the personalised comfort set-
tings and the programming) might be altered
or deleted. Check and correct these settings
once the battery is sufficiently charged.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
tr
ols when driving.
●
To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
only make adjustments to the instructions
on the screen of the instrument panel and
to the instructions on the screen of the Info-
tainment system when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
66
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Analogue instrument panel
Fig. 59
Instrument panel, on dash panel.
Details of the instruments
›
››
Fig. 59:
Revolution counter (with the engine run-
ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-
nute)
›››
page 80.
Engine coolant temperature indicator
›››
page 83.
Displays on the screen
›››
page 70.
Speedometer.
Fuel gauge
›››
page 81.
1
2
3
4
5
67
Operation
Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)
Fig. 60 Conventionally powered vehicles: SEAT
Digit
al Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic
view).
Details of the instruments
›
››
Fig. 60:
Control and warning lamps
›››
page 87
Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-
nute the engine is running
›››
page 80.
Gear engaged or selector lever posi-
tion
Screen display
›››
page 70
Speedometer
Digital speed display
Information Profile
›››
page 68.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument
panel digit
al with monochrome screen in col-
our high resolution. It has a 5 views accessi-
ble using the button of the multifunction
steering wheel. By selecting different infor-
mation profiles, indications other than the
classic circular instruments can be displayed,
such as navigation data, multimedia informa-
tion or travel data.
The 5 views are:
●
Classic
●
Dynamic
●
Assistance systems
●
Navigation
●
Night
All views will display information on the
screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-
cle status, navigation
1)
and driving aids
1)
.
Information profiles
Using the buttons / on the multifunction
steering wheel you can navigate through the
different information of the SEAT Digital
Cockpit.
1)
Depending on the version.
68
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Information on the vehicle status, travel data
and assist
ants will be displayed on the left
side.
On the right side information will be dis-
played on audio, telephone, compass and
navigation manoeuvres.
Depending on the view in the central area of
the SEAT Digital Cockpit , information will be
displayed on:
●
Classic View and Dynamic View: Initial da-
ta, date, distance travelled and autonomy.
Turning the right thumbwheel on the multi-
function steering wheel: navigation map, road
signs, driving data (clicking on switches
between the different memories).
●
Assists View: This is accessed by pressing
the button or the button on the multi-
function steering wheel. Turning the right
thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel displays the list of assistants. Press
to turn the desired assistant on/off.
●
Navigation View: By pressing the button
on the multifunction steering wheel and then
turning the thumbwheel you can view the
map in a larger or smaller view. If you pressed
the button again, the map returns to auto-
matic scale.
●
Night View: The speed is displayed in digital
format.
Classic View
The revolutions per minute and speedometer
needles appear in full length by a long press
on the button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel, regardless of the menu displayed
in the central area
›››
Fig. 60.
With another long press on the button ,
the display will returns to the previous view.
Or looking in the instrument panel menu for
the Close option using the right hand
thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel, and then press .
Information that may appear in the central
area of the SEAT Digital Cockpit speed-
ometer
●
Audio
●
Telephone
●
Compass
●
Navigation indications (the most recent
destinations are displayed by pressing the ar-
row on the right of the multifunction steering
wheel)
●
> (close classic view).
Information that may appear in the central
area of the SEAT Digital Cockpit revolution
counter
●
Consumption and average consumption.
By pressing the arrow on the left of the multi-
function steering wheel, you can switch be-
tween the different memories of the travel
data.
●
Autonomy (fuel tank level).
●
Lubricating oil and coolant temperature
●
Average speed. By pressing the arrow on
the left of the multifunction steering wheel,
you can switch between the different memo-
ries of the travel data.
●
AdBlue autonomy.
●
Other travel data: km travelled and driving
time. By pressing the arrow on the left of the
multifunction steering wheel, you can switch
between the different memories of the travel
data.
●
Assist systems.
●
> (cl
ose classic view).
69
Operation
Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 61 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument
panel (cl
assic view).
Details of the instruments
›
››
Fig. 61:
Control and warning lamps
›››
page 87
Rev counter and Powermeter. Revolu-
tions per minute the engine is running
›››
page 80.
Gear engaged or selector lever posi-
tion
Screen display
›››
page 70
Speedometer
Digital speed display
Information Profile
›››
page 68.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument
panel displ
ay
Different pieces of information can be dis-
played on the screen of the instrument panel,
depending on the features of the vehicle.
●
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
●
Warning and information messages
●
Odometer
●
Time
›››
page 80
●
Indications of the radio and navigation sys-
t
em
●
Indications of the phone
●
Outside temperature
●
Indications of the compass
●
Selector lever positions
●
Gear-change recommendation
›››
page 233
●
Combined range (hybrid vehicles)
›››
page 71
●
Display of travel data (multifunction dis-
play) and menus for different settings
›››
page 72
●
Service interval display
›››
page 84
●
Speed warning
›››
page 73
●
Speed warning for winter tyres
70
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
St
art-Stop system status display
›››
page 223
●
Signs detected by the road signs detection
system and warning that the maximum per-
mitted speed has been exceeded
›››
page 76
●
Active cylinder management (ACT®) status
indication
›››
page 236
●
Low consumption driving
●
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
●
Driver assistance system display
›››
page 238
●
Copyright
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-
ing, the instrument panel display shows if any
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-
ted by an audible warning. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
el fitted.
Selector control positions (DSG® dual
clutch gearbox)
The current position of the selector control is
shown on the side of the control and on the
instrument cluster display. When the control
is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic posi-
tion, in some cases, the gear engaged in
each case is shown on the instrument cluster
display .
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C
(+43 °F)
›››
.
When the v
ehicle is stationary, when the aux-
iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
perature due to the heat produced by the en-
gine.
The margin of measurement ranges from
-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
tion for saving fuel
›››
page 233.
Odometer
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
●
Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-
ment system or the multifunction steering
wheel
›››
page 73.
To reset the trip odometer (trip ) to 0:
●
When in Travel data select trip.
●
Hold the button on the windscreen
wiper lever or the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel down for about 2 sec-
onds.
Combined operating range display
(hybrid vehicles)
The value shown is calculated and updated
according to the driving style. Therefore, the
range can vary even when the fuel tank is full
and the high-voltage battery is fully charged.
Range can be increased by reducing or
switching off comfort consumers, e.g. air con-
ditioning or seat heating.
Speed warning for winter tyres
If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is
displayed on the instrument panel
›››
page 72.
The speed warning can be set in the infotain-
ment system using the function button >
Vehicle > Exterior > Tyres
›››
page 93.
Indications of the compass
Depending on the equipment, when the igni-
tion is on, the instrument panel display
»
71
Operation
indicates the direction in which you are driv-
ing with a symbol, e
.g. NW for Northwest.
When the Infotainment system is on and there
is no route guidance active, the graphic rep-
resentation of a compass is also shown.
Low consumption driving
Depending on the equipment, when the vehi-
cle is moving is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an
economical consumption status due to active
cylinder management (ACT®)
›››
page 236.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
●
Switch the ignition on, but do not start the
engine.
●
See Service menu
›››
page 72.
Copyright
Legal text about the property rights and
copyrights of the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is high-
er than fr
eezing temperature, some roads
and bridges could be frozen.
●
The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
there may be a risk of freezing.
●
At outside t
emperatures above +4 °C
(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
“ice crystal symbol” is not on.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
Ther
e are different instrument panels and
therefore the versions and instructions on
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts,
faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
trol warning lamps.
●
Some indications on the instrument panel
screen may be concealed by a sudden
event, e.g. an incoming call.
●
Depending on the equipment, some set-
tings and instructions can be carried out or
displayed on the infotainment system as
well.
●
If there are several warnings at the same
time, the symbols will be displayed one af-
ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
bols will stay on until you remove the
cause.
●
If when switching on the ignition warnings
are shown about existing faults, it might not
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. In this case,
go to a specialised workshop and request a
repair.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items
av
ailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-
tronics and features.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is stationary.
■
Driving data
›››
page 73
■
Assist systems.
■
Front Assist On/Off
›››
page 245
■
ACC (only display)
›››
page 249
■
Lane Assist On/Off
›››
page 257
■
Side Assist On/Off
›››
page 264
■
Navigation.
■
Audio.
■
Telephone.
■
Vehicle status.
›››
page 74
Service Menu
In the Service menu various settings can be
adjust
ed depending on the features.
Open the Service menu
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
●
To open up the Service menu, select the
Range information profile while in the Driv-
ing data menu, and keep the key pressed
on the multifunction steering wheel for
72
Instruments and warning/control lamps
approximately 5 seconds. When it is released,
the Service menu will be displ
ayed. Now
you can browse through the menu using the
keys on the multifunction steering wheel as
usual.
Vehicles with digital instrument panel (SEAT
Digital Cockpit):
●
While in Classic View, go to the Initial Da-
ta screen, press the button on the multi-
function steering wheel for about 5 seconds
and release it.
●
Next, the Configuration list menu is
displayed, where you can choose between
the Service menu or the View selection
from where the instrument cluster views can
be switched on and off.
Restart the service interval display
Select the Service menu and follow the in-
structions on the screen of the instrument
panel.
Restart the oil service
Select the Restore Oil service menu and
follow the instructions on the instrument pan-
el display.
Reset driving data (vehicles with an ana-
logue instrument cluster)
Select the Reset trip menu and follow the
instructions on the instrument panel display
to reset the value.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Select the menu Engine code. The identify-
ing letters of the engine will be shown on the
instrument cluster display at the bottom left.
Setting the clock
Select the Time menu and set the correct
time by turning the right thumbwheel of the
multifunction steering wheel.
Next Service
This specifies when the next workshop in-
spection is scheduled.
Driving data indicator (multifunc-
tion display)
3 Applies t
o vehicles with analogue instrument
panel
The display of the travel data (multifunction
display) shows different values about the
journey and the consumption.
Change from one display to another
●
Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion st
eering wheel
›››
page 86.
Changing memory
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
●
Press the button on the windscreen
wiper lever or the button of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
Vehicles with digital instrument panel:
●
Depending on the view, select Trip data
and press the left arrow or the button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Since start: The memory is deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than 2
hours.
Since refuelling: Display and stor-
age of the journey data and the con-
sumption values collected. When refuel-
ling, the memory is deleted.
Long-term: This memory contains trav-
el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and
59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,
or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or
9999.9 km. When one of these values is
exceeded (varies depending on the ver-
sion of the instrument panel), the memo-
ry is deleted.
»
–
–
–
73
Operation
Delete journey data presets
●
When in T
ravel data select desired memo-
ry.
●
Hold the button of the multifunction
steering wheel or the button of the multi-
function wheel pressed down for about 2
seconds.
Select the instructions
In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-
cle settings, you can display different travel
data
›››
page 93.
Current consumption: The current
fuel consumption display operates
throughout the journey, in litres/100 km;
and with the engine running and the ve-
hicle stopped, in litres/hour.
Average consumption: The average
fuel consumption is displayed after driv-
ing for approximately 300 metres.
Travelling time: This indicates the
hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig-
nition was switched on.
Range: Approximate distance in km that
can still be travelled if the same driving
style is maintained.
–
–
–
–
AdBlue range or : Approximate
distance in km that can still be travelled
with the current level of the AdBlue®
tank with the same driving style. The in-
dication appears from a range of less
than 2,400 km and cannot be deactiva-
ted.
1)
Distance: Distance covered in km (m)
after switching on the ignition.
Average speed: The average speed
will be shown after driving for approxi-
mately 100 metres.
FAS: Reduced assistant indication.
Oil and coolant temperature indication
(only with digital instrument panel)
The engine reaches its operating tempera-
ture when, under normal driving conditions,
the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)
and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required
from the engine and the outside temperature
is high, the engine oil temperature may in-
crease. This does not present any problem as
long as the warning lamps or
›››
page 331 do not appear on the display.
–
–
–
–
Warning and information messages
(Vehicle status)
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
s
witched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster
display as red and yellow warning symbols
2)
accompanied by messages and, depending
on the case, even an audible warning
›››
page 87. The representation of the mes-
sages and symbols may vary depending on
the version of the instrument panel.
Existing faults can also be checked manually.
To do so, open the menu Vehicle info
›››
page 92.
Priority 1 warning (red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Stop
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-
nal assistance.
Priority 2 warning (yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Operating
faults or the lack of operating fluids can
1)
Not available in all countries.
2)
With an analogue instrument panel, the warn-
ings ar
e always shown in white.
74
Instruments and warning/control lamps
cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.
Check the f
aulty function as soon as possible.
If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the
vehicle.
Accessing warnings and information
●
In the infotainment system, press > Ve-
hicle data > Vehicle status.
●
Or:
1)
Access the Vehicle menu, then press
the button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the button on the wind-
screen wiper lever and select Warning mes-
sage memories.
Driver alert system (break recom-
mendation)
Fig. 62
On the instrument panel display: driver
al
ert system symbol.
The Fatigue detection informs the driver when
their driving behaviour sho
ws signs of fatigue.
Function and operation
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 62. The mes-
sage on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button on the multi function steering wheel
›››
page 85.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display
›››
page 73.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the infotainment system using the
function button > Assistants > Driver
alerts > Fatigue detection
›››
page 93. A
mark indicates that the adjustment has been
activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
»
1)
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel.
75
Operation
●
At speeds bel
ow 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
gue det
ection system tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsi-
bility of driving to their full capacity.
●
Ne
ver drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
the information in the section
›››
page 75,
System limitations.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving ma-
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue detection has been developed
for driving on motorways and well paved
roads only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Road signs detection system
1)
Fig. 63 On the instrument panel display: ex-
ampl
es of recognised signals.
The traffic signal detection system is activa-
t
ed whenever the vehicle ignition is switched
on.
The system records the standard traffic signs
in front of the vehicle with a camera located
on the base of the interior mirror and provides
information about speed limits, hazard warn-
ings and overtaking prohibitions.
Within its limitations, the system also displays
additional signals, such as time-specific pro-
hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers
›››
page 294 or limitations that only apply in
the event of rain. Even on journeys without
signs, the system may display any applicable
speed limits.
1)
System available depending on the country.
76
Instruments and warning/control lamps
The traffic sign detection system does not
w
ork in all countries. Keep this in mind when
travelling abroad.
Shown on the display
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle
roads, besides speed limits and overtaking
provisions the system also displays the end of
prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the
time in other countries is always shown.
The traffic signs detected by the system are
displayed on the dash panel display
›››
Fig. 63 and, depending on the navigation
system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-
ment system as well
›››
page 89.
Hazard warning signs are not displayed in the
infotainment system.
Road sign detection system messages:
There are no traffic signs available
●
The system is in its start-up phase.
●
OR: the camera has not recognized any
mandatory or prohibitive sign.
Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display
●
There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop.
Speed warning currently unavailable
●
The speed warning function of the road
sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop.
Dynamic Road Sign Display: please
clean the windscreen.
●
The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.
Clean the windscreen.
Dynamic Road Sign Display currently
restricted.
●
The navigation system is not transmitting
data. Check if the navigation system has up-
dated maps.
●
OR: the vehicle is in a region not included
on the navigation system's map.
No data available
●
The traffic sign detection system does not
work in the current country.
Display of traffic signs
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
and evaluating the information from the cam-
era, the navigation system and the current
vehicle data, up to two valid road signs are
displayed, with their corresponding addition-
al signs:
●
First position. The sign that is currently val-
id for the driver is shown in the screen. For ex-
ample, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h
(100 mph)
›››
Fig. 63.
●
Second position. A second traffic sign may
be displayed in the second position, such as
a hazard warning sign, an overtaking prohibi-
tion or an alternative speed limit.
Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is
working while you are driving, the signal with
the additional rain sign will be shown first, on
the left, as it is the one that is applicable at
the time.
A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. no over-
taking at certain times, may be displayed.
Speed warning (depending on the instru-
ment panel)
If the system detects that the permitted
speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver
with a “gong” and visually with a message on
the dash panel display.
Trailer mode
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory and a trailer that is
electrically connected to the vehicle, it is
possible to activate or deactivate the display
of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,
such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
tions. It can be activated or deactivated in the
infotainment system using the button > As-
sistants > Driver alerts > Road signs de-
tect. > Consider trailer
›››
page 93.
For trailer mode, the display of speed limits
applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal
»
77
Operation
provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-
just
ed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a
range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and
130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed
greater than that which is permitted in the
country in question for driving with a trailer,
the system automatically displays the usual
speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h
(50 mph).
If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-
vated, the system displays the speed limits as
if there were no trailer hitched.
No entry sign
The traffic sign recognition system warns
acoustically and visually in the instrument
panel when a no entry sign is crossed on a
one-way road or an entrance to a motorway
or highway.
Limited operation
The traffic sign detection system has certain
limitations. The following cases may lead the
system to operate with limitations or not at
all:
●
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
rain, fog or intense mist.
●
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
on traffic or by the sun.
●
When driving at high speeds.
●
If the camera is covered or dirty.
●
If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
field of vision.
●
If the traffic signs are partially or totally
covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
cles.
●
In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
the regulations.
●
In the case of damaged or bent traffic
signs.
●
In the case of variable messages on over-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable
traffic signs or other lighting units).
●
If the maps on the navigation system are
not up-to-date.
●
In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles
that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on
lorries.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection
syst
em cannot change the limits imposed
by the laws of physics and only works with-
in the system's limits. Do not let the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
fog may lead to the system failing to dis-
play traffic signs or not displaying them
corr
ectly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications sho
wn on the traffic sign detec-
tion system may differ from the actual cur-
rent traffic situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the traffic signs.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
st
all in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
Never ignore the messages displayed.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
To avoid affecting the correct operation of
the syst
em, take the following points into
consideration:
78
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
R
egularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Always replace damaged or worn blades
when required to avoid lines on the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
●
The use of outdated maps on the naviga-
tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs incorrectly.
●
In the waypoints mode of the navigation
system, the traffic sign detection system is
only partly available.
●
Failure to heed the control lamps and
corresponding text messages when they
light up may result in damage to the vehi-
cle.
Eco-efficient driving assistance
Fig. 64
Eco-efficient driving assistance indi-
cation (schematic r
epresentation).
Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you
driv
e with care and with low energy con-
sumption by following instructions superim-
posed in the digital cockpit, depending on the
situation.
When you approach places such as a junc-
tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a
speed limit, the symbol is displayed along
with an event in the digital cockpit
›››
Fig. 64.
As soon as you follow the indication and take
your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle
adapts, based on the selected driving profile
and distance to the incident, brake energy re-
cuperation and speed.
Eco-efficient driving assistance uses the trip
data from the infotainment system and the
sensors of some assist systems. If no destina-
tion guidance is active, the most likely route is
used.
Pressing the accelerator can cancel the in-
tervention of the assistance at any time.
Eco-efficient driving assistance can be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem, in the assist system settings
›››
page 93.
Eco-efficient driving assistance is temporarily
switched off if:
●
The gear selector is in the S position.
●
The sport driving program is used.
●
Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC)
or cruise control (GRA).
When these conditions no longer exist, the
assistance is reactivated if it is switched on in
the assist system settings.
Eco-efficient driving assistance is available
depending on the equipment, although not in
all countries.
WARNING
The system is not a replacement for driver
aw
areness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu-
lations have priority over eco-driving notes.
»
79
Operation
Note
●
The appear
ance of the symbols may vary
slightly depending on the equipment and
model. System updates may modify or ex-
pand the symbols.
●
When the system is switched on, eco-ef-
ficient driving assistance can also increase
recuperation without any indication being
displayed. This can occur in situations such
as when the accelerator pedal is released
when a vehicle is driving in front. In this
case, energy recuperation is adapted
match the speed of the vehicle in front
without any indication being displayed.
Time
Setting the time on the infotainment sys-
t
em
●
Press > Settings.
●
Select the menu option Time and date to
set the time
›››
page 89.
Setting the time on analogue the instru-
ment panel
●
When in the Driving data menu, select
the Range function ( > Interior > Instru-
ment cluster).
●
Press the button on the multifunction
steering wheel until the Service menu is dis-
played on the instrument panel display
›››
page 72.
●
Select the menu Time.
●
Adjust the correct time by turning the right
thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine r
evolutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in any
gear after running-in and with the engine hot.
However, it is advisable to change up a gear
or move the selector lever to D (or lift your
foot off the accelerator) before the needle
reaches the red zone
›››
.
W
e recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
al information in
›››
page 233, Selecting the
optimal gear.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the
red zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
sav
e fuel and minimise emissions and en-
gine noise.
Power meter
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 65
Digital instrument panel: Power meter
80
Instruments and warning/control lamps
The lower left hand side of the rev counter
has tw
o colour coded areas:
Charge: Charging zone. Indicates the
amount of charge generated and the
maximum charge.
Power %: Electric traction zone. Indi-
cates the percentage of power used and
the maximum amount of power currently
available.
The power meter shows the usage level of
the electric drive. The power meter bar shows
the current usage level.
A finer coloured border indicates how much
the propulsion can currently be used. De-
pending on the selected driving program and
the current availability of electrical power,
the boundaries of the different colours can
vary.
The following displays can be seen on the
Power meter:
›››
Fig. 65
The vehicle recovers electrical energy.
e-Mode electric driving.
The combustion engine must be running.
With the Boost function, the vehicle drives
for a short period of time with maximum
power from both the electric motor and
the combustion engine.
Green
Blue
A
B
C
Battery level indicator
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 66 Digital instrument panel: battery level
indicat
or.
The small arrow next to the charging station
symbol indicat
es which side of the vehicle the
charging cover is on.
Note
●
Ne
ver drive with the tank completely
empty. Under certain circumstances, the
energy stored in the high-voltage battery
may not be sufficient to reach the nearest
service station.
●
When the outside temperature is very
low, and therefore the high-voltage battery
is very cold, difficulties may arise in start-
ing the internal combustion engine and the
range in the electric driving mode may be
reduced.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 67
Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge
Fig. 68 Digital instrument panel: fuel level in-
dicat
or located in different positions depend-
ing on the view.
Control lamps
It lights up yellow
Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has
been r
eached
›››
. Refuel as soon as you have the
opportunity.
In addition, in vehicles with an analogue instrument
cluster, when the fuel level is very low the lower LED
flashes red.
»
81
Operation
It lights up yellow
Presence of water in diesel.
T
urn off the engine and seek professional assistance.
The display only works when the ignition is
s
witched on.
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument
panel.
You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-
hicle in the
›››
page 371 section.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may
st
all in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes.
●
The steering system and the driver assis-
tance systems and brakes do not work
when the engine is running irregularly or
switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-
lar supply thereof.
●
Always refuel when there is only one
quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle
to stop due to lack of fuel.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
irr
egular fuel supply can cause misfiring
and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
system. The catalytic converter or the par-
ticul
ate filter may get damaged!
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to
the fuel pump symbol points out t
owards
the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank
flap.
Natural gas level (CNG)
3 V
alid in vehicles equipped with natural gas en-
gine (CNG)
Fig. 69 Digital instrument panel: : Nat
ural
gas gauge. : Petrol gauge
The display only works when the ignition is
s
witched on.
Control lamps
It lights up white
The vehicle is running on natural gas.
The l
amp goes dark when the natural gas runs out.
The engine changes to operate with petrol.
It lights up, and in addition, the low-
er diode lights up in yellow
The CNG fuel reserve level has been reached.
When the nat
ural gas level is very low, the lower icon
flashes yellow.
Things to note
If the v
ehicle is left parked for a long time im-
mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-
el indicator may not accurately indicate the
same level shown after refuelling when the
vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a
leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in
the gas tank for technical reasons after a
cooling phase just after refuelling.
Note
In vehicles with natural gas engines, the
petr
ol tank fuel level gauge may display
the refuelled amount with a slight delay
(depending on the refuelled amount).
82
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Coolant temperature indicator.
Fig. 70
Analogue instrument panel: engine
cool
ant temperature indicator.
Cool zone. The engine has not r
eached
operating temperature yet. Avoid high
speeds and stressing the engine if it has
not reached operating temperature.
Normal zone. At high outside tempera-
tures and when making the engine work
hard, the diodes may continue lighting up
and reach the upper zone. This is no
cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up
Warning area. When the engine is work-
ing hard, especially at high outside tem-
peratures, the diodes may light up in the
warning area.
The coolant temperature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on.
A
B
C
In vehicles with digital instrument panel (SEAT
Digit
al Cockpit) you can select to view the
coolant temperature in the corresponding
menu
›››
page 69.
Control and warning lamp
It lights up red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine cool
ant level too low, coolant temperature too
high.
Flashes red
Fault in the engine coolant system.
●
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
l
et it cool down.
●
Check the engine coolant level
›››
page 333.
●
If the warning lamp does not switch off even
if the coolant level is correct, request assis-
tance from specialised personnel.
Control and warning lamps (valid for hy-
brid vehicles)
It lights up red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine or high-v
oltage system coolant level too low,
engine or high-voltage system coolant temperature
too high.
and
Flashes red
Do not carry on driving!
Failure in the high-voltage cooling circuit. Discon-
nect the drive system and seek professional assis-
tance.
●
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
l
et it cool down.
●
Check the engine coolant level
›››
page 333.
●
Check the coolant level in the high-voltage
cooling circuit
›››
page 334. If the level is too
low DO NOT add coolant. Seek specialist
assistance immediately.
●
If the warning lamp does not switch off even
if the cool
ant level is correct, request assis-
tance from specialised personnel.
CAUTION
●
T
o ensure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature
›››
page 74 as a guide.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
»
83
Operation
●
The fr
ont spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
Service intervals
The service interval display appears on the
instrument clust
er screen and in the infotain-
ment system.
There are different versions of instrument
panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-
sions and instructions on the screens may
vary.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
In vehicles with Services established by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al-
ready pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use
and individual driving styles are considered.
The adv
ance warning first appears 20 days
before the date established for the corre-
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-
maining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and
the time is given in complete days. The cur-
rent service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
ly lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
out soon, a service reminder will be dis-
played when the ignition is switched on.
The figure displayed are the kilometres that
can still be travelled or the time until the next
service.
Service due
When the time for a service or an inspec-
tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-
ted when the ignition is switched on and the
fixed key symbol may appear on the in-
strument panel for a few seconds, along with
one of the following messages:
●
Service now!
●
Please have your vehicle inspec-
ted.
●
Oil change service due!
●
Oil change service and inspection
due!
Inspection of compressed natural gas
tanks (CNG) reminder
When less than 90 days for the review of the
compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when
the ignition is switched on, the instrument
panel display will a reminder for review of
the gas tanks and an audible warning will be
emitted.
As approaches the service date of inspection
of the gas tanks, the message and the audi-
ble warning will stop modify accordingly.
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Check the date of the current service on the
infotainment system
●
Press Settings; OR Vehicle data >
Vehicle status
›››
page 89.
●
Select the Data connection menu option
to display information about services.
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
●
Hold the button on the windscreen
wiper lever or the button on the multi-func-
tion steering wheel pressed down for about 5
seconds to view the service message.
84
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Vehicles with digital instrument panel
●
The date of the service can only be read
thr
ough the Service menu
›››
page 72.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
●
While in the Autonomy menu
›››
page 74,
press the button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel for about 4 seconds and release it.
The Services menu is accessed.
●
Select Reset Service or Reset Oil
Service (depending on the version or what
you want to do) and press the button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
●
The system will ask Do you want to re-
set?. By pressing the button again, the
Service is reset.
Vehicles with digital instrument panel
●
The service interval display can only be re-
set through the Service menu
›››
page 72.
Do not restart the indicator between the
service intervals, otherwise the information
displayed will be incorrect.
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed
service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible
oil change service.
Note
●
The service message disappears aft
er a
few seconds, when the engine is started or
when button is pressed on the wiper
lever, or the button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
●
In vehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected
for a long period of time, it is not possible to
calculate the date of the next service.
Therefore the service interval display may
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the
maximum service intervals permitted
›››
page 354.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this
reason we recommend that the service in-
terval display be reset by a SEAT author-
ised Dealer.
●
If the period of 48 months for an inspec-
tion at a specialised workshop of com-
pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-
ded, the vehicle may not working in this
mode.
Using the instrument panel
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
r
ead the different functions of the display by
scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
t
o an accident and cause injuries.
●
Never use the menus on the instrument
panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
Note
After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-
t
ery, check the system settings. If the pow-
er supply is interrupted, the system settings
might be incorrect or deleted.
85
Operation
Operation using the multifunction
st
eering wheel
Fig. 71
Right side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: buttons to the menus and information
displays on the instrument panel.
As long as a priority 1
›
››
page 74 warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button of the multifunction
steering wheel
›››
Fig. 71.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button
›››
Fig. 71; if necessary,
several times.
●
To change menus, use buttons or
›››
Fig. 71.
●
To open the menu or the information dis-
played, press the button
›››
Fig. 71 or wait
a few seconds until the menu or the informa-
tive display opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
wheel of the multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 71 until the desired option of the menu
is highlighted. The option appears framed.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 71 to make the
required modifications. A mark indicates that
the system or function is activated.
Back to menu selection
Press the button or
›››
Fig. 71.
Button for the driver assistance
systems
Fig. 72 On the turn signal and main beam lev-
er: butt
on for driver assistance systems (de-
pending on versions).
Fig. 73 Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: button for driver assistance systems
(depending on versions).
With the turn signal and main beam headlight
l
ever button, you can activate or deactivate
the driver assistance systems displayed in the
Assistance systems menu .
Activating or deactivating a driver assis-
tance system using the turn signal lever
and main beam headlight
●
Briefly press the
›››
Fig. 72
1
button to
open the Assist
ants menu.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it
›››
page 85. A mark in-
dicates that driver assistance system is
switched on.
●
Next, confirm the selection by pressing the
button on the multi-function steering
wheel.
86
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Activating or deactivating a driver assis-
t
ance system using the multifunction
steering wheel
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 73 to open the
Aids menu.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates that
driver assistance system is switched on.
●
Next, confirm the selection by pressing the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The driver assistance systems can also be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem, in the menu Vehicle settings
›››
page 93.
Control lamps
Control and warning lamps
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of w
arnings
›››
, faults or certain functions.
Some contr
ol and warning lamps come on
when the ignition is switched on, and switch
off when the engine starts running, or while
driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action
›››
page 66, Instrument panel.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
Red warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel displ
ay
Parking brake on
›
››
page 270.
Fault in the brake system
›
››
page 270.
Fault in the steering system
›
››
page 233.
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
belt
›
››
page 18.
Engine or high voltage system coolant
(hybrid v
ehicles)
›››
page 83.
Engine oil pressure
›
››
page 331.
Anomaly in the alternator ,
›
››
page 338,
›››
page 342.
Press the foot brake
›
››
page 250.
Drive system
›››
page 312
AdBlue level too low, OR f
ault in the SCR
system
›››
page 323 .
Yellow warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel displ
ay
Front brake pads worn
›
››
page 270.
Fault in the ESC or the system caused it to
s
witch off; OR ESC or TCS operating
›››
page 275.
TCS switched off manually; OR ESC in
Sport mode
›
››
page 275.
Fault in the ABS
›
››
page 275.
Electronic parking brake faulty.
Rear fog light switched on
›
››
page 118.
Fault in the emission control system
›››
page 325.
Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR f
ault
in the management of the diesel engine
›››
page 325.
Fault in the petrol engine management
›
››
page 325.
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 325.
Fault in the steering system
›››
page 233.
Drive system
›››
page 221
Vehicle sound
›››
page 221
Tyre pressure monitor system
›››
page 351.
»
87
Operation
Fuel tank almost empty
›
››
page 81.
Adblue level low, OR f
ault in the SCR sys-
tem
›››
page 323.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
sioners
›
››
page 27.
Front passenger front airbag disabled
›
››
page 27.
Front passenger airbag switched on
›
››
page 27.
Defective cruise control system (GRA)
›
››
page 243.
Defective speed limiter
›
››
page 245
Defective active cruise control (ACC)
›
››
page 255
Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
›››
page 258.
Error in the lane assist warning system
›››
page 258.
Lane Assist switched off
›
››
page 258.
Travel Assist error
›
››
page 262.
Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
›››
page 118.
Low engine oil level
›››
page 331.
Fault in the gearbox
›››
page 232.
Green indicator lamps
Turn lights or emergency lights on
›
››
page 118.
Trailer turn signals
›
››
page 118.
Auto Hold active, or Auto Hold paused
(lights whit
e)
›››
page 273.
Charging system
›
››
page 310
Press the foot brake
›
››
page 227.
Cruise control
›
››
page 242; OR Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 251.
Speed limiter
›
››
page 244
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
›
››
page 251.
Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning
›››
page 258.
Travel Assist active
›
››
page 261.
Auxiliary heater
›››
page 163.
Blue indicator lamps
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 118.
Other warning lamps
The vehicle is running on natural gas
›
››
page 82.
Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not
pr
operly closed
›››
page 71.
Service interval display
›››
page 84.
Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® .
Mobile telephone battery charge status.
Risk of freezing
›
››
page 71.
Start-Stop system activated
›
››
page 223.
Start-Stop system unavailable
›
››
page 223.
Low consumption driving status
›
››
page 72.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nor
ed, faults may occur in the vehicle, it
may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
ous injuries may occur.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other drivers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries
›››
page 326.
88
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Infotainment system
Intr
oduction
The infotainment system brings together im-
port
ant vehicle functions and systems into a
single central control unit, e.g. air condition-
ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the
navigation system.
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the various options will depend
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
General operating information
General information on the operation of the
infotainment system, as well as on the warn-
ing and safety instructions that must be taken
into account, is found in
›››
page 170.
How to move through the different menus
and sel
ect them
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If the infotainment system is off, switch it on.
●
The different menus are selected directly
on the touch screen using texts, icons or but-
tons.
If the box is checked , the function is activa-
ted.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those
menus.
Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show
more content above or below those dis-
played on the screen at that time, for exam-
ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll
bar and pull up or down.
Tutorial
The first time you connect the infotainment
system, a system tutorial will open with a brief
description of the main functions and how to
use it.
Help
In the Help menu can be found more informa-
tion and tips for using the infotainment sys-
tem.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury. Oper
ating the Info-
tainment system while driving could dis-
tract you from traffic.
89
Operation
Explanation of the function buttons
Fig. 74 Schematic representation: Overview of the
possibl
e function buttons on the screen
Top part of the screen
The f
ollowing information is always visible,
even when the infotainment system is turned
off
›››
Fig. 74:
Time, Incoming call or pre-air condi-
tioning on/off.
Air conditioning menu
›››
page 157.
Status bar. System customisation based
on user and notifications.
A
B
C
Bottom part of the screen
1)
Main menu displ
ay mode:
: main menu with the 6 main functions
divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa-
ble by the user by pressing on the func-
tion).
: main menu in mosaic mode (all func-
tions of the Infotainment system)
D
Direct accesses to the functions of the In-
f
otainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 +
5, customisable by the user). The func-
tions in question can be edited by press-
ing and holding the icon (replace icons,
delete icons or change their order).
Direct access to the Assistants, Driving
profiles, background lighting and vehicle
settings
›››
page 93.
E
F
1)
Valid for the Connect Syst
em.
90
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Initial configuration wizard
Fig. 75 Schematic representation: Initial configu-
r
ation wizard
The initial configuration wizard will help you
t
o set up your Infotainment system the first
time you switch it on.
Every time you switch on the Infotainment
system, the initial setup screen will be dis-
played
›››
Fig. 75 if any parameters have not
been set (marked with “”) or if the Don't
show again function button has not been
pressed.
Function button: Function
Closes the Configuration Wizard.
Function button: Function
A
Press to set day and time.
B
Press to search and store to memory
the radio stations that have the best
reception at that moment.
C
Press to go to the Online Media set-
tings.
D
Press to link your mobile phone to
the Inf
otainment system.
Function button: Function
E
Press to select your home address
using your curr
ent position or by
manually entering an address.
Don't show
again
Disables the possibility of changing
the settings of the Inf
otainment sys-
tem. If you want to run the initial con-
figuration, it can be accessed
through Settings > Initial con-
figuration wizard.
Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.
End
Once one or more settings have
been applied, pr
ess to finalise the
setup in the main menu of the wizard.
91
Operation
Vehicle information
Fig. 76 Schematic representation: Vehicle infor-
mation and st
atus
Pressing on V
ehicle info in the main menu
opens the Vehicle info menu with the follow-
ing submenus:
Driving data. The average consump-
tion, average speed, distance travelled,
trip duration and autonomy are shown. It
has 3 memories: “Since start”, “Long-
term” and “Since refuel”
›››
page 73.
Vehicle status. The warnings regarding
faults, incidents, memorisation of the
tyre pressure or information of the next
inspection service are displayed.
e-Info: shows the electric range and
power flow
›››
page 222.
–
–
–
92
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Assist systems and vehicle settings
Fig. 77 Schematic representation: Assist systems
and v
ehicle settings
Press
›
››
Fig. 77
A
, or V
ehicle settings in
the main menu to open the assistants and ve-
hicle settings menu. Next, clicking on any of
the menus located in the left area
B
, dis-
pl
ays the settings menu or the selected assist
systems on the display.
The number of assist systems and settings
depend on the version and the country in
question.
■
Assistance systems
■
Parking
■
Automatic parking brake activation
›››
page 272.
■
Park assist
›››
page 279.
■
Smart Assistants
■
Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation
systems and brake assist
›››
page 275.
■
Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop
system
›››
page 223.
■
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
›››
page 249.
■
Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
›››
page 257.
■
Emergency brake assistance system
(Front Assist)
›››
page 245.
■
Driving Assist (Travel Assist)
›››
page 259
■
Emergency Assist
›››
page 262.
■
Speed limiter.
■
Driver alerts
■
Fatigue detection
›››
page 75.
■
Traffic sign recognition
›››
page 76.
■
Lane assist
›››
page 264.
■
Drive Profile
›››
page 234
■
Background lighting
›››
page 126
■
Vehicle
■
Instrument panel
›››
page 70.
■
Lighting
›››
page 125.
■
Rear view mirrors
›››
page 129.
■
Closing
›››
page 96.
■
Lights
›››
page 118.
■
Windows
›››
page 114.
■
Tyres
›››
page 351.
■
Comfort light
›››
page 125
■
Windscreen wipers
›››
page 127
»
93
Operation
■
El
ectric drive (PHEV hybrid vehicles) .
›››
page 220
■
Seats
›››
page 132
Farewell screen
Fig. 78
Schematic representation: farewell screen.
When the ignition is switched off, the F
are-
well Display gives you relevant information
before you leave the vehicle.
›››
Fig. 78
Change the order of the warnings.
Closes the farewell screen.
A
B
94
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Multifunction steering wheel
Functions
Fig. 79
Controls on the steering wheel.
Fig. 80
Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes multifunction
modul
es from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-
trol and assist functions without the driver
needing to be distracted from the road.
Buttons available depending on the version
Symbol Function
1
Turn: T
urn volume up/down
Press: Mute volume
2
Turn: Search in the instrument panel
menu. In Navigation mode, turn to in-
crease/decrease map size in SEAT
Digital Cockpit
Press: Select the highlighted option in
the instrument panel
Radio: Sear
ch for the previous/next
station.
Media: Short press: previous/next
track; long press: fast forward/rewind
Activate phone menu (answer call,
end call)
Switch between media and radio
sour
ces
Change the instrument panel menu
(previous/next)
Enable/disable voice control
Analogue Panel: No function
Digital Panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit):
Change digital panel views
›››
page 68
Activate or deactivate steering wheel
heating
›››
page 162
Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-
trol system
›››
page 242 / ACC
›››
page 249 / Speed limiter
›››
page 244
Symbol Function
: Activ
ate ACC / Cruise control sys-
tem / Limiter
: Reset programmed ACC speed or
cruise control system
: Incr
ease programmed speed
: Decrease programmed speed
Open the drive assist menu in the in-
strument panel
Modify the programmed ACC dis-
t
ance
Switching Travel Assist on and off
›
››
page 259
95
Operation
Opening and closing
Set of v
ehicle keys
Vehicle key
Fig. 81
Vehicle key
Fig. 82
Centre console: vehicle key socket.
Key to the
›
››
Fig. 81
Unlock the vehicle
1
Lock the vehicle
Unl
ock only the rear lid. Press the button
until all the turn signals on the vehicle
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open
the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on
the key flashes.
Control lamp
Alarm button. Only press in the event of
an emergency! When the alarm button is
pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn
signals light up for a short time. Press
again to disconnect.
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be
locked or unlocked remotely
›››
page 99.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
re-synchronised
›››
page 98 or the battery
changed
›››
page 98.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button on the vehicle key is briefly
pressed, the indicator lamp flashes
4
›››
Fig. 81 once briefly, but if the butt
on is held
2
3
4
5
down for a longer period it will flash several
times, such as f
or convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
up when the button is pressed, replace the
key's battery
›››
page 98.
Key socket
Depending on the version there is a socket for
the key close to the start button
›››
Fig. 82.
Warning! Do not confuse with the location for
the emergency start
›››
page 219.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
the vehicle ID number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which
must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
true for keys which are specially cut for the
vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use
›››
page 98.
96
Opening and closing
WARNING
●
Ne
ver leave children or disabled persons
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they
may not be able to leave the vehicle or
manage on their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equip-
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk
of accident. The doors can be locked using
the remote control key. This could become
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen-
cy situation.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore
always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly block and it would
be impossible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Pr
otect them from damage,
impacts and humidity.
Note
●
Only use the k
ey button when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the
button unnecessarily could accidentally
unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is
also possible even when you are outside
the r
adius of action.
●
Key operation can be greatly influenced
by overlapping radio signals close to the
vehicle working in the same range of fre-
quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
mobile telephones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions
and discharged batteries can considerably
reduce the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are
pressed or one of the central locking but-
tons
›››
page 101 is pressed repeatedly in
short succession, the central locking brief-
ly disconnects as protection against over-
loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock
it if necessary.
●
Spare remote control keys are available
at your Technical Service, where they must
be matched to the locking system.
●
Up to five remote control keys can be
used.
Pull out the key blade
Fig. 83
Vehicle key: remove the key blade.
The central locking remote control has the
k
ey blade inside it for use in case of emergen-
cy locking/unlocking of the driver's door
›››
page 108.
●
If you press button
›››
Fig. 83
1
once the
k
ey blade is unlocked and a ring appears as
a key ring.
●
Press and hold the button
1
and at the
same time pull on the ring in the dir
ection of
arrow
›››
Fig. 83
2
to completely remove the
k
ey blade.
97
Operation
To change the battery
Fig. 84
Vehicle key: opening the battery com-
partment co
ver.
Fig. 85 Vehicle key: removing the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
orkshop to replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
cle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
●
Remove the key blade from the vehicle key
›››
page 97.
●
Insert the key blade into the slot
›››
Fig. 84,
press it in the direction of arrow
1
and de-
t
ach the cover by levering it
2
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suit
able thin object
›››
Fig. 85.
●
Insert the new battery and press it into the
battery compartment
›››
.
●
Place the cover and press it into the vehicle
k
ey housing until it clicks into place.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
t
er or any other button battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with
batteries out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
If the batt
ery is not changed correctly,
the vehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the batt
ery, check that the
polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
r
ectly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the butt
on is pressed frequently outside
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
●
Remove the key blade from the vehicle key
›››
page 96.
●
Press the button on the vehicle key. For
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using
the key blade. The key has been synchron-
ised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
98
Opening and closing
Central locking
Intr
oduction
Central locking functions correctly when all
the doors and the r
ear lid are correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be
locked with the key.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking
syst
em may cause serious injuries.
●
The central locking system will lock all
doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
prevent any non-authorised individual from
opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
sengers.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle. The central locking
button can be used to lock all the doors
from within. Therefore, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
or very low temperatures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
●
Ne
ver leave individuals locked in a closed
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid
and the t
ank flap to be unlocked centrally:
●
From outside, using the vehicle key
›››
page 100.
●
From outside with the Keyless Access
›
››
page 102 system,
●
From inside, by pushing the central locking
button
›››
page 101.
Various functions are available to improve the
vehicle safety:
●
Security system “Safe”
›››
page 105
●
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
●
Selective unlocking system
●
Automatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system (Auto Lock)
●
Emergency unlocking system
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-
cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-
onds, it re-locks automatically.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the
doors and the rear lid are locked. When you
open the door, you can either unlock only the
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select
the required option, use the Infotainment sys-
tem setting
›››
page 100.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle can be unlocked via the central
locking switch or by pulling one of the door
handles.
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
is locked.
»
99
Operation
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the r
ear lid or the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked with the central locking switch
›››
page 101.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking
of the vehicle.
Note
●
Ne
ver leave any valuable items in the ve-
hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is
not a safe.
●
If the LED on the driver door sill lights up
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti-
theft alarm is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT
Official Service or specialised workshop.
●
Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti-
theft alarm system will only function as in-
tended if the windows and sunroof are
closed.
Central locking settings
Central locking settings can be changed in
the Inf
otainment system.
Unlocking doors
●
Press the function button > Vehicle > Ex-
terior > Central locking > Door unlocking.
You can choose to unlock all the doors or on-
ly the driver door when you unlock the vehi-
cle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also
unlocked.
With the Driver setting, when you press the
button on the remote control key once, only
the driver door is unlocked. If that button is
pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the
rear lid will be unlocked.
If the button is pressed, all the vehicle
doors are locked. At the same time, a confir-
mation signal is heard.
Unlock and lock from the outside
Fig. 86
Remote control key: buttons.
●
Lock: press the
›
››
Fig. 86 button.
●
Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-
curity system: push the button again and
hold for 2 seconds.
●
Unlock: press the button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the
button for at least 1 second.
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
press the button for at least one second.
Selective unlocking system
The selective unlocking system allows you to
only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
100
Opening and closing
flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
l
ocked.
Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:
●
Press (once) the button on the remote
control key or turn the key once in the open-
ing direction.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
tank flap simultaneously:
●
Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-
ton on the remote control key, or turn the key
twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-
tion.
The Safe security system and the anti-theft
alarm deactivate immediately when only the
driver door is opened.
In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can
programme the security central locking sys-
tem directly
›››
page 100.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Lock-
ing syst
em “Safe” on page 105.
Note
●
Do not use the r
emote control key until
the vehicle is visible.
●
Other functions of the remote control key
›››
page 115, Convenience open/close
function.
Unlocking and locking from the in-
side
Fig. 87
In the centre console: central locking
s
witch
●
Lock: press the
›
››
Fig. 87 button.
●
Unlock: Press the button again
›››
Fig. 87.
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch to lock your vehicle:
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
●
The LED in the central locking switch lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-
cess and assistance.
WARNING
●
The centr
al locking switch also works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
●
The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
r
eaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock)
›››
page 99. You can unlock the
vehicle again using the button on the
central locking switch.
101
Operation
Unlock and lock the vehicle with
K
eyless Access
Fig. 88
Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Fig. 89 Door handle: sensor surfaces
›››
Fig. 89
Unl
ocking sensor surface on the inside of
the door handle.
Locking sensor surface on the outside of
the door handle.
A
B
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may hav
e the Keyless Access system.
Configure the Keyless Access system
The behaviour of the Keyless Access system
can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings
menu of the Infotainment system.
If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its
operation is limited.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. For this, it is only
necessary that there is a valid vehicle key in
the detection area corresponding to the at-
tempted access to the vehicle.
Unlock the vehicle
●
Touch the surface of the sensor located in-
side the handle
A
. All turn signals will flash
twice.
If the sensor surf
ace is touched twice, the en-
tire vehicle will unlock.
Automatic vehicle unlock
The vehicle can be unlocked automatically.
To do this, the function must be activated in
the Infotainment system and the vehicle key
must be in the proximity zone of the vehicle.
If the key is in the proximity zone, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended
period, the function is deactivated.
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key,
e.g. in your jacket pocket.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
If you wish you may unlock only the corre-
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-
essary adjustments can be performed in ve-
hicles with a driver information system
›››
page 93.
General information
If a valid key is in the proximity of the car
›››
Fig. 88, the Keyless Access locking and
starting system gives the key entry as soon as
one of the sensor surfaces on the front door
handles is touched.
The following features are then available
without having to use the vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using
the handles of the front doors or the soft-
touch/handle on the rear lid.
102
Opening and closing
●
K
eyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the
sensor of the driver or passenger door han-
dle.
●
Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one
foot below the rear bumper
›››
page 112.
●
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine
with the starter button
›››
page 216.
The central locking and locking systems op-
erate in the same way as a normal locking
and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
a single flash.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
the rear lid are closed leaving the last key
used inside the vehicle and none outside, the
vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-
hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.
The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if
you do not open any door or the rear lid.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
Unlocking and opening the doors
(Keyless-Entry)
●
Grip one of the front door handles. When
you do this, you touch the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 89
A
(arrow) of the handle and the
v
ehicle unlocks.
●
Open the door.
On vehicles with selective opening or info-
tainment system configuration, pulling the
door handle twice will unlock all doors.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 89
B
(arrow) on one of the front door
handl
es. The door that is used must be
closed.
In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 89
B
(arrow) on one of the front door handles.
The v
ehicle locks with the “Safe” security sys-
tem
›››
page 105. The door that is used must
be closed.
●
Touch (twice) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 89
B
(arrow) of one of the front door handles to
l
ock the vehicle without activating the
“Safelock” security system
›››
page 105.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
id vehicle key in the proximity zone
›››
Fig. 88.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
will not lock automatically after closing it.
What happens when locking the vehicle
with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
for engine ignition
›››
page 216. In order to
enable engine ignition, press the button on
the key inside the vehicle.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a certain period of
time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
»
103
Operation
●
Aft
er a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton on the key.
●
OR: if the boot is opened.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
the key.
Keyless Access temporary disconnection
function
You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless
Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-
ing cycle.
●
Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Close the door.
●
Push the central locking button on the re-
mote control and touch the locking sensor
surface of the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 89
B
within the following 5 seconds.
Do not gr
asp the door handle; otherwise the
vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
driver’s door lock.
●
To check that the function has been deacti-
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull
on the door handle. The door should not
open.
The next time the door can only be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
Keyless Access will be active again.
Keyless Access permanent disconnection
function
You can deactivate the vehicle unlock with
Keyless Access permanently in the infotain-
ment system so that others cannot unlock or
start the vehicle.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the sun-
roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-
ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 89
B
(arrow) of the door han-
dl
e until the windows and roof have closed.
How the doors open when touching the sen-
sor surface on the door handle will depend
on the settings that have been activated in
the infotainment system, using the function
button > Vehicle > Exterior > Central
locking.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
coul
d engage if hit with a water jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle
key in the proximity. If at least one of the
electric windows is open and the sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 89
B
(arrow) on one of the
handl
es is activated continuously, all win-
dows will close.
Note
●
If the 12-v
olt vehicle battery has little or
no charge, or the vehicle key battery is al-
most or entirely out of charge, you will
probably not be able to lock or unlock the
vehicle with the Keyless Access system.
The vehicle can be unlocked or locked
manually
›››
page 108.
●
To control the proper locking of the vehi-
cle, the release function is disabled for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
●
If the message Keyless access system
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
operation of the Keyless Access system.
Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this.
●
Depending on the function set on the in-
fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-
rior mirrors will unfold and the surround
lighting will come on when unlocking the
vehicle using the sensor surface on the
driver and passenger door handles
›››
page 129.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.
from a mobile device accessory) or if the
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case).
104
Opening and closing
●
If the sensors ar
e very dirty, e.g. have a
layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
sensors on the door handles may be affec-
ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic
gearbox, it can only be locked by pressing
the parking lock button P.
●
To improve the safety of your vehicle, the
remote control of the system is equipped
with a position sensor. If this remote control
does not detect movement for a certain
length of time, the system will conclude
that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
a night table) so it will be disabled.
●
If, when trying to block the vehicle, the
last used key is still inside, all the turn sig-
nals will flash 4 times.
Locking system “Safe”
1)
When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se-
curit
y system puts the door handles out of
operation and prevents unauthorised persons
for entering. The doors cannot be opened
from inside
›››
.
Depending on the v
ehicle, when switching the
ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
the control panel screen stating that the
“Safe” security system is activated.
Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”
security system.
●
Press the locking button once on the ve-
hicle key.
Lock the vehicle without activating the
“Safe” system.
●
Press the locking button on the vehicle
key twice.
●
On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
on the outside part of the door handle twice.
When the “Safe” security system is disa-
bled, the following needs to be taken into
account:
●
The vehicle can be unlocked and opened
from the inside using an door handle.
●
The anti-theft alarm is activated.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the anti-tow system are disabled.
“Safe” status
The flashing frequency of the diode in the
door sill immediately confirms the process.
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues
flashing slowly.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children)
in the v
ehicle if it is locked from the outside
and the “Safe” security system is activa-
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then
be opened from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency.
Anti-theft alarm system
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
eak into the vehicle or steal it. The system
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
The system is immediately activated and the
turn signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically
»
1)
Available depending on market and version.
105
Operation
included in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the t
urn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
locked and the following unauthorised ac-
tions are attempted:
●
Opening a door that is mechanically un-
locked using the vehicle key without switching
on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-
tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is
no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is
activated immediately on opening the door).
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
When the ignition is switched on with a non-
authorised key.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Switching off the 12 volt battery.
●
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
with interior monitoring
›››
page 106).
●
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 106).
●
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 106).
●
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
vehicle interior monitoring
›››
page 106).
●
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
●
Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button
of the key.
●
OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically
using the key, the ignition must be turned on
within 15 seconds of opening the door.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
CAUTION
If the anti-theft security system is switched
off
, the vehicle interior monitoring and the
tow-away protection are automatically
disconnected.
Note
●
Aft
er 28 days, the indicator light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
r
emains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes off, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated
when the vehicle is locked from within using
the central locking button .
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-
ly with the key, only the driver door is un-
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.
Only when the ignition has been turned on
will the other doors be available - but not
unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is run down
or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not op-
erate correctly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one
of the battery cables is disconnected while
the alarm system is active.
Interior monitoring and the anti-
t
ow system
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
r
ated in the anti-theft alarm which detects
106
Opening and closing
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
The v
ehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
If the “Safe”
›››
page 105 security system is
switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring
and the tow-away protection are automati-
cally disconnected.
Activation
●
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
●
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the button on the
remote control. The time period from when
the door is opened until the ignition is turned
on should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise
the alarm will be triggered.
●
Press the button on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors
will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
Deactivation through the infotainment
system
●
Turn off the ignition and press the function
button > Vehicle > Exterior > Central
locking> Interior monitoring.
●
When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-
tion are switched off until the next time the
door is opened.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false
alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully).
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely).
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from the
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, relocking will activate the alarm
with all its functions, except the volumetric
sensor. This function is reactivated when
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is
deliberately switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash
is different to the flash indicating the alarm
is activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left in-
side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-
terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both
sensors react to movements and shakes in-
side the vehicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and
the anti-tow system will only be activated
once all the doors are closed (including the
rear lid).
107
Operation
Doors
Intr
oduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
ually and partially opened, f
or example if the
key or the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause serious injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windo
ws cannot be opened from
the inside.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in
the car in an emergency and will not be
able to get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is danger
ous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergen-
cy, car
efully disassemble components and
then reassemble them carefully to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
Emergency unlocking or locking of
the driv
er’s door
Fig. 90
Driver door handle: locking cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
ate, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››
page 105.
●
Remove the key blade from the vehicle key
›››
page 96.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when vehicles are unlocked. However, the
alarm will not be triggered
›››
page 105.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the v
ehicle is locked manually using the
key shaft
›››
page 99.
108
Opening and closing
Emergency lock of doors without
l
ock cylinders
Fig. 91
Locking the door manually.
If the central locking system should fail to
w
ork at any time, doors with no lock cylinder
will have to be locked separately.
The emergency lock is located on the front of
the front passenger's door and the rear
doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.
●
Pull the cap out of the opening.
●
Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to
the right as far as it will go (if the door is on
the right side) or to the left (if the door is on
the left side).
●
Replace the cap.
Once the door has been closed it can no lon-
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-
rior door handle once to unlock and open the
door.
Childproof locks
Fig. 92
Childproof lock on the left hand side
door
.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
fr
om being opened from the inside. This sys-
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle
electronic opening and locking systems. It
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof
lock.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in the
door using the ignition key, clockwise for
the left hand side doors
›››
Fig. 92 and anti-
clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door
whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
vate.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in the
door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise
for the left hand side doors
›››
Fig. 92 and
clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
door can only be opened from the outside.
Rear lid
Introduction
The rear lid unlocks and locks together with
the doors.
On v
ehicles with Keyless Access, the rear lid
unlocks automatically when it is opened
›››
page 102.
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
and cl
osing of the rear lid can cause acci-
dents and serious injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
»
109
Operation
●
Do not cl
ose the rear lid by pushing it
down with your hand on the rear window.
The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
driving.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the
time of year, thus causing serious injuries,
illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sur
e that there is enough space to open or
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a
garage.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the k
ey has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
Opening and closing the rear lid
Fig. 93 Rear lid: opening from outside.
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activ
ated by using the insignia sha-
ped handle on the rear lid
›››
Fig. 93.
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or
buttons of the vehicle key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed. An audible warning is also given if it is
opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph).
Opening and closing
●
To open: pull on the handle and lift it up
›››
Fig. 93. The rear lid opens automatically.
●
To close: hold one of the handles on the in-
ner trim and close it by moving it downwards,
or press the button on the rear lid
›››
Fig. 94.
If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also
locked.
110
Opening and closing
Rear lid with electric opening and
cl
osing
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 94
Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.
Fig. 95 On the driver’s door: button to open
and cl
ose the rear lid.
Opening the rear lid
●
Unlock the vehicle and briefly press the
handl
e of the rear lid. On vehicles with
Keyless Access you can directly press the
handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is unlocked
if an authorised key is recognised in the prox-
imity of the vehicle.
●
OR: depending on the features, pull the
button on the driver door upwards
›››
Fig. 95.
The button also works when the ignition is
switched off.
●
OR: press and hold the button of the ve-
hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is
locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors
remain locked).
●
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and
sensor-controlled opening you can open the
rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the
sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy
Open
›››
page 112). The rear lid will be auto-
matically opened.
Closing the rear lid
●
Briefly press the button on the rear lid
›››
Fig. 94
›››
in Introduction on page 109.
●
OR: depending on the f
eatures, pull the
button on the driver door upwards
›››
Fig. 95.
●
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press
and hold the vehicle key button until the
rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the
area of the sensors located below the rear
bumper (Easy Open)
›››
page 112. The vehi-
cle key must be in the Keyless Access system
detection zone at the rear outside the vehicle.
●
OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-
tion of closing until it closes automatically.
●
The rear lid goes down automatically to the
final position and also closes automatically
›››
in Introduction on page 109.
Int
errupting opening or closing
After beginning to open or close the rear lid,
the action can be halted by pressing one of
the buttons.
If you press one of the buttons again, the
rear lid will move again in the original direc-
tion.
If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-
stacle during the automatic opening or clos-
ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im-
mediately. For the closing process, the rear
lid opens again slightly.
●
Check why it has not been possible to open
or close the rear lid.
●
Try to open or close the rear lid again.
●
If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or
closed by hand using reasonable force.
Particular features if towing a trailer
If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-
cally connected to a trailer
›››
page 294, the
electric rear lid can only be opened or closed
with the buttons on the rear lid itself or by us-
ing the Easy Open function.
»
111
Operation
Acoustic warnings
Thr
oughout the process of opening or closing
the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.
Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-
ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-
tion with the movement of the foot or closed
using the button on the rear lid itself
›››
Fig. 94.
Modifying and memorising the opening
angle
If the space behind or above the vehicle is
less than the travel area of the rear lid, you
can change the opening angle of the rear lid.
To memorise a new opening angle, the rear
lid must be open at least halfway.
●
Interrupt the opening process in the desired
position.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 94 on the rear
lid for at least 3 seconds.
The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-
tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard
warning lights and an audible warning.
Resetting and memorising the opening an-
gle
For the rear lid to reopen completely, the
opening angle must be reset and memorised
again.
●
Release the rear lid and open it to the
memorised height.
●
Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To
do this, some force will have to be used.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 94 on the rear
lid for at least 3 seconds.
●
This resets and memorises the factory-set
opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by
blinking of the hazard warning lights and an
audible warning.
Automatic protection against overheating
If the system is operated repeatedly in a short
space of time, it automatically switches off to
prevent overheating.
Once the system is cool again, the function
can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only
be opened and closed by hand using reason-
able force.
If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or the
corresponding
›››
page 60 fuse burns out
while the rear lid is open, the system will have
to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid
completely once.
Emergency unlocking
›››
page 114
WARNING
If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it
is heavily l
oaded, the rear lid may not open
or, after opening, it may lower by itself due
t
o the extra weight and cause serious in-
jury.
●
Do not open the rear lid when there is a
lot of snow on it or when carrying a load
(e.g. on a rack).
●
Before opening the rear lid, remove the
snow or the load.
Rear lid with sensor-controlled
opening and cl
osing (Easy Open)
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 96
Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-
ing (Easy Open).
If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of
the r
ear lid, it is possible to unlock and open
or close it moving one foot in the area of the
sensors located under the rear bumper.
●
Switch the ignition off.
112
Opening and closing
●
St
and in front of the rear bumper, in the
middle.
●
With a brisk movement, bring your foot and
lower leg as close as you can to the bumper.
The lower part of the leg needs to be close to
the upper sensor area and your foot must be
close to the lower sensor area
›››
Fig. 96
1
.
●
Quickly remove your foot and lower leg
fr
om the sensor areas
›››
Fig. 96
2
. The rear
lid will be aut
omatically opened.
●
If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-
cedure after a few seconds.
The rear lid can be closed with another foot
movement similar to the opening one (provi-
ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of
the rear lid).
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks
if the vehicle has been locked beforehand
and there is no valid key inside.
While the rear lid is in motion (either opening
or closing), it can be stopped with another
foot movement similar to the opening one
(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-
ty of the rear lid).
The Easy Open feature is not available or on-
ly has limited availability in the following sit-
uations (examples):
●
If the rear bumper is very dirty.
●
If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g.
after having driven on gritted roads.
●
If the vehicle has been equipped at a later
time with a tow bracket.
In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-
ture may take a little longer to open the boot
or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the
boot opening by accident, e.g. because of
the running water.
The Easy Open function can be permanently
connected and disconnected in the infotain-
ment system using the > Vehicle > Exteri-
or > Central locking function button.
WARNING
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the
r
ear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-
tion may be accidentally activated and the
rear lid will open, for example, when
sweeping under the rear bumper, when di-
recting a water jet or high pressure steam
to the area or when carrying out mainte-
nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-
dentally opened, the rear lid could injure
somebody situated in its area of operation
or cause material damage.
●
Therefore, always make sure that there is
no unsupervised valid key in the area near
the rear lid.
●
Before carrying out any maintenance or
repair work on the vehicle, always disable
the Easy Open feature via the infotainment
system.
●
Bef
ore washing the vehicle, always disa-
ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-
ment system.
●
Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-
er,
›››
page 294, always disable the Easy
Open feature via the infotainment system.
113
Operation
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig. 97
Detail of the luggage compartment:
emer
gency release (Leon).
Fig. 98 Detail of the luggage compartment:
manual r
elease mechanism (Leon Sportstour-
er).
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in
the e
vent of an emergency (e.g. no battery).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
●
Insert the key blade into the slot and move
the key in the direction of the arrow until the
lock unlocks
›››
Fig. 97,
›››
Fig. 98.
Window controls
Electrically opening and closing
the windows
Fig. 99 Detail of the driver's door: window
contr
ols.
●
Opening the window: press the button .
●
Cl
osing the window: pull the button .
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Window on the rear left door
Window on the rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park the
vehicle or leave it unattended
›››
.
Y
ou can use the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door have been opened.
Safety switch
The safety control
›››
Fig. 99
5
on the driver
door can be used t
o disable the electric win-
dow buttons on the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
1
2
3
4
5
114
Opening and closing
The safety control symbol lights up in yel
-
low if the buttons on the rear doors are
switched off.
Convenience open/close function
The electric windows can be opened or
closed from outside using the vehicle key:
Convenience opening:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof have reached the desired position.
●
OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-
ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sunroof have reached the re-
quired position.
Convenience closing:
●
Press and hold button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof are closed
›››
.
●
OR: K
eep the key in the driver door in the
"lock" position until all the windows and the
sunroof are closed.
●
OR using the Keyless Access system (only
locking): Press and hold the locking sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 101 (arrow) on the door han-
dle for several seconds to close the windows
and the sunroof. If you release the sensor sur-
face, the closing movement stops.
During convenience closing, first the windows
and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
In the infotainment system different settings
can be adjusted using the function button
> Vehicle > Exterior > Windows > Conven-
ience opening.
One-touch opening and closing
The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
ing is used to open or close the windows
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
the button of the corresponding electric win-
dow.
For the automatic raising function: pull the
button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: push
the button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on
the button of the corresponding window.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The one-touch opening and closing function
is not active after the vehicle battery has
been disconnected or is flat and will have to
be reset.
●
Pull the button of the corresponding win-
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion.
●
Release the button and pull upwards and
hold again. The one-touch function is now
ready for operation.
The automatic one-touch electric windows
can be reinitialised individually or several at a
time.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Intro-
duction on page 108.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
r
esult in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise
could cause serious injury to you and third
parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of
injury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency
situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the
ignition has been switched off and one of
the front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-
able the rear electric windows. Make sure
that they have been disabled.
»
115
Operation
●
F
or safety reasons, you should only use
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
windo
w will automatically open again
›››
page 116. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before at-
tempting to close it again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jury when the el
ectric windows close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately
›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
bef
ore attempting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty or
there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the window
will stop at this point.
●
If there is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
●
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Elec-
trically opening and cl
osing the windows
on page 115.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Sunroof
Intr
oduction
The sunroof only works when the ignition is
s
witched on. Once the ignition has been
switched off, you can still open or close the
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not
opened.
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without
paying due att
ention, it can cause serious
injury.
●
Open or close the sunroof and the sun
blind only when no one is in their path of
movement.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting.
●
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
cially if they have access to the vehicle
key. If using they key unattended, they
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
roof.
●
After switching off, it is still possible to
open or close the sunroof during a short
space of time provided that neither the
driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage, during winter tem-
peratures remove any ice or snow that
might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
●
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of
rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the
sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
can enter the interior and can cause con-
siderable damage to the electrical system.
As a result, other damage can occur in the
vehicle.
116
Opening and closing
Note
●
L
eaves and other loose objects that ac-
cumulate on the sunroof rails should be
regularly cleaned away either by hand or
with a vacuum.
●
If the sunroof does not work correctly, the
anti-trap function will not work either. Con-
tact a specialised workshop.
Operating the sunroof
Fig. 100
On the interior roof lining: sunroof
butt
on.
Functional area can be oper
ated in two
ways: sliding and pressing.
Sliding: The roof is opened or closed totally
or partially.
Pressing: The roof is raised, opened or
closed totally or partially. Press again to stop
the automatic movement.
Raising, opening and closing the sunroof
Opening the sunroof:
●
Automatic movement: slide your finger
back over the functional area
›››
Fig. 100
A
.
●
Manual movement: slide back over the
functional ar
ea and keep it there.
Closing the sunroof:
●
Automatic movement: slide your finger for-
ward over the functional area
A
.
●
Manual movement: slide forward over the
functional ar
ea and keep it there.
Raising the sunroof:
●
The sunroof can only be raised if it is
closed.
●
Automatic movement: press briefly in the
centre of the functional area
B
Closing the sunroof when raised:
●
Automatic movement: slide your finger for-
w
ard over the functional area
A
or pr
ess
briefly in the centre of the functional area
B
.
St
op the automatic opening or closing move-
ment:
●
Press again on the functional area .
Convenience function to open or
close the sunroof
Fig. 101
Door handle: sensor surface.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with
the conv
enience function, just like the win-
dows.
Using the door lock
●
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in either the unlocking or locking posi-
tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-
sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-
tion.
Using the remote control
●
Keep the locking or unlocking button press-
ed to open or close the roof. If you release the
button is the opening or closing will stop.
»
117
Operation
Using the Keyless Access system (only
cl
osing)
●
Press and hold the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 101 (arrow) on the door handle to
close the sunroof. If you release the sensor
surface, the closing movement stops.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic
sunroof and sunshade
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
injury when cl
osing the sunroof and the sun
blind
›››
. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-
t
er resistance or an obstacle when closing,
they reopen immediately.
●
Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not
close.
●
Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
due to an obstacle or some resistance, it
stops at the corresponding position and then
opens. For automatic closing, a new closing
attempt might take place.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to
close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap
function
●
Before approx. 5 seconds after activation of
the anti-trap function, slide your finger for-
ward over the functional area
›››
Fig. 100
A
and keep pressed until the
sunr
oof is fully closed.
●
The sunroof closes without the anti-trap
function intervening!
●
If the sunroof will still not close, visit a speci-
alised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
anti-tr
ap function can cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always be careful when closing the sun-
roof and sun blind.
●
No person should ever remain in the way
of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body from be-
coming trapped against the roof frame and
injuries occurring.
Lights
V
ehicle lighting
Control lamps
It lights up
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
Fault in the cornering light system.
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on .
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The contr
ol lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn
signal is faulty.
Hazard warning lights on
›
››
page 124.
It lights up
Trailer turn signals
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on
›
››
page 120.
It lights up
The Light Assist system is on
›
››
page 122.
118
Lights
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Lighting and visibility buttons
Fig. 102 Dash panel: lights control.
By clicking on the button you can se-
l
ect between (the corresponding indicator
lights up):
Switching on the dipped beam headlights.
Automatic control of dipped beam head-
lights and daytime running lights.
Switching on the side lights.
Additionally, the following light functions can
be activated by pressing on the correspond-
ing symbol.
When the function is activated, the corre-
sponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it,
you will need to press on the symbol again.
Turning the front fog lights on or off
Turning the rear fog lights on or off.
Connecting or disconnecting the wind-
scr
een demisting function
›››
page 158.
Connecting or disconnecting the heated
r
ear window
›››
page 158.
The driver is personally responsible for the
corr
ect use and adjustment of the lights in all
situations.
Automatic dipped beam headlight control
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
intended as an aid and is not able to recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the lamp is alight, the vehicle
lights and the instrument panel and controls
automatically switch on in the following situa-
tions
›››
:
●
The photo sensor detects d
arkness, for ex-
ample, when driving through a tunnel. They
switch off when adequate lighting is detec-
ted.
●
The rain sensor detects rain and activates
the wipers. They switch off when the wipers
have not been activated for a few minutes.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individu-
al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
The daytime running lights come on every
time the ignition is switched on if the lamps
are off or the lamp is alight, if the light
sensor does not detect darkness. The day-
light running lights turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
When the lamp is alight, a light sensor
automatically switches dipped beam on and
off (including the control and instrument
lighting) or the daytime running lights de-
pending on the level of exterior lighting.
Motorway light
The motorway light is available on vehicles
equipped with LED High lights.
The function is connected and disconnected
via the corresponding Infotainment system
menu.
»
119
Operation
●
Activ
ation: when going above 110 km/h
(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-
er's visibility distance.
●
Deactivation: when reducing the speed of
the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the
dipped beam immediately returns to its nor-
mal position.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights have not been switched off
If the ignition is not connected and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
heard in the following cases: this will remind
you to turn the light off.
●
When the parking light is on
›››
page 120.
●
When the lamp or is on.
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road
users cannot see the v
ehicle well enough
or at all, accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
when there are changes in light conditions
but not, for example, when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights
ar
e not bright enough to illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users
ar
e able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head
lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
Never drive with daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting
conditions.
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
used corr
ectly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could re-
sult in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Note
●
The l
egal requirements regarding the use
of vehicle lights in each country must be
observed.
●
The dipped beam headlights will only
work with the ignition on. The side lights
come on automatically when the ignition is
turned off.
●
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be-
hind you. You should use the rear fog light
only when visibility is very poor.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 103
Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right t
urn light or right-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Left turn light or left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Turning main beam headlights on: control
lamp lit up on the instrument panel.
The headlight flasher comes on while we
pull the lever. Control lamp lit up.
Place the lever in rest position to turn off the
corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
1
2
3
4
120
Lights
The convenience turn signals are activated
and deactiv
ated in the infotainment system
using the function button > Vehicle > Exte-
rior > Light > Convenience turn signals
›››
page 93.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Parking light
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning
will sound while the driver door is open.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Move the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the
front side light and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle turn on.
Parking light on both sides
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Press the button to select .
●
Lock the vehicle from the outside.
In doing so, only the side lights of both head-
lights light up, and additionally the tail lights
will do so partially.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
or f
orgetting to deactivate them can con-
fuse other road users. This could result in a
serious accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going
to change lane, overtake or when turning,
activating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
accidents and serious injury, as the main
beam may distr
act or dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
When you t
urn the ignition off without
having turned the turn signals off, an
acoustic signal sounds while the driver
door is open. This is intended as a reminder
to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish
to leave the parking light on.
●
If the convenience turn signals are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-
tive part stops flashing and only flashes
once in the new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off
.
●
If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the
control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will
flash at double speed.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal
and in no way effects the useful life of the
vehicle lighting system.
●
The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-
nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-
ted.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist automatically prevents
gl
are from vehicles moving in the opposite di-
rection or ahead in the same direction. In ad-
dition, the main beam assist detects illumina-
ted areas and disconnects the main beam
headlight when passing, e.g. by populated
areas.
Within its limitations, the assist system auto-
matically connects or disconnects the main
»
121
Operation
beam headlight depending on the environ-
ment
al and traffic conditions, as well as the
speed
›››
.
S
witching the main beam assist on
●
Turn on the ignition and select the mode
in the lights panel
›››
Fig. 102.
●
From the base position, press the turn signal
and main beam headlights lever forwards
›››
Fig. 103
3
When the main beam assistant is on, the
indicat
or lamp lights up on the instrument
cluster display.
Switching the main beam assist off
●
Disconnect the mode in the lights pan-
el
›››
Fig. 102.
●
OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn
signal light and main beam headlights lever
forwards
›››
Fig. 103
4
.
●
OR: push the t
urn signal and main beam
headlight lever forwards to manually turn on
the main beam. The main beam assist will
then be deactivated.
System limitations
In the following cases, the main beam head-
light must be switched off manually because
the main beam assist will not disconnect it on
time or disconnect it at all:
●
On roads with insufficient lighting with very
reflective signs
●
If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe-
destrians or cyclists.
●
On closed curves, when the traffic in the
opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-
nounced slopes or inclinations.
●
On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-
tion and with a central reservation barrier
where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv-
ers.
●
In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain
●
In the event of dust or sand storms
●
If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
If the camera's field of vision is misted up,
dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.
●
If the camera is damaged or if the power
supply has been cut off.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main
beam assist shoul
d not encourage the tak-
ing of risks. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver concentration.
●
You are always in control of the main
beam and adapting it to the light, visibility
and traffic conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam head-
light control does not recognise all driving
situations and is limited under certain cir-
cumst
ances.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of
the main beam control may be affected.
This also applies when changes are made
to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
if additional headlights are installed.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
em, take the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the field of vision of the
camera.
Note
●
The headlight fl
asher can be turned on
and off manually at any time with the turn
signal and main beam lever
›››
page 120.
●
If there are objects that radiate light in
the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port-
able navigation system, this may affect the
operation of the main beam assist system.
122
Lights
Fog lights with cornering light func-
tion
The cornering light function is an additional
function t
o the dipped beam headlights to
improve lighting of the side of the road when
taking a sharp turn at low speed.
The cornering light function works when the
dipped beam headlights are already on and
it is activated when driving at speeds below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
●
If the steering wheel is turned or the turn
signal is s
witched on, the front fog light grad-
ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering
light function is gradually switched off.
●
When engaging reverse gear, both front fog
lights turn on.
“Coming home” and “Leav-
ing home” function
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
function lights up the v
ehicle’s immediate
proximity when getting into and out of it in the
dark. When switched on, the front position
and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-
cense plate light come on.
The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-
sensor.
In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-
ment system you can adjust the duration of
the light switch-off delay, and activate and
deactivate the function.
Activating the “Coming Home” function
For vehicles with light and rain sensors.
●
Turn off the vehicle and turn off the ignition
with the lights in
›››
page 119 mode.
●
The automatic “Coming Home” function is
only active when the light sensor detects
darkness.
For vehicles without light and rain sensors.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
mately 1 second.
When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The headlight turn-
ing off time counts from when the last door or
rear lid are closed.
The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in
the following cases:
●
Automatically, once the headlight turning
off time has elapsed.
●
Automatically, when a vehicle door or the
rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting
the engine.
●
If the light panel lamps are off
›››
page 119.
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Activating the “Leaving Home” function
●
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
●
The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
ted when the lights are in mode and the
light sensor detects darkness.
The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
in the following cases:
●
Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”
switch-on time ends (default 30 sec).
●
When the vehicle is locked using the remote
control.
●
If the light panel lamps are off
›››
page 119.
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Note
To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-
ing Home” functions, the
lamp on the
main switch of the lights should be on and
the light sensor should detect darkness.
123
Operation
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 104
Dash panel: hazard warning lights
s
witch
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the att
ention of other road users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights
›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the electronic parking brake.
5. Engage 1st gear in vehicles with a manual
gearbo
x, or press the parking lock button
P in vehicles with automatic transmission.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-
tention of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The
two turn signal turn signal lamps and the
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at
the same time. The simultaneous hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
you continue braking, the hazard warning
lights will come on automatically when the
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
automatically when the vehicle starts to
move again.
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident incr
eases if your
vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-
ard warning lights and a warning triangle to
draw the attention of other road users to
your stationary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the
catalytic converter can reach, never park
in an area where the catalytic converter
could come into contact with highly inflam-
mable materials, for example dry grass or
spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
●
The 12-v
olt vehicle battery will run down
if the hazard warning lights are left on for a
long time, even if the ignition is switched
off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-
utory requirements.
Dynamic headlight range control
3 V
alid for vehicles fitted with a High lights
The headlight range is automatically adjus-
ted according to the vehicle load status when
they are switched on.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean
that the headlights dazzl
e and distract oth-
er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-
cident.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the r
oad on which
you are driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is
124
Lights
normally necessary to cover part of the
headlight bulbs with stick
ers or to change the
adjustment of the headlights to avoid daz-
zling other drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution. This
is known as “Tourist light”.
The light distribution of the headlights allows
the specific “tourist light” values to be met
without the need for stickers or changes be-
ing made to the settings.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you ar
e planning a long stay in a country
that drives on the other side, you should
take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical
Service to change the headlights.
Interior lights
Lighting of the instrument panel
,
displays and switches
Depending on the model, the lighting of the
instrument clust
er and controls can be adjus-
ted in the infotainment system, using the
function button > Vehicle > Interior > Info-
tainment; OR: > Interior settings > Light >
Instrument cluster
›››
page 93.
With the ignition on and without light activa-
tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting
remains activated in daytime light conditions.
The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-
minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving
through a tunnel without the function ac-
tive, the instrument panel lighting may even
switch off. The objective of this function is to
provide the driver with a visual indication that
he or she should activate the dipped beam.
If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-
strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the
following message will appear Turn on the
lights on the instrument panel.
Interior and reading lights
Fig. 105
Detail of roof lining: front lighting of
the passenger compartment.
Turning the interior lights on or off.
Door contact connection.
The int
erior lights come on automatically
when you unlock the vehicle, open a door
or disconnect the ignition.
The light goes out a few seconds after
closing all the doors, when locking the ve-
hicle or connecting the ignition.
Reading light
The r
eading light is tactile, each lens is turned
on and off individually by pressing in the re-
spective central area. In addition, the intensi-
ty of the light can be adjusted according to
the pressure exerted.
If you want to turn on the two lenses together
you must press the symbol
›››
Fig. 105.
Glove compartment and luggage com-
partment lighting
When opening and closing the glove com-
partment on the front passenger side and the
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Footwell lighting
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
on when the doors are opened and will de-
crease in intensity while driving. This intensity
can be adjusted through the infotainment
»
125
Operation
system menu using the function button >
Back
ground lighting
›››
page 93.
Note
The reading lights go out when the vehicle
is cl
osed and locked or after a few minutes
of turning the ignition off. This prevents the
12-v
olt vehicle battery from discharging.
Background lighting
Fig. 106 Schematic representation: Background
lighting
The background lighting lights up the area of
the centr
e console, the footwell area and, de-
pending on the version, the front door panels
and the instrument panel line.
There are predefined Background Lighting
versions
›››
Fig. 106. The intensity of the light-
ing can be adjusted using the function button
:
●
Automatic: lights up the interior of the vehi-
cle depending on the selected driving mode.
●
Manual: to adjust the intensity of the back-
ground lighting in each of the areas as well as
to change the colour in the versions that have
lighting on the front door panel and the in-
strument panel line.
●
Off: turns off the background lighting.
Additional functions of the background
lighting
●
Door open alert: Representation on the
line of the respective front door if the vehicle
reaches 10 km/h while either of the two front
doors is not closed properly.
●
Rear windows locked alert: Representa-
tion on the line of the respective front door
when the operation buttons of the rear win-
dows are pressed, if they have been locked
with the safety button
›››
Fig. 99
5
and the
v
ehicle is locked (Auto Lock).
●
Representation of the hazard warning
lights: Animation on the entire background
126
Visibility
lighting line while the hazard warning light
function is activ
e.
The representation of these functions by the
background lighting can be switched on and
off both individually and as a whole in the in-
fotainment system: > Background lighting
> Settings; OR: > Background lighting.
Note
In some versions, the colour indicated on
the Inf
otainment screen may not match the
actual colour of the vehicle's interior light-
ing.
Visibility
Windscr
een wiper and rear
window wiper systems
Window washer lever
Fig. 107
Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
ear wiper.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers off.
1
Wiper intervals.
Use contr
ol
›››
Fig. 107
A
to set the in-
t
erval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow sweep adjustable by using con-
tr
ol
›››
Fig. 107
A
.
3
Fast sweep adjustable by using control
›
››
Fig. 107
A
.
More the lever to the required position:
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
Hol
d the lever down for more time to in-
crease the wipe frequency.
5
Windscreen washer. The windscreen
washer function is activated by push-
ing the lever towards the steering
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta-
neously.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
er will wipe the windo
w approximately
every six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is acti-
v
ated by pressing the lever, and the
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
WARNING
In cold conditions you should not use the
w
ash/wipe system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the heating
and ventilation system. The windscreen
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the
windscreen and obscure your view of the
road.
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off while the wind-
scr
een wipers are switched on, they com-
plete their wipe and return to the rest posi-
tion. When the ignition is switched back on,
the windscreen wiper will continue to oper-
ate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and
»
127
Operation
other obstacles on the windscreen may
damage the wiper and the windscr
een wip-
er motor.
●
If necessary, remove snow and ice from
the windscreen wipers before starting your
journey.
●
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
windscreen wipers while dry can cause
damage.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 52.
Note
●
The windscr
een and window wipers only
function when the ignition is switched on
and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
●
The rear wiper is automatically switched
on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
car is in reverse gear.
Wiper functions
Windscreen wipers performance in differ-
ent sit
uations
●
If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically
change to a lower position speed. The set
speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls
away.
●
The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
when the windscreen washer is activated,
to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-
er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.
●
When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary
according to the speed. The higher the vehi-
cle speed the shorter the intervals.
Note
●
The wiper will try t
o wipe away any ob-
stacles that are on the windscreen. The
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle
blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper back on again.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again ap-
proximately 5 seconds after the wind-
screen washer has been activated, provi-
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).
If you activate the wipers less than 10 sec-
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
Rain sensor
Fig. 108
Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor
A.
Fig. 109
Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
windscr
een wiper intervals, depending on the
amount of rain
›››
. The sensitivity of the rain
sensor can be adjust
ed manually. Manual
wipe
›››
page 127.
Move the lever to the required position
›››
Fig. 108:
128
Visibility
Rain sensor off.
R
ain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
–
Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
–
Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor remains active and
starts operating again when the windscreen
wipers are in position
1
and the vehicle is
tr
avelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
Modified behaviour of the rain sensor
Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-
ings on the sensitive surface
›››
Fig. 109 of the
rain sensor include:
●
Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
the windscreen wiper.
●
Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
the roads may cause an excessively long
wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
0
1
A
●
Windscr
een crack: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-
duction in the sensitive surface area and
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the
sensor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
t
o switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
Note
●
R
egularly clean the sensitive surface of
the rain sensor
›››
Fig. 109 (arrow) and
check for possible damage to the wiper
blades.
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alco-
hol.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor. This may cause
sensor disruption or faults.
Mirrors
Int
erior mirror anti-dazzle function
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-
zl
e function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every
time the ignition is switched on.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it
receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-
led if reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
come into contact with this liquid, it must
be rinsed with large quantities of water. If
necessary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
as possible.
»
129
Operation
Note
●
If the light f
alling on the interior mirror is
obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind), the an-
ti-dazzle mirror with automatic adjustment
will not operate perfectly.
●
When the interior lights are on or reverse
gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken
with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle
position.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-
dazzle function from working well or even
from working at all.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 110
Detail of the driver's door: control for
the e
xterior mirror.
Turn the control to the corresponding posi-
tion:
T
urning the knob to the desired position,
adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to
the direction desired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
L/R
Synchronized regulation of the exterior
mirrors
In the infotainment system, the function but-
ton > Vehicle > Interior > Mirrors can be
used to select the exterior mirrors for
synchronised adjustment.
●
Turn the knob to position L
1)
.
●
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
●
If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-
view mirror: rotate the control to position R
1)
.
Tilt function for front passenger exterior
mirror
When parking backwards, and in order to be
able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-
ror can be automatically tilted towards the
passenger to provide a better view of the
kerb. The control must be in the position R
1)
for this feature to be operational.
The mirror returns to its original position as
soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h
(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-
turns to its original position if the position of
the control is adjusted.
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-
metrical.
130
Visibility
Storing the rear view mirror settings for the
tilt function
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
In the infotainment system, select > V
e-
hicle > Interior > Mirrors
›››
page 93.
●
Select the R
1)
position on the control.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
Release the reverse gear.
●
The adjusted position for the rear view mir-
ror is stored.
Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the
vehicle
In the infotainment system, using the function
button > Vehicle > Interior > Mirrors the
exterior mirrors can be selected to fold in
when the vehicle is parked and locked
›››
page 93.
When the vehicle is locked with the remote
control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-
tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with
the remote control, the exterior mirrors are
deployed automatically.
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle exterior mirrors give
a l
arger field of vision. However, they make
objects look smaller and further away than
they really are. If you use these mirrors to
estimate the distance to vehicles behind
you when changing lane, you could mis-
judge the distance. Risk of accident!
WARNING
Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
car
e to avoid injuries.
●
Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror
when there is no-one in the way of the mir-
ror.
●
When moving the mirror, take care not to
trap fingers between the mirror and the
mirror bracket.
CAUTION
●
If f
or any reason (e.g. a bump when ma-
noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors is
knocked out of position, the mirrors must
first be fully retracted with the electric
control. The rear view mirror must not be
placed by hand in the starting position, as
the folding mechanism can be damaged.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to fold
the exterior mirrors in to prevent them from
being damaged. El
ectrically retractable
exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out
by hand, always use the electrical power
control.
Note
●
If the el
ectrical adjustment should fail to
operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mir-
rors will not activate at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-
metrical.
131
Operation
Sun protection
Sun blind
Fig. 111 Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors
●
Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
scr
een.
●
The sun visor can be pulled out of its
mounting and turned towards the door
›››
Fig. 111
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-
t
udinally backwards.
There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a
cover. When the cover is opened
2
a light
comes on.
The l
amp goes out when the vanity mirror
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use
.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
s
witches off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the 12-volt vehicle
battery from discharging.
Seats and headrests
Adjusting seats
Manual adjustment of the fr
ont
seats
Fig. 112
Front seats: manual seat settings.
Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and
mo
ve the seat. The seat must engage
when the lever is released!
Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push
down (several times if necessary) from its
home position.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
Lumbar support: move the lever until the
required position is achieved.
1
2
3
4
132
Seats and headrests
WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-
cidents and se
vere injuries.
●
Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is
stationary, as the seats could move unex-
pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
when adjusting the seat.
●
Adjust the height, position and inclination
of the front seats only when their move-
ment area is empty.
●
Make sure there are no objects in that
area.
●
Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean.
WARNING
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-
ers might cause an accident
al activation of
the electrical seat adjustment system and
make it move unexpectedly while driving.
This might cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-
over, the electrical components of the front
seats might be damaged.
●
Never attach or place seat upholstery or
covers on the electric controls.
●
Ne
ver use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
seats of the vehicle.
Electric driver's seat adjustment
Fig. 113 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.
Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-
t
on according to the desired position.
Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-
ton forwards/backwards.
Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the
button up/down. To adjust the angle of
A
B
the seat cushion, press the front of the
butt
on up/down.
Backrest further upright/further reclined:
press the button forwards/backwards.
The position will be saved automatically in
the SEAT Connect Active user when the igni-
tion is switched off
1)
.
WARNING
●
If the el
ectric front seats are used negli-
gently or without paying due attention, it
can cause serious injury.
●
The front seats can also be electrically
adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle.
●
In the event of an emergency, electrical
adjustment can be stopped by pressing
any control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical compo-
nents of the fr
ont seats, please refrain from
kneeling on the seat or applying sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush-
ion and backrest.
»
C
1)
Valid for vehicles fitted with the Infotainment
Connect Syst
em.
133
Operation
Note
●
It may not be possibl
e to electrically ad-
just the seat if the charge of the 12-volt ve-
hicle battery is very low.
●
If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment
will stop.
●
When changing user a warning will be
shown on the infotainment system's screen
during the time that the seat is moving to
the saved position. This movement can be
stopped by pressing the stop button on the
screen.
Headrest
Intr
oduction
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
sembly of the headr
ests are described below.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted
›››
page 15.
All seats are equipped with a headrest. The
central rear headrest is only intended for the
central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do
not install it on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of headrest
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head and
under no circumstances below eye level.
Keep the back of your head always as close
to the headrest as possible.
Adjusting the headrest for short people
Lower the headrest completely, even if your
head is below its upper edge. In the lowest
position, there may be a small distance be-
tween the headrest and the backrest.
Adjusting the headrest for tall people
Push the headrest up as far as it will go.
WARNING
If travelling with the headrests removed or
impr
operly adjusted, the risk of severe or
fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
●
Always travel with the headrest correctly
installed and adjusted.
●
To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head-
rest correctly based on your height, always
making sure that its upper edge is at the
same height as the top of the head, but
never below eye level. Keep the back of
your head always as close to the headrest
as possible and centred.
●
Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
●
Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the headrests are
in the non-use position.
CAUTION
When assembling and disassembling the
headr
ests, do not let them meet the top lin-
ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front
seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,
this could damage the vehicle.
Adjusting the headrests
Fig. 114
Front seat: headrest adjustment.
Fig. 115 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.
134
Seats and headrests
Adjusting the height of the headrests
●
Grab the sides of the headrests with both
hands and push up
wards to the desired posi-
tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the
1
›
››
Fig. 114
›››
Fig. 115 button
on the side.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig. 116
Rear headrest: removal.
Removing and fitting the front headrests
●
Move the headrest upwards until it arrives
t
o the top.
●
Press the side button
›››
Fig. 114
1
and re-
mo
ve the headrest.
●
To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in
the backrest, pushing it down until it engages.
Removing the rear headrests
To remove the headrest, the corresponding
backrest must be partially folded forward.
●
Unlock the backrest
›››
page 137.
●
Move the headrest upwards until it arrives
to the top.
●
Press button
›››
Fig. 116
1
, while simultane-
ously pr
essing on the security hole
2
with a
fl
at screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,
and remove the headrest.
●
Move the backrest until it engages properly
›››
in Folding down and raising the rear
seat backr
est on page 137.
Fitting the rear headrests
To mount the external headrests, the corre-
sponding backrest must be partially folded
forward.
●
Unlock the backrest
›››
page 137.
●
Insert the headrest bars into the guides until
they perceptibly engage. It should not be
possible to remove the headrest from the
backrest.
●
Move the backrest until it engages properly
›››
in Folding down and raising the rear
seat backr
est on page 137.
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
necessary t
o fit a child seat. After removing
a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Seat functions
Memory function
Fig. 117 On the outer side of the driver's seat:
memory butt
ons.
Memory buttons
The memory butt
ons can be used to save
and turn on settings for the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors.
Save the settings of the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors while driving forward
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
»
135
Operation
●
Adjust the driv
er seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Press for longer than 1 second
›››
Fig. 117.
●
Press the memory button in which to store
the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A
warning sound will confirm they have been
stored.
Storing the passenger rear view mirror
settings while driving in reverse
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the required memory button.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
Activating settings
●
With the vehicle stopped and the ignition
switched on, press and hold the correspond-
ing memory button until the saved position is
reached.
●
OR: With the ignition switched off and the
driver's door open, briefly press the corre-
sponding button.
●
The front passenger side exterior mirror au-
tomatically changes from the position stored
for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves
forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h
(10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is
changed to a position other than R
›››
page 129.
Initialising the seat position memory
The position memory system must be restar-
ted if, for example, the driver seat has been
changed.
Restarting deletes all memories and assign-
ments for the seat with position memory. The
memory keys can then be programmed
again.
●
Open the driver door and do not get into
the vehicle.
●
Operating the seat settings from outside
the vehicle.
●
Move the angle of the seat backrest com-
pletely forwards.
●
Release the control to set the angle and
then press again until an audible warning is
heard.
WARNING
Adjust the memory function only when the
v
ehicle is stationary.
Note
If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi-
nut
es after the vehicle was unlocked or lat-
er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors
do not move automatically.
136
Seats and headrests
Folding down and raising the rear
seat backr
est
Fig. 118
Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in
pl
ace.
Fig. 119
Rear seat: folding the backrest.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part
be l
owered separately to extend the luggage
compartment.
Folding the backrest forwards
●
Place the side seat belts in the trim clip
›››
Fig. 118.
●
Completely lower the rear headrests
›››
page 134.
●
Press the unlock button
›››
Fig. 119
1
for-
w
ards and at the same time fold the backrest
down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged
when the red marking of the button
2
is visi-
bl
e.
Converting the table to a seat
●
Raise and lock in the back rest. The red
marking on the tab
2
should no longer be
visibl
e when the backrest is properly secured.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear
seat backr
est is lowered or lifted without
due care and attention.
●
Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
●
When lowering or lifting the rear seat
backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of its path.
●
For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
sary protection all the parts of the rear
backrest must be properly engaged. This is
particularly important in the case of the
centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a
seat whose backrest is not properly engag-
ed they will fly f
orward, along with the
backrest, during an accident or a sudden
driving or braking manoeuvre.
●
A red signal on the button
2
warns that
the backr
est is not engaged. Always check
that the red marking is not visible when the
backrest is in the upright position.
●
When the rear seat backrest is lowered or
is not properly engaged nobody else can
travel in the corresponding seats (not even
a child).
CAUTION
Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-
cl
e and other objects if the rear seat back-
rest is lowered or lifted without due care
and attention.
●
Before lowering the rear seat backrest,
always adjust the front seats so that nei-
ther the headrests nor the cushions of the
rear backrest can hit them.
137
Operation
Unlock the seat backrest with the
cor
d.
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 120
In the luggage compartment: levers
t
o unlock the rear backrest.
●
Lower the headrest properly.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the remote release lever of the left part
›
››
Fig. 120
1
or right part
2
of the backrest
in the dir
ection of the arrow. The released
part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-
matically down and forwards.
●
If this occurs, close the rear lid.
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
the red marking of the button
›››
Fig. 119
2
is
visibl
e.
Front centre armrest
Fig. 121
Front centre armrest
To r
aise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 121 up or step by
step depending on the desired opening.
To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest
position. Then lower it down.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-
ward
›››
Fig. 121 or backward as much as
possible in the direction of the corresponding
arrow.
WARNING
The front centre armrest may obstruct the
driv
er's arm movements, which could
cause an accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Ne
ver let anyone sit on the centre arm-
rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even
a child. This position is incorrect and may
cause severe injuries.
138
Transport and practical equipment
Transport and practical
equipment
St
oring objects
Positioning the luggage and cargo
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in
the v
ehicle, in a trailer
›››
page 294 and on
the roof
›››
page 148. When doing so, please
consider all legal provisions.
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
●
Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
as possibl
e.
●
Always place equipment and heavy ob-
jects in the boot
›››
.
●
Position heavy items in the boot as far for-
w
ard as possible.
●
Take into account the maximum authorised
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-
thorised weight of the vehicle
›››
page 371.
●
Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
›››
page 144.
●
Also place small objects safely.
●
Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into
account the pressure adhesive of the tyres
›››
page 347.
●
In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure
control system, adjust to the new load status
if necessary
›››
page 351.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
or br
aking or in case of an accident. Partic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-
ing and they are thrown across the inside of
the vehicle. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
ly.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Place the objects in the cabin in such a
way that they can never reach the airbag
deployment areas while the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Place the objects in such a way that they
never force any occupant of the vehicle to
sit in an incorrect position.
●
When transporting objects that take up a
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
●
Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
loose in open storage compartment of the
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat
or on the dashboard.
●
Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
WARNING
The transport of heavy object changes ve-
hicl
e handling and increases braking dis-
tance. Heavy objects that are not properly
placed or secured may cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
●
Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
distribution of the load in the vehicle have
effects on the driving behaviour and brak-
ing ability.
●
When transporting heavy objects, the
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
to the displacement of the centre of gravi-
ty.
●
Always distribute the load in the vehicle
as evenly and horizontally as possible.
●
Always place heavy objects in the boot
before the rear axle and as far away from it
as possible.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
that are unsecured could move suddenly
and modify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
»
139
Operation
WARNING
●
Ne
ver leave your vehicle unattended, es-
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Close and lock all the doors and the rear
lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
t
ures, the antenna embedded into the rear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
bly, if they are in contact with objects.
Note
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings ar
e commercially available from
accessory shops.
Luggage compartment
L
uggage compartment shelf
3 V
alid for: Leon
Fig. 122
In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing and fitting the shelf
.
Fig. 123
In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing and fitting the shelf
.
Removing
●
Detach the cord loops
›
››
Fig. 122
B
from
their hooks
A
.
●
Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-
ports
›
››
Fig. 123 by pulling it upwards and
then take it out.
If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-
der the luggage compartment double floor
›››
page 141.
Fitting
●
Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-
cess” fits onto the axis of the supports
›››
Fig. 123 and press down until it engages.
●
Hook the loops
›››
Fig. 122
B
to the rear lid.
WARNING
Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the r
ear shelf can cause serious in-
jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or
braking or in case of an accident.
●
Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-
jects or in bags on the rear shelf.
●
Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore closing the rear lid, ensure that
the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
140
Transport and practical equipment
●
An o
verloaded luggage compartment
could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-
rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-
aged.
●
If the luggage compartment is overloa-
ded, remove the tray.
Note
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
on the luggage compar
tment cover, rear
visibility is not reduced.
Store the rear shelf
3 V
alid for: Leon
Fig. 124
In the luggage compartment: covers
f
or storing the rear shelf.
Fig. 125 In the luggage compartment: fitting
the r
ear shelf.
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
gage compartment shelf has been r
emoved,
it can be stored under the boot floor.
●
Remove the left and right covers
›››
Fig. 124.
●
Place the rear shelf in the corresponding
housing
›››
Fig. 125.
●
Put the left and right covers in their original
position.
Retractable shelf
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 126
In the luggage compartment: unroll-
ing and r
olling up the shelf.
»
141
Operation
Fig. 127 In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing the shelf
.
Extending the shelf
●
Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its handle
›
››
Fig. 126
1
in a backw
ards direction un-
til it audibly clicks into place.
Retracting the rear shelf
●
Press on the handle of the rear shelf in the
direction of the arrow to release it
›››
Fig. 126
.
The shelf will automatically move towards
the end and will retract completely.
Removing the shelf
●
Press the rear shelf support
›››
Fig. 127
1
in
the dir
ection of the arrow.
●
Remove the rear shelf through the support
and upwards.
●
The tray can be stored under the variable
floor of the luggage compartment, which
must be in its upper position
›››
page 142.
Fitting the shelf
●
Place the rear shelf in the housing provided
in the left or right side cover.
●
Engage the support of the rear shelf
›››
Fig. 127
1
into the housing on the other
side
.
●
Check that the support is properly engag-
ed.
CAUTION
To retract the rear shelf, press on its handle
in a do
wnwards only direction; if you press
it upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.
Storing the retractable shelf
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 128
In the luggage compartment: space
t
o store the retractable shelf.
Fig. 129
In the luggage compartment: space
t
o store the retractable shelf.
The retractable shelf can be stored under the
luggage compartment v
ariable floor.
●
Remove the left and right covers
›››
Fig. 128
A
.
142
Transport and practical equipment
●
Pr
ess the head of the retractable shelf in
the direction of the arrow until it engages in
its housing
›››
Fig. 129. Make sure that slide
A
fits into the corresponding housing.
●
Put the left and right covers in their original
position.
Variable luggage compartment
fl
oor
Fig. 130 Variable luggage compartment floor:
r
aised position;
lowered position.
Fig. 131 Variable luggage compartment floor:
inclined position.
Variable floor in high position
●
To move from the low position to the high
position, lift the fl
oor using the handle
›››
Fig. 130
1
, and pull it back until the front
of the fl
oor has fully passed the supports
›››
Fig. 130
2
.
●
Move the floor forward over the supports as
f
ar as the rear seat backrest and then lower
the floor with the handle
1
.
V
ariable floor in low position
●
To move from the high position to the low
position, lift the floor using the handle
›››
Fig. 130
1
, and pull it back until the front
of the fl
oor has fully passed the supports
›››
Fig. 130
2
.
●
Now let the front part fall to the floor and
slide the fl
oor forwards as far as the rear seat
backrest; lower the floor at the same time
with the handle
1
.
Variable floor in the tilted position
When the v
ariable floor is tilted you can ac-
cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit
area.
●
Lift the variable floor in the high position us-
ing handle
›››
Fig. 130
1
, pull it up and push
it t
owards the backrest of the rear seats until
it folds along the hinge line and the movable
part of the floor is resting on itself.
●
Rest the floor on its housings
›››
Fig. 131 (ar-
rows).
WARNING
●
Al
ways secure objects, even when the
luggage compartment floor is properly lif-
ted.
●
Only objects that do not protrude more
than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-
ried between the rear seat and the raised
luggage compartment floor.
●
Only objects that do not weigh than ap-
proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between
the rear seat and the raised luggage com-
partment floor.
CAUTION
●
The maximum w
eight that can be loaded
on the luggage compartment variable floor
in the top position is 100 kg.
●
Do not let the luggage compartment
floor fall when closing it. Always carefully
»
143
Operation
guide it downwards in a controlled manner.
Otherwise
, the lining and the floor of the
luggage compartment could be damaged.
Fastening rings
Fig. 132
In the luggage compartment: fixed
and depl
oyable fastening rings.
There are fastening rings
›
››
Fig. 132 on the
front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-
jects and luggage with fastening belts and
cords.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
str
aps are used, they could break in the
event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fa-
tal injuries.
●
Always use belts or straps that are suita-
ble and in good condition.
●
Tight
en the belts and straps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load
of the fastening rings when securing ob-
jects.
●
Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
●
Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum t
ensile load that the fas-
tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
●
Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from
specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Net bag
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 133
In the luggage compartment: net bag
hook
ed up at floor level.
Fig. 134
In the luggage compartment: rings
1
and hooks
2
for attaching the net bag.
The luggage compartment prevents light
luggage fr
om moving. The net bag has a zip
and can be used to store small objects.
144
Transport and practical equipment
The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-
gage compartment in diff
erent ways.
Hooking the net bag into the luggage
compartment floor
If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded
first
›››
page 144.
●
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
1
and
2
›
››
Fig. 133
›››
. The bag zip
shoul
d be facing upwards.
Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-
old
●
Secure the short net hooks to the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 134
1
›
››
. The bag zip should
be f
acing upwards.
●
Secure the straps in the bag hooks
2
.
R
emoving the net bag
The hooked up net bag is taut
›››
.
●
Release the net bag from the fastening
rings.
●
Store the net bag in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-
ing rings of the boot it must be str
etched
out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag
is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the
hooks could cause injuries.
●
Al
ways secure the bag hooks properly so
that they do not suddenly release from the
fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
them.
●
On hooking or unhooking them, protect
your eyes and face in case the hooks are
released suddenly.
●
Always hook up the net bag hooks in the
described order. If a hook is unfastened
suddenly, this may cause injuries.
Bag hooks
Fig. 135
In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks (L
eon).
Fig. 136 In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks (L
eon Sportstourer).
There may be hooks for hanging bags on
both sides of the luggage compartment
›
››
Fig. 135.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the hooks to hang luggage or
other ob
jects. In case of sudden braking or
an accident, the hooks could break.
145
Operation
Trapdoor for transporting long ob-
jects
Fig. 137
In the rear seat backrest: opening the
tr
apdoor.
Fig. 138
In the luggage compartment: opening
the tr
apdoor.
On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,
ther
e is a tailboard for transporting long items
in the interior, such as skis.
To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects
should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before
they are inserted through the tailboard.
When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-
el in the centre rear seat.
Opening the tailboard
●
Lower the centre armrest.
●
Pull the release lever in the direction of the
arrow and push the tailboard cover
›››
Fig. 137
1
down and forwards.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Insert the long objects through the gap
fr
om the luggage compartment.
●
Secure the objects with the seat belt.
●
Close the rear lid.
Closing the tailboard
●
Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The
red mark on the luggage compartment side
should never be visible.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
Note
The tailboard can also be opened from the
luggage compar
tment. To do so, press the
release lever down, in the direction of the
arrow, and the cover upwards
›››
Fig. 138.
Net partition
Using the separ
ation net behind
the rear seat
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 139
In the luggage compartment: secur-
ing the net partition.
Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing the net partition.
146
Transport and practical equipment
Pulling out and securing the net partition
●
Pull up handle
›
››
Fig. 139
2
to remove the
net fr
om the casing
4
.
●
Hook in the net partition on the right or left
side
3
(magnified image).
●
Hook in the net partition into the housing on
the other side
1
by pulling the rod.
The net partition is pr
operly assembled when
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings
3
and
1
.
R
etracting the net partition
●
Unhook the rod from the housings
3
and
1
.
●
Roll up the net into the casing
4
lowering it
with your hand.
R
emoving the net partition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
Press the left or right release catch
›››
Fig. 140 in the direction of the arrow
1
.
●
Remove the casing from the support in the
dir
ection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 140
2
.
Fitting the net par
tition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
Fit the casing in the right and left supports.
●
Press the casing into the left and right sup-
ports in the opposite direction to the arrow
›››
Fig. 140
2
until it engages.
The red markings on the release buttons
shoul
d no longer be visible.
WARNING
●
Al
ways secure objects, even when the
net partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the as-
sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-
ing.
●
The attachments on the backs of the rear
seats must never be used to fit the net par-
tition when the rear seat backs are in their
vertical position.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of the net partition
coul
d cause damage.
●
Do not “release” the net partition when
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle
parts could be damaged. Roll down the net
partition by hand.
Using the net partition while the
r
ear seat backs are folded down
3 V
alid for: LEON Sportstourer
Fig. 141
Assembling the net partition in the
r
ear seat backrests.
Fig. 142 In the luggage compartment: net par-
tition hook
ed in place with the rear seat backs
folded down.
»
147
Operation
Fitting the net partition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
Remove the net partition from the side sup-
ports.
●
Place the net casing in the rail slots in the
dir
ection of the arrows
›››
Fig. 141
1
.
●
Push the casing towards the left side of the
v
ehicle in the direction of arrow
›››
Fig. 141
2
and as far as it will go.
●
Check that the net is secure.
Pulling out and securing the net par
tition
●
Pull up handle
›››
Fig. 142
2
to remove the
net fr
om the casing
›››
Fig. 142
4
.
●
Hook in the net partition on the right or left
side
›
››
Fig. 142
3
(magnified image).
●
Hook in the net partition into the housing on
the other side
›
››
Fig. 142
1
by pulling the
r
od.
The net partition is properly assembled when
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings
›››
Fig. 142
3
and
1
.
R
etracting the net partition
●
Remove the rod from the housings in the
trims of the roof side members.
●
Roll up the net into the casing
›››
Fig. 142
4
lowering it with your hand.
Removing the net partition
●
Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm
in the opposit
e direction to the arrow
›››
Fig. 141
2
.
●
Remove the casing from the rails by pulling
in the opposit
e direction to the arrows
›››
Fig. 141
1
.
●
Lift the rear seat backrests.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvr
e, or in the event of an accident, ob-
jects could be flung though the interior and
cause serious or fatal injuries.
●
Always secure objects, even when the
net partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the as-
sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-
ing.
WARNING
The rear seat backrests should only be lif-
t
ed again once the net partition has been
disassembled.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of the net partition
coul
d cause damage.
●
Do not “release” the net partition when
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle
parts could be damaged. Roll down the net
par
tition by hand.
Roof carrier
Intr
oduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mise aer
odynamics. For this reason, cross
bars or conventional roof carrier systems
cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof
carrier system should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, f
or example, in some garages.
WARNING
●
Al
ways secure the load properly using
belts or retaining straps that are suitable
and in a good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
tre of gravity and driving performance.
148
Transport and practical equipment
●
Av
oid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
CAUTION
●
R
emove the cross bars and the roof carri-
er system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the instal-
lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system
and the load secured on them. For this pur-
pose, check that your vehicle's height does
not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
doors.
●
Cross bars, the roof carrier system and
the load secured on them should not inter-
fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path
of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system
ar
e installed, the increased air resistance
means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Securing the crossbars and the
r
oof carrier system
Fig. 143
Mounting points for the roof bars for
the r
oof rack (Leon).
Fig. 144
Longitudinal bars for the roof rack
(L
eon Sportstourer).
The crossbars are the basis of a series of
special r
oof carrier systems. For safety rea-
sons, special fixtures must be used to safely
transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards
or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories
can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof
carrier system properly. Always take the as-
sembly instructions that come with the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system in question
into account.
Leon
The front and rear attachment points
1
and
2
are only visible when the doors are open
›
››
Fig. 143.
LEON Sportstourer
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
ings.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the r
oof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof
and cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly
instructions into account.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them af-
ter you have travelled a short distance.
When making long trips, check the threa-
ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
»
149
Operation
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the cr
ossbars and the roof carri-
er system carefully and keep them in the
vehicle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the r
oof carrier system are properly in-
stalled
›››
.
Maximum authorised car
go on the roof
The maximum permissible roof load is 50 kg.
This figure comes from the combined weight
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
itself on the roof
›››
.
Al
ways check the weight of the roof carrier
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be
able to carry the maximum authorised roof
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
listed in the fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
correctly
›››
.
Check att
achments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
cy.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver exceed the maximum authorised
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the
cross bars and the roof carrier system,
even if the maximum authorised roof load
has not been reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as
possible and distribute the vehicle load
uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could
f
all from the roof carrier system or cause
accidents and injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
Storage compartment
Intr
oduction
Use the storage compartments only for small
or light it
ems.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-
cur
ed could be thrown across the cabin in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring. This may cause severe injuries as
well as loss of control of the vehicle.
●
Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or
heavy items in open storage compartments
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cover behind the rear seats, or inside
pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
cle.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-
cult the use of the pedal
s. This may cause
loss of control of the vehicle and increases
the risk of severe injuries.
●
Make sure that nothing prevents you from
using the pedals at any time.
●
Always secure the mat in the footwell.
●
Never place other mats or other type of
covers on the factory-fitted mat.
150
Transport and practical equipment
●
Ensur
e that no objects can fall into the
driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
●
When the vehicle is stationary, remove
the objects in the footwell.
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
might be damaged or lit inadv
ertently. This
could lead to severe burns and damage to
the vehicle.
●
Before moving a seat, make sure there
are no lighters in the moving part area of
the vehicle.
●
Before closing a storage compartment,
make sure there are no lighters in the clos-
ing area.
●
Never leave a lighter inside a storage
compartment or any other surface of the
vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
ly during the summer.
CAUTION
●
Do not st
ore heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
and cold could damage them or render
them useless.
●
Objects made from transparent materi-
als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,
magnifying glasses or transparent suction
pads stuck to the windows can concentrate
sunlight and damage the v
ehicle.
Glove compartment
Fig. 145
On the front passenger side: glove
compartment.
Opening and closing the glove compart-
ment
Opening: Pull the handl
e
›››
Fig. 145 and
open the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up-
wards.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the
risk of causing se
vere injuries in the event
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-
vring increases.
●
Al
ways keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Storage compartment under front
seats
Fig. 146
Drawer under the front seat
Opening: Pr
ess the tab on the drawer handle
and take the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
it engages.
Depending on the equipment, under the driv-
er's seat there may be a magazine holder
(about the size of the instruction manual) in-
stead of the storage compartment.
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
use of the pedal
s. This may cause serious
accidents and injuries.
»
151
Operation
●
Al
ways keep the drawer closed while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
CAUTION
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
Drink holder
Fig. 147 In the rear central armrest: drinks
hol
der.
The storage compartments of the driver and
passenger doors cont
ain a bottle holder.
Front drink holders
There are two cup holders in the centre con-
sole .
Drinks holder in the rear central armrest
Use: Lower the centre armrest.
When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift
the armrest again.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
cause injuries.
●
Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the e
vent of sudden braking or an acci-
dent while driving, hot beverages in the
bottle holders might spill and cause burns.
●
Ensure that no bottles or other objects
are dropped in the driver footwell while
driving, as they could get under the pedals
and obstruct their working.
●
Never place glasses, food or other heavy
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the
event of an accident and cause serious in-
juries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-
hicl
e due to cold or heat.
●
Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle
if the temperature inside is very high or very
low.
CAUTION
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
when the v
ehicle is in motion. If the drink is
spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may
damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
tem.
Note
The inside elements of the drink holders
can be e
xtracted for cleaning.
Other object holders
You will find more object holders, compart-
ments and supports in other parts of the v
ehi-
cle:
●
In the centre console.
●
In the upper part of the glove compartment.
The load of the compartment should not ex-
ceed 1.2 kg.
●
Other storage compartments are found in
the rear seat, to the left and the right of the
seats.
There are hangers on the struts of the doors
and the rear.
152
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's
visibilit
y, which may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Always hang clothes from hangers in
such a way that the driver's visibility is not
affected.
●
Only hang light pieces of clothing from
the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave
heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets
of these pieces of clothing.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up
the clothing, as this could interfere with the
function of the head-protection airbags.
Power sockets
V
ehicle power sockets
Fig. 148
12 volt power socket:
1
inside the
fr
ont armrest,
2
in the luggage compartment.
Fig. 149
In the luggage compartment: 230 volt
po
wer socket.
In the front armrest
●
Lift the power socket cover
›
››
Fig. 148
1
.
●
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
int
o the power socket.
In the luggage compartment
1)
●
Lift the power socket cover
›››
Fig. 148
2
.
●
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
int
o the power socket.
Maximum power consumption
Power socket
Maximum power con-
sumption
12 Volts 120 Watts
230 Volts
150 watts (300 watts - maxi-
mum 2 minutes)
Electrical equipment can be connected to
the 12 v
olt power socket.
Make sure that the maximum power con-
sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex-
ceeded. The power consumption of devices is
shown on the model plate.
When connecting two or more electrical de-
vices at the same time, make sure that their
total consumption never exceeds 190 watts
›››
.
»
1)
Leon: on the right side; Leon Sportstourer: on
the l
eft side.
153
Operation
USB power sockets
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the v
ehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
These USB ports are located at the rear of
the console, between the front seats . These
connectors can work at a maximum power of
up to 10.5 W per port.
They are not intended for file playback.
230 volt power socket
With the engine running, the power socket
›››
Fig. 149 activates automatically as soon
as a connector is plugged in. If there is
enough power available, the socket can still
be used while the engine is off
›››
Connect an electrical device: Open the co
v-
er and insert the plug into the power socket
as far as possible to unlock the built-in child
lock. The socket only supplies power once
the child lock is unlocked.
LED on the power socket
Steady green
light:
The childproof lock is unlocked.
The sock
et is ready to operate.
LED on the power socket
Flashing green
light:
The ignition is switched off, but
ther
e is enough power available
to continue supplying the socket
with current for a maximum of 10
minutes. If the connector is un-
plugged before this time elap-
ses, the socket is disconnected
and cannot be used again until
the ignition is switched on again.
Flashing red
light:
There is an anomaly, e.g. dis-
connection due t
o a current
surge or overheating.
Disconnection due to overheating
When the t
emperature exceeds a certain val-
ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati-
cally disconnected. The disconnection pre-
vents overheating when the power consump-
tion of the connected devices is excessive or
the ambient temperature is very high. The
230-volt power supply can be used once
again after a cooling time. First unplug the
connector of the connected device and then
plug it back in again. This prevents the elec-
trical device from being switched on again if
this is not wanted.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage!
●
Do not spill liquids onto the socket.
●
Do not plug adapters or extension cords
int
o the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,
the integrated child lock will be unlocked
and the po
wer socket will operate.
●
Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-
ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt
power socket.
WARNING
The power socket works only when the igni-
tion is on. Impr
oper use may cause serious
injury or even fire. Children should there-
fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if
the button is also left behind. Otherwise
there is a possibility that they may be in-
jured.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to
av
oid damaging the sockets.
CAUTION
●
230 v
olt power socket:
–
Do not leave devices or connectors
that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)
hanging directly from the power sock-
et.
–
Do not connect neon lamps.
–
Only connect devices to the socket if
the device and socket voltage match.
–
The built-in overload disconnect func-
tion prevents any electrical devices
that require a high start-up current
154
Air conditioning
from turning on. In this case, unplug the
el
ectrical device's power supply and
re-try the connection after about 10
seconds.
Note
●
The use of el
ectrical appliances with the
engine switched off will cause a battery
discharge.
●
Should the connected appliance over-
heat, immediately switch it off and discon-
nect it from the socket.
●
Before switching the ignition on or off, un-
plug the appliances from the USB ports to
protect them from any damage caused by
fluctuations in voltage.
●
Some appliances may not work properly
when connected to the 230 volt sockets
due to a lack of power (watts).
Air conditioning
Heating, v
entilation and
cooling
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the air
conditioning syst
ems can be:
●
Climatronic of 1 zone: heats, ventilates,
cools and dehumidifies the passenger com-
partment considering it as a single air condi-
tioning area.
●
Climatronic of 3 zones: heats, v
entilates,
cools and dehumidifies the passenger com-
partment considering it as 3 independent air
conditioning areas (driver, front passenger
and rear seats).
There are several ways to switch on the air
conditioning:
●
Press AUTO on the climabar
›››
Fig. 150
A
●
OR: Pr
ess in the air conditioning menu
›››
page 158 or in the air conditioning widget.
●
OR: Press in the air conditioning menu
›››
page 158 or in the air conditioning widget.
●
OR: Change the desired temperature.
The Climatronic operates most effectively
with the windows and the sunroof closed.
Some functions and menu tabs depend on
the equipment.
Passenger recognition function
3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles.
The front or rear area passenger recognition
function turns down the air conditioning in
these areas if no occupation is detected in
them, with the aim of reducing the vehicle’s
energy consumption.
The turning down of the air conditioning is in-
dicated as follows:
●
Front passenger area: on the front passen-
ger temperature setting, which will display
ECO instead of the selected temperature.
●
Rear area: On the rear temperature setting,
where ECO will be displayed instead of the se-
lected temperature. This turning down of the
air conditioning will also be displayed on the
control located in the rear area.
Air conditioning percentage reached func-
tion
Shows how long it will take to reach the set
comfort temperature as a percentage.
Once reached, 100% will be displayed on the
screen. There is one indicator for the driver's
area and another for the passenger area.
»
155
Operation
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and poll
en filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier
against impurities in the air taken into the ve-
hicle interior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed
regularly so that air conditioner performance
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to
use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-
tion, the filter must be changed more fre-
quently than stated in the Service Schedule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
cr
eases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windows are free
of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
erything outside.
●
Only drive when you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the air condi-
tioner and heated rear window to maintain
good visibility.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and
r
educe driver concentration possibly re-
sulting in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not
be refreshed.
CAUTION
●
T
o replace the pollen filter, always visit a
service centre.
●
Switch the air conditioner off if you think
it may be broken. This will avoid additional
damage. Have the air conditioner checked
by a specialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT Official Serv-
ice.
Note
●
When the cooling syst
em is turned off, air
coming from the outside will not be dried.
To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT
recommends leaving the cooling system
(compressor) turned on. To do this, press
the function button . The icon should
light up.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running t
emperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
paired, and to prevent the windows from
misting over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the
vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in
the luggage compartment designed for this
purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
structing these slots with any kind of ob-
ject.
●
Do not smoke while air recirculation
mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
conditioning system leaves residue on the
evaporator, producing a permanent un-
pleasant odour.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
a Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
156
Air conditioning
Climatronic control
Fig. 150
Schematic representation: air condition-
ing functions
A
Climabar
Fix
ed bar at the top of the Infotainment Sys-
tem
›››
Fig. 150
A
screen, (even if it is discon-
nect
ed) where the following Air Conditioning
functions are located:
Shows fan status/speed. By pressing it,
you can access the Air conditioning
menu
›››
page 158.
Access the seat heating submenu
›››
page 161.
Slide your finger from left to
right or vice versa over the numbers to
adjust the desired temperature. Press on
the same numbers to access the tem-
perature adjustment submenu.
Or: use the touch zones
1
and
2
(blue / red) to adjust the temperature of
the Air Conditioning
›
››
Fig. 150.
Switching air recirculation on and off
›››
page 160.
Temperature
Temperature setting submenu
Submenu where the following functions are
found:
Press to set the desired temperature
on the driver or front passenger side. You
can also slide your finger over the bar to
make the adjustment.
Synchronise the temperature on the
driver's side with the rest of the zones
(only versions with 3-zone Climatronic).
/
157
Operation
Air Conditioning Menu
Fig. 151 Schematic representation: Air condition-
ing menu.
Within the Air Conditioning menu, the follow-
ing submenus ar
e found depending on the
equipment:
Front Submenu
Submenu for the air conditioning in the front
of the passenger compartment where the fol-
lowing functions are found:
Connect/disconnect the Climatronic
›››
Fig. 151
A
.
Sel
ection of the air distribution to one
or more of the following areas: feet, up-
per body or windscreen. In the 3-zone
Climatronic versions, it is selected by
pressing on the desired arrow. In the 1-
zone Climatronic versions, it is selected
Vents
by pressing on the desired distribution
icon.
The colour represented by the arrows
does not indicate the outlet temperature
of the air, but the requested temperature
depending on the surrounding condi-
tions.
Manual adjustment of fan speed by
pressing or .
Turn on, change the level or turn off the
steering wheel heating. It also shows its
status (on/off) and its level.
The multifunction steering wheel can al-
so be used to switch it on and off and
change its levels
›››
page 162.
The defrost/demist function of the Cli-
matronic removes ice and condensation
from the windscreen. The air is dehu-
midified and the fan is set high.
When this function is switched on, the
rear air conditioning remains switched
off.
The heated rear window only works
when the engine is running and switches
off automatically after a maximum of 10
minutes. It should be switched off as
soon as the glass is demisted. By saving
electrical power you can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery,
an automatic temporary disconnection
of this function is possible, coming back
158
Air conditioning
on when normal operating conditions
ar
e re-established.
Switching the cooling and demisting
system on/off.
In mode, the selected temperature
will remain constant. Fan speed and air
distribution are automatically adjusted.
The mode will be deactivated when
the fan speed and/or the air distribution
are modified manually.
Fan speed in mode can be adjusted
in the Climaprofile (low, medium or high)
by successive presses on the function
button . Climaprofile adjustment is
also possible in the Settings submenu.
Rear Submenu
Submenu for the air conditioning in the rear of
the passenger compartment where the fol-
lowing functions are found:
Connect/disconnect the Climatronic A.
With the icon lit up, it is not possible to
adjust the temperature from the rear
area.
Press to adjust the rear zone tempera-
ture.
iClimate Submenu (only for versions with
3-zone Climatronic)
Submenu where different smart and/or auto-
matic functionalities are located:
/
Warm hands: automatically adjusts for a
certain time the air conditioning to heat
the steering wheel area.
Cool feet: automatically adjusts for a
certain time the air conditioning to cool
the footwell area.
Defog the windows: automatically ad-
justs for a certain time the air condition-
ing to defog the windscreen.
Warm feet: automatically adjusts for a
certain time the air conditioning to heat
the footwell area.
Fresh Air: automatically adjusts the air
conditioning for a certain time to venti-
late the passenger compartment.
Quick cooling: automatically adjusts the
air conditioning to cool the vehicle interi-
or for a certain amount of time.
AirCare Clima Submenu (only for versions
with 3-zone Climatronic)
The air conditioning system contains a filter
that can reduce the penetration of allergenic
contaminants.
When the Air Care function is activated, the
recirculation mode is on and the air is regula-
ted automatically and continuously, as long
as there is no detection of fogging hazard.
●
Press on to activate/deactivate the
AirCare function.
●
Press to access the information on the
status of the AirCare system.
Settings submenu
Submenu where the following settings are lo-
cated:
●
Automatic recirculation: to switch automat-
ic air recirculation on and off
›››
page 160.
●
Climaprofile: to adjust the fan speed (low,
medium or high) during operation in
mode.
●
Smart Heated Seats: Pressing turns the
smart heated seats function on/off for the
driver and front passenger
›››
page 161.
Climate control usage instructions
The interior cooling system only works when
the engine is running and f
an is switched on.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
The air conditioning operates most effective-
ly with the windows and the sunroof closed.
However, if the passenger compartment has
heated up after standing in the sun for some
»
159
Operation
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
ly by briefly opening the windo
ws and the
sunroof.
Change the temperature unit (Climatron-
ic)
The temperature display can be changed
from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotain-
ment system screen using the function button
> Units.
The cooling system cannot be activated
If the air conditioning system cannot be
switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
lowing:
●
The engine is not running.
●
The fan is switched off.
●
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+38°F).
●
The air conditioner compressor has been
temporarily switched off because the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioner checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Special characteristics
If the humidity and temperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
the evaporator in the cooling system and
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak!
Note
After starting the engine, any residual hu-
midit
y in the air conditioner could mist over
the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-
tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-
screen of condensation.
Rear controls
Fig. 152
In the rear part of the centre console:
contr
ols for the rear seats.
Temperature
●
Press buttons
1
and
2
›
››
Fig. 152 to ad-
just the temperature of the rear zone.
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
l
ation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must
remain open.
●
To close the air vents on the left side, move
the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to
the right. To close the air vents on the rights
side, move the corresponding diffuser vent
lever fully to the left.
●
Change the air direction using the ventila-
tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in
the rear area of the passenger compartment.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-
sitiv
e objects should never be placed in
front of the air outlets as they may be dam-
aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air fr
om entering the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high,
selecting manual air recirculation mode for a
short period refreshes the vehicle interior
more quickly.
160
Air conditioning
For safety reasons, the air recirculation is dis-
connect
ed when is pressed.
Switching the manual air recirculation
mode on and off
●
Press the button to connect or discon-
nect manual air recirculation.
Climatronic automatic air recirculation
mode (only for versions with 3 zone Clima-
tronic)
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-
terior is enabled. If the system detects a high
concentration of hazardous substances in the
ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically. When the level of impurities
drops to within a normal range, recirculation
mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells.
●
Automatic air recirculation is activated and
deactivated in the air conditioning settings
menu. An A will be displayed next to the recir-
culation icon on the Climabar, indicating
that the function is active
›››
page 157
Front seat heating
With the engine on, the front seat cushion and
backr
est can be heated electrically.
Control seat heating
Press the icon on the Climabar
›››
Fig. 150
A
to view the seat heating menu.
●
Press the left or right seat icon to connect
the seat heating t
o maximum power.
●
Press the left or right seat icon repeatedly
until the desired level is adjusted.
●
To switch off seat heating, press the corre-
sponding seat icon several times until no LED
is on.
●
You can also adjust the seat heating level
by using two fingers to press the sensor field
›››
Fig. 150
1
or
2
(left or right seat).
If the ignition is s
witched on again in approx.
the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is
automatically turned on to the level set the
last time.
Smart Heated Seats
This is an smart function that automatically
activates and regulates the driver and front
passenger seat heating for greater comfort.
To access the Smart Heated Seats function,
the SEAT CONNECT personalisation service
must first be activated
›››
page 182.
The Smart Heated Seats function requires a
period for learning usage habits. The start of
the learning process is shown on the infotain-
ment display. Its evolution (learning) will also
be shown during this process, until it is com-
plete (AUTO).
Once the learning period is over, the heated
seats are turned on and their temperature
level adjusted automatically.
If you are not satisfied with the temperature
level provided by the system during automat-
ic regulation, adjust the seat heating manual-
ly and the function will be optimised (Opti-
mising). The optimisation process will be dis-
played in the seats submenu of the infotain-
ment display.
To reset the process and start the learning
period, go to the submenu Settings > Reset
driver / front passenger profile.
Cases in which the heat seating should
not be switched on
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
following conditions are met:
●
The seat is not occupied.
●
The seat has a cover.
●
A child seat has been installed on the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-
er than +25°C (77°F).
WARNING
People who cannot perceive pain or tem-
per
ature because of medications, paralysis
»
161
Operation
or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have
a limit
ed perception of these, may suffer
burns to the back, buttocks or legs when
using seat heating.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
●
If an abnormality in the device's temper-
ature control is detected, have it checked
by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adv
ersely affect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
●
Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spill liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the heating elements
of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on
the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
point on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating
materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can
damage the seat heating.
●
In the e
vent of smells, switch off the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected
by a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only
when needed. Otherwise
, it is an unneces-
sary fuel waste.
Note
Please note the following for the Smart
Heat
ed Seats feature:
●
The system may reset the learning proc-
ess if it has not been satisfactory.
●
Aeparate driver’s seat learning will be re-
quired for each registered user.
●
The passenger seat learns regardless of
the active registered user.
●
In hybrid vehicles the use of the extended
pre-air conditioning function may affect
the learning time of the function.
Steering wheel heating
Steering wheel heating works only with the
engine running.
Steering wheel heating levels
The sel
ected steering wheel heating level will
be displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
play and in the air conditioning menu.
Level control is carried out using the button
on the multifunction steering wheel:
●
Brief press (less than 1 second): the heating
is switched on at maximum level. Press the
steering wheel button repeatedly until the
desired level is adjusted. To switch off steer-
ing wheel heating, press the steering wheel
button repeatedly until the heated steering
wheel OFF icon is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster.
●
Long press (more than 1 second): the heat-
ing is switched off directly from the level that
is currently operating. If the steering wheel
button is pressed again for a long period, the
heating is switched on directly at the last lev-
el saved before switching off.
Heating levels can also be controlled through
the infotainment system's air conditioning
menu:
●
Press the steering wheel heating function
button . The heating is switched on at its
maximum level.
●
Press the function button repeatedly to set
the desired level.
●
To switch off steering wheel heating, press
the function button several times until no LED
is on.
162
Air conditioning
Automatic off
The st
eering wheel heating will be switched
off automatically when any of the following
conditions are met:
●
Power consumption is too high.
●
The steering wheel heating system is faulty.
●
If the ignition is switched off.
Parking ventilation
With the parking ventilation function, the pas-
senger compartment can be v
entilated in
spring/summer.
The power required for parking ventilation will
be provided by the 12-volt vehicle battery.
The ventilation function is controlled through
the SEAT CONNECT mobile App or the My-
SEAT website.
Connecting parking ventilation
The function will be switched on as follows:
●
The parking ventilation function can be
switched on immediately using the immediate
on/off button.
●
By programming a departure time.
In the event of low level charge of the 12V
battery, the parking ventilation will not turn
on.
Disconnecting parking ventilation
The parking ventilation will turn off in the fol-
lowing situations:
●
When the operating time selected by the
user for the immediate on/off mode has
elapsed.
●
The parking ventilation function will be
turned on through the immediate power but-
ton on that App.
●
When the scheduled departure time has
been reached.
The maximum operating period of the park-
ing ventilation is 60 min.
Programming a departure/trip start
The activation of the parking ventilation for a
scheduled time is only valid for a single venti-
lation process. The departure time must be
for each newly programmed ventilation proc-
ess.
Before programming the departure time, you
must check that the date and time of the car
are correctly set.
When programming a departure time, the car
automatically calculates, depending on the
environmental conditions, the necessary op-
erating time of the parking ventilation.
CAUTION
Foods sensitive to heat or cold, medica-
tions and other ob
jects can be damaged
by the airflow.
●
Do not place any type of food, medicines
or other temperature sensitive items in
front of the ventilation slots.
Note
If parking ventilation works repeatedly for
l
ong periods of time, the 12V battery
charge level will drop. It is advisable to take
the vehicle for a long drive to recharge the
battery.
auxiliary heating (additional
heating)
Intr
oduction
The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-
hicl
e's tank and can be used while you are
driving and when the vehicle is stationary.
The auxiliary heating can be controlled
through the SEAT CONNECT mobile app, the
MySEAT website or with the remote control.
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched
on, you can defog the windscreen and leave
»
163
Operation
it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-
f
ore you start driving.
If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-
hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-
gine off using the auxiliary heater.
The maximum operating period of the park-
ing ventilation is 60 min.
WARNING
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain
carbon mono
xide, an odourless and colour-
less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause
people to lose consciousness. It can also
cause death.
●
Never switch on the auxiliary heater or
leave it running in enclosed spaces or
areas with no ventilation.
●
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it switches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are
e
xtremely hot and could cause a fire.
●
Always park your vehicle so that no part
of the exhaust system can come in contact
with easily flammable materials that might
be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.
CAUTION
Never place food, medicines or other tem-
per
ature-sensitive objects close to the air
vents. Food, medicines and other objects
sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged
or made unsuitable for use by the air com-
ing from the vents.
Switching the auxiliary heater on
and off
Connection
The independent heating can be connect
ed
in the following ways:
●
Press the immediate on/off button in the
App or on the MySEAT website.
●
Press the immediate on/off button in the
infotainment system (while the vehicle is
switched off).
●
Press button on the remote control
›››
page 165.
●
Automatically scheduling a departure time
in the auxiliary heater menu in the infotain-
ment system, or on the MySEAT App or portal
›››
page 166.
Disconnection
The independent heating can be switched off
in the following ways:
●
The supplementary heating function will be
turned off immediately using the on/off but-
ton in the App or MySEAT website.
●
Press the immediate on/off icon in the in-
fotainment system (while the vehicle is
switched off).
●
Press button on the radio-operated re-
mote control
›››
page 165.
●
Automatically at the scheduled departure
time or after the programmed operating time
has elapsed .
●
Automatically when the control lamp
(fuel level indicator) lights up
›››
page 317.
●
Automatically when the 12-volt battery
charge drops too low
›››
page 337.
Setting the desired temperature
The desired temperature for the auxiliary
heater is selected from the auxiliary heater
menu of the infotainment system.
Things to note
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will
continue to operate for a short period of time
in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-
tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.
164
Air conditioning
Radio-operated remote control
Fig. 153
Auxiliary heating: radio-operated re-
mot
e control.
Fig. 153
S
witch the auxiliary heater on
Switch the auxiliary heater off
Control lamp
If the buttons of the remote control are press-
ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili-
ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of
range or when the control lamp is flashing.
To switch on and off the independent heating,
the button must be pressed and held for ap-
proximately 1 second.
Control lamp on the remote control
When the buttons are pressed, the control
lamp on the remote control
1
provides the
user with diff
erent information:
1
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The auxiliary heat
er has been
switched on using the
button.
●
In red: The auxiliary heater has been
switched off con with button .
Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: No on signal has been received.
The remote control is out of range. Move
closer to the vehicle.
●
In red: No off signal has been received. The
remote control is out of range. Move closer to
the vehicle.
Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The independent heating is
blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al-
most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is
very low or there is a fault.
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In orange (then in green or in red): The re-
mote control battery is almost flat. However,
the on or off signal has been received.
●
In orange (then flashes green or red): The
remote control battery is almost flat. No on or
off signal has been received.
Flashes for around 5 seconds
●
In orange: The remote control battery is flat.
No on or off signal has been received.
Changing the battery of the radio-operat-
ed remote control
When pressing the buttons, if the control
lamp of the remote
1
flashes for approx. 5
or
ange or does not light up, the batteries
must be replaced.
The battery is located beneath a cover on
the back of the remote control.
●
To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot-
tom and slide it down.
●
Remove the old battery.
●
Insert the new battery. When doing so, take
into account the polarity and use batteries of
the same type
›››
.
●
Replace the battery cover by inserting the
t
abs at the top and pressing the bottom.
Range
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote
control, when fitted with new batteries, has a
range of several hundred metres. Obstacles
between the remote control and the vehicle,
bad weather conditions and discharged bat-
teries can considerably reduce the range of
the remote control.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
t
er or any other button battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
»
165
Operation
●
Al
ways keep the remote control, keyrings
with batteries, the spare batteries, button
batteries and all other batteries over 20
mm out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
The r
adio frequency remote control con-
tains electronic components. Therefore,
avoid getting it wet and exposing it to
knocks or direct sunlight.
●
The use of inappropriate batteries may
damage the radio frequency remote con-
trol. For this reason, always replace the
used battery with another of the same volt-
age, size and specifications.
For the sake of the environment
●
Pl
ease dispose of your used batteries
correctly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
●
The remote control battery may contain
perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions
regarding disposal.
●
Care should be taken so as not to oper-
ate the remote control unintentionally so
as to prevent the auxiliary heater being
switched on accidentally.
Programming the auxiliary heater
The activation of the parking ventilation for a
schedul
ed time is only valid for a single venti-
lation process. The departure time must be
for each newly programmed ventilation proc-
ess.
Before programming the departure time, you
must check that the date and time of the car
are correctly set.
When programming a departure time, the car
automatically calculates, depending on the
environmental conditions, the necessary op-
erating time of the parking ventilation.
WARNING
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it s
witches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless
and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide
can cause people to lose consciousness. It
can also cause death.
Usage instructions
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located
bel
ow the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,
mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes
must be able to exit freely. The emissions
generated by the auxiliary heater are re-
moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath
the vehicle.
On heating the vehicle interior, depending on
the outside temperature, the warm air is first
directed at the windscreen and then to the
rest of the vehicle interior through the air
vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the
windows for example – can affect air distribu-
tion.
When the auxiliary heater is not switched
on
●
The auxiliary heater requires about as
much power as the dipped beam headlights.
If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the
auxiliary heater switches off automatically
and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-
lems when starting the engine.
●
The heating must be activated every time
you want to set off. Similarly, the departure
time must reactivate each time.
●
The control lamp (fuel level indicator)
lights up.
Note
●
Noises will be hear
d while the auxiliary
heater is running.
●
When the air humidity is high and the in-
side temperature low, condensation from
the heating and ventilating system may
evaporate when the auxiliary heater is
switched on. In this case, steam may be
166
Air conditioning
released from underneath the vehicle. This
does not mean that ther
e is a vehicle mal-
function.
●
If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a
slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater
may be restricted if the fuel tank level is
low (just above the reserve level).
●
If the auxiliary heater is used a number of
times for a long period of time, the 12-volt
battery will lose its charge. To recharge the
battery, the vehicle must be driven for a
number of kilometres from time to time. As
a guideline: the journey should last approx-
imately as long as the heater was connec-
ted.
●
At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the
auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-
matically when the engine is switched on.
The auxiliary heater is switched off again
after a certain time.
Stationary air conditioning
Intr
oduction
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles.
With stationary air conditioning, the vehicle
interior can be cooled, ventilated or heated
while the vehicle is parked. It can also be
used to demist and remove ice or a thin layer
of snow from the windscreen. The stationary
air conditioning is powered by the vehicle’s
el
ectrical socket or high-voltage battery.
Stationary air conditioning can be program-
med and controlled in the Infotainment sys-
tem in the Battery Manager menu, through
the SEAT CONNECT mobile App and on the
MySEAT website.
CAUTION
Food, medicines and other objects sensi-
tiv
e to heat and cold may be damaged or
spoiled by the air coming out of the vent.
●
Never place food, medicines or other
temperature-sensitive objects close to the
air vents.
Note
Operating the stationary air conditioning
whil
e the charging cable is not connected
reduces the vehicle’s range. In the case of
extreme outside temperatures, the station-
ary air conditioning may not have sufficient
heating or cooling capacity to reach the
desired set temperature.
Operating the stationary air condi-
tioning
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles.
Operation of the stationary air condition-
ing when the charging connector is not
plugged in
The stationary air conditioning can operate
when the charging connector is not plugged
in When the charging connector is not plug-
ged in, the stationary air conditioning oper-
ates with the high-voltage battery.
●
Open the Batt
ery Manager menu.
●
Enter the settings menu.
●
Turn on the Enable High-Voltage Battery
Power function if necessary.
The stationary air conditioning only works if
the high voltage battery is sufficiently charg-
ed.
Setting the desired temperature
●
The desired temperature for the stationary
air conditioning is selected in the Battery
Manager Infotainment system menu using
or .
Switching on the stationary air condition-
ing
It can be connected in the following ways:
»
167
Operation
●
Pr
ess the immediate on/off button in the
mobile App or on the MySEAT website.
●
Press the immediate on icon in the Info-
tainment system (while the vehicle is switch-
ed off). During immediate air conditioning, the
vehicle reaches the set temperature in a
maximum of 30 minutes.
●
Automatically programming a departure
time in the mobile App, on the My SEAT web-
site, or in the Battery Manager menu of the
Infotainment system
›››
page 168.
Switching off the stationary air condition-
ing
In can be switched off in the following ways:
●
Press the immediate on/off button in the
mobile App or on the MySEAT website.
●
Press the immediate on/off icon in the in-
fotainment system (while the vehicle is
switched off). It is only possible to switch it off
if the stationary air conditioning was switched
on using this button.
●
Press the air conditioning off button in the
air conditioning menu of the infotainment sys-
tem (while the vehicle is off).
●
Automatically, a few minutes after the
scheduled departure time.
●
Automatically if the charge level of the ve-
hicle's high-voltage battery drops excessive-
ly.
If the stationary air conditioning is active
when starting to drive, it will remain active for
the established time if not manually discon-
nected.
Note
●
Oper
ating noises are heard while the sta-
tionary air conditioning is connected.
●
When the outside humidity is high and the
inside temperature low, condensation from
the air conditioning system may evaporate
when the stationary air conditioning is run-
ning. In this case, steam may be released
from underneath the vehicle. This does not
mean that there is a vehicle malfunction.
Setting the stationary air condi-
tioning
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles.
The stationary air conditioning can be set in
the Infotainment system for the scheduled
departure time. You can set the desired tem-
perature of the inside of the vehicle for the
vehicle’s planned departure time.
Based on the desired temperature, the vehi-
cle calculates the time that the stationary air
conditioning needs to be switched on to
reach the desired temperature at the depar-
ture time.
Vehicle air conditioning prior to departure
●
Open the Batt
ery Manager menu.
●
Set the scheduled departure time.
●
Turn on the air conditioning and charging
functions as needed.
If the two air conditioning and charging
functions are on at the same time, the high-
voltage battery is charged first and then the
vehicle is air conditioned. The departure time
can only be enabled when one of the two
functions has been enabled.
If the charging connector is plugged in, the
vehicle starts cooling down around 30 mi-
nutes before the scheduled departure time. If
the vehicle is not ready to drive at the sched-
uled departure time, it will be cooled for a fur-
ther 15 minutes.
If the charging connector is not plugged in,
the air conditioning operating time is reduced
to 10 minutes. The operating time is extended
by 5 minutes if the vehicle is not ready to
drive.
The stationary air conditioning switches off
automatically.
Extended stationary air conditioning
In the Battery Manager menu can be found
an option to add extended air conditioning.
This means if the vehicle is air conditioned
(either by being switched on immediately or
due to departure scheduling), the
168
Air conditioning
convenience consumers, e.g. seat or rear
windo
w heating may switch on automatically
if considered necessary by the Climatronic
(in cold conditions) before the departure time.
Comfort consumers depend on features.
●
Open the Battery Manager menu.
●
Tap on the icons of the seats whose con-
venience consumers should be switched on
in addition to the stationary air conditioning.
The driver's seat icon always stays activated
by default (the driver's seat icon includes the
comfort consumers of seat heating and
steering wheel heating).
●
To turn on the rear window heating before
the departure time, switch on the Automatic
rear window heating function.
Immediate activation of the rear window
heating
The rear window heating can be switched
on/off using the SEAT CONNECT mobile app
or the MySEAT website, regardless of whether
or not the stationary air conditioning is
switched on.
Vehicle air conditioning when the vehicle
is unlocked (with the opening of a door)
●
Open the Battery Manager menu.
●
Touch settings.
●
Enable the When unlocking the vehicle
function.
The vehicle’s air conditioning will switch on as
soon as it is unlocked.
Checking the schedule
When the ignition is switched off, the next ac-
tivated time and the configured functions are
displayed in the Infotainment system.
169
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
Intr
oduction
First steps
Introduction
Infotainment functions and settings depend
on the country and equipment
Bef
ore first use
Before the first use, bear in mind the following
points, to take full advantage of the functions
and settings offered:
●
Observe the basic safety warnings
›
››
page 170.
●
Reset the Infotainment factory settings.
●
Search and store favourite radio stations on
the preset buttons so you can tune them
quickly.
●
Use only suitable audio sources and data
media.
●
Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage-
ment through the Infotainment system.
●
Use current maps for navigation.
●
Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor-
responding services.
Current documentation attached
For using infotainment and its components,
take into account, together with this instruc-
tion manual, the following documentation:
●
Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board
documentation.
●
Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de-
vice or audio sources.
●
Operating instructions for data media and
external players.
●
Manuals for the Infotainment accessories
subsequently installed or used additionally.
●
Description of services when running SEAT
CONNECT services.
Safety instructions
Some function areas may include links to
thir
d-party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the
owner of the third-party websites accessible
through the links, and assumes no liability for
their content.
Some function areas may include outside in-
formation from third-party providers. SEAT,
S.A. is not responsible for such information
being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for
ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third
parties.
Radio stations and owners of data media and
audio sources are responsible for the infor-
mation they transmit.
Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall
buildings, mountains or due to the operation
of other electrical devices, such as chargers,
can also interfere with the reception of the ra-
dio signal.
Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the
antenna and on the window panes can inter-
fere with radio reception.
WARNING
The infotainment central computer is inter-
connect
ed with the control units mounted
on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious
danger of accident and injury if the central
computer is repaired or disassembled and
reassembled incorrectly.
●
Never replace the central computer with
another used, recycled or from another ve-
hicle at the end of its useful life.
●
The repair or disassembly and reassem-
bly of the central computer should only be
carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this.
WARNING
The factory assembled radio with integra-
t
ed software is interconnected with the
control units mounted on the vehicle.
170
Introduction
Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci-
dent and injury if the r
adio is repaired or
disassembled and reassembled incorrect-
ly.
●
Never replace the radio with another ra-
dio that is used, recycled or from another
vehicle at the end of its useful life.
●
The repair or disassembly and reassem-
bly of the radio should only be carried out
at specialised workshops. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
WARNING
Any distraction affecting the driver in any
w
ay can lead to an accident and cause in-
juries. Reading the information on the
screen and managing the infotainment sys-
tem can distract your attention from traffic
and cause an accident.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing an audio
sour
ce or data media while driving can dis-
tract your attention from the traffic and
cause an accident.
WARNING
Select volume settings that allow you to
easily hear signal
s from outside the vehicle
at all times (e.g. emergency services si-
r
ens).
●
Hearing may be impaired if using too high
a volume setting, even if only for short peri-
ods of time.
WARNING
The following circumstances may result in
an emer
gency call, phone call or data
transmission not being made or being inter-
rupted:
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient
mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in
tunnels, confined areas between very tall
buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
When in areas with sufficient mobile
phone or GPS signal, the telephony net-
work of the telecommunications provider
has interference or is not available.
●
When the vehicle components necessary
to make emergency calls, phone calls and
to transmit data are damaged, do not work
or do not have sufficient electrical power.
●
When the battery of the mobile phone
device is discharged or its charge level is
insufficient.
WARNING
In some countries and some telephone net-
w
orks it is only possible to make an emer-
gency call, if a mobile telephone device is
connected to the telephone interface of
the v
ehicle, inside it there is an “unlocked”
SIM card with sufficient balance to make
calls and with sufficient network signal
coverage.
WARNING
Read and observe the operating instruc-
tions pr
ovided by the manufacturer in
question when using mobile phone devices,
data media, external devices, external au-
dio and multimedia sources.
WARNING
Position the connection cables of the audio
sour
ces and external devices so that they
do not interfere with the driver.
WARNING
When changing or connecting an audio or
multimedia sour
ce may cause sudden
changes in the volume.
●
Lower the volume before connecting or
switching to audio or multimedia sources.
WARNING
If mobile phone and radiocommunication
de
vices are used without connection to an
external antenna, the maximum electro-
magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle
might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to
the health of the driver and passengers.
»
171
Infotainment system
This is also the case if the external antenna
has not been corr
ectly installed.
●
Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-
tres between the antennas of the mobile
phone device and an active medical de-
vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobile
phones might alter the functioning of these
devices.
●
Do not carry a mobile phone switched on
very close or directly on top of an active
medical device, for instance in a chest
pocket.
●
Immediately turn off the mobile phone if
you suspect it is causing interferences in an
active medical device or any other medical
device.
WARNING
Mobile phones, external devices and ac-
cessories that ar
e loose or not properly se-
cured could move around the passenger
compartment during a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre or an accident and
cause damage or injury.
●
Set mobile phone devices, external devi-
ces and their accessories outside the air-
bag deployment areas or store them se-
curely.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
er
's arm movements, which could cause an
accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
If the light conditions are not good and the
scr
een is damaged or dirty, the indications
and information displayed on the screen
may not be read or be read incorrectly.
●
The indications and information dis-
played on the screen should never induce
to take any risk that compromises safety.
The screen is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
WARNING
Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz-
ar
d announcements. The following condi-
tions prevent such notices from being re-
ceived or issued:
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient ra-
dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas
between very tall buildings, garages, un-
derpasses, mountains and valleys.
●
When the frequency bands of the radio
station have interference or are not availa-
ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-
ception.
●
When the speak
ers and the vehicle com-
ponents necessary for radio reception are
damaged, do not work or do not have suffi-
cient electrical power.
●
When the infotainment is switched off.
WARNING
Switch off mobile phone devices in areas
with a risk of e
xplosion!
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications sho
wn on the navigation system
may differ from the current traffic situation.
●
Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic
regulations and local circumstances pre-
vail over driving recommendations and
navigation system indications.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Certain circumstances can significantly
initially planned lengthen both the duration
of the trip and the route to the destination,
or even temporarily prevent navigation to
it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.
Note
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobil
e phones is forbidden, the
mobile device in question must be switched
off at all times. The radiation produced by
172
Introduction
a mobile phone device when switched on
may int
erfere with sensitive technical and
medical equipment, possibly resulting in
malfunction or damage to the equipment.
Note
If the playback volume is excessive or dis-
t
orted, the speakers may be damaged.
173
Infotainment system
Overview and controls
Connect Syst
em
Fig. 154
Overview: control unit and indication in
the 10-inch v
ersion
Touch screen. The infotainment functions
can be used thr
ough the screen.
HOME button.
: main menu with widget views.
: main menu in mosaic mode.
1
2
Direct access button to the assist sys-
t
ems and vehicle settings.
Touch zone (to turn the infotainment sys-
tem on or off).
3
4
Touch zones (to raise and lower the air
conditioning t
emperature).
Touch zones (to raise and lower the vol-
ume).
5
6
174
Introduction
Media System
Fig. 155
Overview: control unit and indication in
the 8.
25-inch version
Touch screen. The infotainment functions
can be used thr
ough the screen.
Rotary push button (to adjust the volume
and to switch the infotainment on/off)
Rotary push button (to search and select)
HOME button (to open the home page)
Radio/Multimedia
›››
page 195
Telephone
›››
page 209
Full Link
›››
page 187
Vehicle information
›››
page 92
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Vehicle settings
›
››
page 93
9
175
Infotainment system
General instructions for use
Oper
ating indications
●
The infotainment needs a few seconds for
the compl
ete start-up of the system and dur-
ing that time it does not react to inputs. Only
the image of the rear view camera system
can be displayed during system start-up.
●
The display of all indications and the exe-
cution of functions only takes place once the
infotainment system has finished booting. The
duration of the system booting depends on
the number of infotainment functions and
may take longer than normal in the event of
very high or very low temperatures.
●
When using the infotainment system and
corr
esponding accessories, e.g., head-
phones, bear in mind country-specific regu-
lations and legal provisions.
●
Some functions of the infotainment system
require an active SEAT CONNECT user ac-
count and an Internet connection for the ve-
hicle. The data transmission must not be limi-
ted to perform the functions.
●
To use the infotainment system, simply
lightly press a button or touch the screen.
●
For the correct operation of the infotain-
ment system it is important that it is switched
on and that, if necessary, the time and date
of the vehicle are set correctly.
●
If a function button is missing on the screen,
it is not a device defect, but corresponds to
the specific equipment of the country or ver-
sion.
●
Some infotainment functions can only be
selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In
some countries the parking lock must also be
enabled (button P ) or the selector control
must be in the neutral position N. This is not a
malfunction, but is due to compliance with
legislation.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact the
local authorities.
●
If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn
on the ignition before restarting the infotain-
ment system.
●
If the setup is changed, this may change
the display on the screen and in some cases,
the infotainment system may behave in a
manner different to that described in this in-
struction manual.
●
Ensure that any repairs or modifications
that need to be carried out on the infotain-
ment system are carried out by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
●
Using a mobile phone device inside the ve-
hicle may cause noise in the speakers.
●
In some countries, the infotainment system
automatically shuts off when the engine is
switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery
charge level is low.
●
On vehicles with park assist, the audio
source volume is automatically lowered when
reverse gear is selected. The volume reduc-
tion can be adjusted.
●
Information about the included software
and the license conditions can be found in
Settings > Copyright.
●
When selling or lending the vehicle, make
sure that all saved data, files and settings
have been deleted and, if necessary, external
audio sources and data media have been re-
moved.
Note
You will find more information and tips for
using the inf
otainment system in the Help
menu.
HOME screen
In the control and display unit you can set up
the vie
ws and representation on the home
screen or use the factory setting templates.
If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a
device defect, but corresponds to the specific
equipment of the country or version.
The following menus can be included as an
icon on the home screen:
176
Introduction
Main menus on the home screen
Navigation
›
››
page 202
Radio
›››
page 195, Multimedia
›››
page 199
Telephone
›››
page 209
Full Link
›››
page 187
Setup
›››
page 178
Vehicle
›››
page 93
Data
›››
page 92
Air conditioning
›››
page 155
Sound
Users
Store
Legal
Help
Managing the infotainment system
Execute the functions and settings with the in-
f
otainment controls.
Depending on the equipment, the infotain-
ment syst
em has different controls:
●
Touch screen.
●
Touch zones outside the screen, for exam-
ple, Volume (+ -).
Help Menu
This menu displays information on the opera-
tion of the infotainment system and gives
practical tips.
●
Press Help.
Connecting and disconnecting the info-
tainment system
The infotainment system turns on when the
ignition is switched on, unless it has been
manually turned off beforehand.
The infotainment system starts-up with the
last set volume, provided that this does not
exceed the preset maximum start-up volume.
The infotainment system automatically turns
off when the driver's door is opened, provided
the ignition has been switched off before-
hand.
Moving objects and adjusting volume
Move objects on the screen to adapt settings,
for example, with scrollable buttons or to
move the areas of a menu.
Depending on the equipment, customise me-
nus and views.
Increasing and reducing images or map
sizes
Tip: use your thumb and index finger.
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and leave them on the screen.
●
To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-
ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly
bring one finger towards the other.
Note
If you turn on the infotainment system man-
ually with the ignition off
, it will automati-
cally turn off after about 30 minutes.
Customising the infotainment sys-
t
em
Customise the menus and infotainment views
t
o quickly access your favourite or most fre-
quently used functions.
The main menu contains function buttons for
accessing all of the Infotainment apps.
Configuring customised menus
In all views (except Main Menu, StandBy,
Parking, Speller and Full Link), you will find
shortcuts to customizable system functions in
»
177
Infotainment system
the lower part of the screen. Use the settings
t
o delete or replace them, or change their or-
der.
●
Press and hold one of the icons (or press on
the icon of an empty position) to display an
additional window.
●
Select one of the icons from the apps bar.
●
Press to delete an icon.
●
Click on an icon in the additional window to
replace the value.
●
Hold your finger on one of the icons and
drag it to the desired position.
●
To close the edit mode, press in the addi-
tional window.
Adapting customised menus
●
Press a function button in a customised
menu and keep your finger on the screen until
an additional window is displayed.
●
Press the function button to which you want
to add a function.
●
Click close to return to the custom menu.
Note
●
At l
east two customised menus are al-
ways available. These cannot be deleted.
●
You can add a maximum of two more cus-
tomised menus (in total, a maximum of four
customised menus).
●
F
or some function buttons, more func-
tions are available than those seen at first
sight in the additional window. To find all
the functions, in the additional window
slide the screen to the left or right.
●
For the drop-down menu, more functions
are available than those seen at first sight
in the additional window. To find all the
functions, in the additional window slide
the screen to the left or right.
●
The shortcut bar cannot be edited when
the vehicle is moving.
Settings (system and sound)
The selection of possible settings varies de-
pending on the country, the equipment in
question and the equipment of the v
ehicle.
Modifying settings
The meaning of the following symbols are
valid for all system and sound settings.
All changes are automatically applied when
the menus are closed.
Symbol and its meaning
/
The setting is selected and activated or
connect
ed.
/
The setting is not selected, disabled or
disconnect
ed.
Symbol and its meaning
To open a drop-down list.
To increase a setting value.
To increase a setting value.
To go back step by step.
To go forward step by step.
To change a setting value with the
scr
ollable button without adjusting.
Sound settings
Accessing the sound settings: pr
ess Sound
In the sound settings there may be the follow-
ing functions, information and setting options:
●
Equaliser.
●
Position.
●
Settings.
System settings
Accessing the system settings: press
Set-
tings.
In the system settings there may be the fol-
lowing functions, information and setting op-
tions:
●
Screen.
●
Time and date.
178
Introduction
●
L
anguage.
●
Additional keypad languages.
●
Units.
●
Voice control.
●
Wi-Fi.
●
Data connection.
●
Manage mobile devices.
●
Reset factory settings.
●
System information.
●
Copyright.
●
Configuration wizard.
Adjust the volume of external audio sour-
ces
If you need to increase the playback volume
for the external audio source, first lower the
volume on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source
is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not
enough, change the input volume to medi-
um or high.
If the sound from the connected external au-
dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the
output volume on the external audio source.
If this is not enough, change the input vol-
ume to medium or low.
Clean the screen
Remove persistent dirt carefully and without
using aggr
essive cleaning products. To clean
the screen we recommend that:
●
The infotainment system is switched off.
●
Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa-
ter
›››
page 358.
●
In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by
moistening with a little water. Then carefully
remove with a clean, soft cloth.
CAUTION
Cleaning the screen with inappropriate
cl
eaning products or when dry, may dam-
age it.
●
When cleaning, only press lightly.
●
Do not use aggressive cleaning products
or that contain solvents. Such products
may damage the equipment and “darken”
the screen.
Trademarks, licenses and copy-
rights
Registered trademarks and licenses
Cert
ain terms in this manual bear the symbol
® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is a
trademark or a registered trademark. The ab-
sence of this symbol, however, does not nec-
essarily mean that the term in question can
be used freely.
Other product names are registered trade-
marks or trademarks of the respective rights
holders.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
●
Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple
Inc.
●
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® and
iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.
●
MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-
fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-
tium LLC.
●
Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-
crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.
●
MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology
and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.
●
This product is protected by certain Micro-
soft Corporation industrial and intellectual
property rights. The use or commercialization
of technology of this type outside the config-
uration of this product, without a licence from
Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch
is prohibited.
»
179
Infotainment system
Copyright
As a gener
al rule, audio and video files stored
on data media and audio sources are subject
to intellectual property protection in accord-
ance with the national and international pro-
visions applicable in each case. Please bear
in mind all legal provisions!
Technical data
Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")
1)
The f
actory-mounted radio in the vehicle with
integrated hardware includes country-specif-
ic components and software for connectivity
and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and
infotainment functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on
the radio screen and partly on the instrument
panel.
■
Capacitive colour screen:
■
8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480
pixels.
■
Touch operation via the device screen, ro-
tary push-button, menu button and buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Central computer with control and display
unit (10")
2)
The f
actory-mounted central computer in the
vehicle includes country-specific compo-
nents and software for connectivity and for
the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotain-
ment functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on
the control and display unit screen and partly
on the instrument panel.
■
Capacitive colour screen:
■
Using the equipment with:
■
Touch zones Touch operation.
■
Buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
■
Proximity sensors and gesture control.
Vehicle and comfort functions
■
Driver assistance system settings.
■
Heating and air conditioning settings.
■
Lights and visibility function settings.
■
Vehicle comfort settings.
■
Parking and manoeuvring settings.
Sound system
Basic equipment:
The inf
otainment system that is supplied from
the factory is equipped as follows:
■
Speakers in different locations and with dif-
ferent power levels (watts).
■
Internal amplifier depending on the system:
■
4 speakers: 2 x 20 W
■
7 speakers: 5 x 20 W
■
Setting options:
■
Equaliser, depending on the system:
■
4 speakers: treble, mid and bass.
■
7 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-
defined settings.
■
Sound distribution, depending on the sys-
tem:
■
4 speakers: Balance (left / right)
■
7 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /
right / front / rear).
■
Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the
7 speaker system):
■
Manual (Driver and All)
■
Automatic depending on the seats oc-
cupied.
1)
Equipment name: Media System
2)
Equipment name: Connect System.
180
Introduction
Optional sound system
The inf
otainment system can be extended
with an optional sound system as follows:
■
10 speakers in different locations and with
different power levels (watts).
■
External amplifier (340 W Ethernet) that
processes the audio signals sent by the
central computer.
■
Excitation of speaker channels through
class AB final stages.
■
Audio signal processing in digital internal
signal processor (DSP).
■
Independent subwoofer in the luggage
compartment.
■
Setting options:
■
User equaliser: 5 bands.
■
Equaliser settings predefined by BEATS®
(Signature, Active, Immersive and Voice).
■
Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /
right / front / rear).
■
Sound optimisation by zones:
■
Manual (Driver, Front and All)
■
Automatic depending on the seats oc-
cupied.
■
Subwoofer volume.
■
Surround settings.
Connectivity
Wi-Fi
■
Wi-Fi conf
orming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
■
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz transfer (depending on
the country)
■
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-Fi.
■
Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi
devices.
■
Media System:
■
5GHz access point for Full Link Wireless
only
■
Connect System:
■
Access point
■
Tethering
■
Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR
code
Bluetooth® profiles
There can be a maximum of two mobile devi-
ces connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free
and a third device connected to the Blue-
tooth® as a music player.
When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
ephone management system, a data ex-
change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®
profiles.
●
Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the
HFP can be used t
o manage calls through the
infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows
audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It
may require connecting other profiles for
managing and controlling playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
phone book contents to be downloaded from
the mobile telephone.
●
Message profile (MAP): It allows short
messages (SMS) and emails to be downloa-
ded and synchronised.
181
Infotainment system
Data transfer
SEAT CONNEC
T
Introduction
To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa-
t
ed online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT
contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a
temporary use limitation depending on the
country.
Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios
offered by SEAT and individual services can
be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-
vated, renamed and extended, even without
prior notification.
In https://my.seat you can create the user
account, see the description of services and
more information.
The execution and availability of the SEAT
CONNECT services and service portfolios
may vary depending on the country, as well
as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi-
ty.
Connectivity statuses
(whit
e)
Full connectivity, all services active
(gr
ey)
Limited connectivity, some services
may not be av
ailable.
no icon
No connectivity, no services availa-
bl
e.
SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search
t
echnology does not recognise or offer re-
sults for all words.
There are SEAT CONNECT services for which
registration is mandatory and others for
which it is not mandatory.
Description of services
Before running SEAT CONNECT services,
read and take into account the description of
the corresponding services. Descriptions are
updated non-periodically and are available
online at https://my.seat.
●
Always use the most up-to-date version of
the corr
esponding service description.
WARNING
In areas with insufficient mobile phone and
GPS co
verage, neither emergency calls or
phone calls can be made, and data cannot
be transmitted. Change location if possi-
ble.
CAUTION
The vehicle may be damaged by factors
outside the contr
ol of SEAT, S.A. These
damaged can include:
●
Misuse of mobile terminals
●
Data loss during transmission.
●
Unsuitable or defective third party appli-
cations.
●
Malicious software on data storage devi-
ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.
Services portfolio
The initial service allocation shown here cor-
r
esponds to the third generation of SEAT
CONNECT services and represents the maxi-
mum services portfolio. The maximum possi-
ble portfolio is only available on some vehicle
models. During the useful life of the vehicle,
you can change the assignment shown here.
After activating the services management in
the infotainment system you can check if the
vehicle has services and what they are.
In some countries and in the event of a con-
tract renewal, the services offered may be
combined differently than indicated here.
They may also vary depending on the year of
production of the vehicle. The services men-
tioned correspond to the third generation of
SEAT CONNECT.
182
Data transfer
SEAT CONNECT services and functions
that do not r
equire activation
The following services also work without the
activation of SEAT CONNECT:
●
Public emergency call service.
●
Privacy mode.
●
Legal.
SEAT CONNECT services
The SEAT CONNECT services are:
●
Private emergency call
●
Public emergency call
●
Roadside assistance call
●
Customer support
●
Service appointment planning
●
Online system update
●
Customisation
●
Activating SEAT CONNECT
●
Private mode (deactivation of services)
●
Delete user / Reset factory settings
●
Remote independent heating
●
Remote opening
●
Horn and turn signals
●
Vehicle status incl. doors and lights
●
Driving data
●
Vehicle status report
●
Anti-theft alarm warning
●
Zone warning
●
Speed warning
●
Online map update
●
Search for points of interest
●
Petrol stations
●
Online traffic information
●
Parking lots
●
Online infotainment system update
●
Online route calculation
●
Information on risks
●
Dictation
●
Natural voice control for infotainment, me-
dia and radio apps
●
Natural voice control for destinations and
addresses
●
Online radio
●
Online media
●
Online route import
●
Online destination import
●
Remote auxiliary ventilation
●
Parking position
●
Privacy mode
●
Legal
SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-
cles
Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles.
●
Remote air conditioning
●
Electrical power manager
●
Departure times
●
plus all SEAT CONNECT services in the pre-
vious section
›››
page 183.
SEAT CONNECT individual options
●
In-Car Applications. These applications
can be purchased and installed directly in
the infotainment system through the In-Car
store.
●
Full Link.
●
Data package. Pay per use data rates for
the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB
per month.
Note
●
The public emer
gency call service is
available regardless of whether the info-
tainment system is logged in.
●
Customisation and purchase of In-Car
applications require logging into infotain-
ment system, but the activation of the vehi-
cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec-
essary.
183
Infotainment system
Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S-
PIN
Activating SEAT CONNECT
The f
ollowing steps are necessary for the ac-
tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis-
tration):
●
Create a user account at https://my.seat or
directly through the infotainment system in
the User Management menu.
●
Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti-
vate it.
●
Add the vehicle to your user account.
●
Prove ownership.
●
Prove your identity. It is only necessary if
you ar
e to run SEAT CONNECT services rele-
vant to security.
●
You can activate it at https://my.seat or di-
rectly through the infotainment system. To
activate it through the infotainment system,
proceed as follows:
Users > Settings > Become primary
user.
MENU > Manage users > Become pri-
mary user.
Follow the rest of the indications and the in-
formation shown in the infotainment system.
During activation, you may be asked to cre-
ate an S-PIN.
10"
8.25"
Update option
10" Infotainment yes
8.25” Infotainment yes
SEAT CONNECT portal yes
SEAT CONNECT application yes
More information at https://my.seat/faqs.
S-PIN
The S-PIN is a sequence of se
veral digits,
which can be selected when completed the
SEAT CONNECT registration.
When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-
guess number sequences and known dates
of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT
CONNECT user account in “Account set-
tings”.
The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro-
tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON-
NECT service relevant to the security of your
vehicle.
You must manage this S-PIN with absolute
confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third
parties, for security reasons you must change
it immediately.
Ownership and identity accredita-
tion
Become main user (ownership accredita-
tion). 2-K
ey method.
To become a main user and thus prove own-
ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve-
hicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-
tion takes place in the vehicle during registra-
tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT
user account, you must log in through the in-
fotainment system and then go to User man-
agement
●
Switch on the ignition and the infotainment
syst
em.
●
In the infotainment system, register in SEAT
CONNECT.
●
Or: open the menu Users > Settings >
Become primary user and follow the in-
structions.
●
Press the unlock button on the first vehicle
key.
●
Press the unlock button on the second vehi-
cle key.
Once the infotainment system has processed
the orders by radiofrequency, the accredita-
tion of the ownership will have been comple-
ted. You can control the current status in the
SEAT CONNECT portal.
184
Data transfer
How is ownership accredited?
10” Infotainment 2-Key method.
8.25” Infotainment 2-Key method.
SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible
SEAT CONNECT appli-
cation
No, it is not possible
Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)
Identity accreditation must be done before
you can use SEAT CONNECT services that
are relevant to security, such as the “Remote
Opening” service. Identity accreditation can
be done in two ways:
●
In person at the SEAT dealership.
●
You can find more information about SEAT
Ident on the SEAT CONNEC
T portal at
https://my.seat.
Legal provisions
During the use of SEAT CONNECT services,
inf
ormation is transferred and processed on-
line through the vehicle. Such data can also
provide (at least indirectly) information about
the driver in question, for example, driving be-
haviour and location. As a contracting party
in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT,
S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle
is used by other drivers (for example, family or
friends), data protection and personal rights
are respected. Therefore, you must inform
drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers
and receives data online, and that you can
access such data.
Not taking into account this obligation to in-
form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-
pants.
Users can manage data sending and trans-
fers through the privacy mode at any time.
More information at: https://my.seat/faq.
Follow-up services: ask all occupants
The follow-up services need geographical
and vehicle data to determine whether the
vehicle is being used within defined speed
ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be-
ing used in an established geographical area.
This information is displayed on the SEAT
CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT
app.
Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi-
cle occupants if they agree with the activa-
ted services. If they do not, deactivate the
service in question (if possible) or do not al-
low the occupants to use the vehicle.
GPS tracking: marking
If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-
trol unit that transmits the its current geo-
graphical position and speed, the vehicle
usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof
console). The absence of the marking on the
vehicle does not guarantee that the control
unit does not transmit the vehicle’s current
geographical position and speed.
Personal information
SEAT protects your personal data and only
uses them, as long as the law allows it or you
have given your consent on the occasion of a
use. You will find detailed information on data
processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT
services in the Privacy Policy, which you can
access in its corresponding current version
on the SEAT website.
Permanent transfer of the vehicle
If another person has left you the vehicle for
permanent use (for example, if you buy a
used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already
be activated and the previous user still has
the possibility of accessing the data regis-
tered through SEAT CONNECT and control
certain functions of your vehicle.
In the infotainment system you can check if
your vehicle is assigned to a person as the
main user. In this case, you can register your-
self as the main user of the vehicle and thus
automatically delete the previous main user.
Alternatively, through the infotainment sys-
tem you can directly and permanently delete
the previous user as the main user, as well as
put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit
both the communication of your vehicle with
»
185
Infotainment system
the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing
of personal and v
ehicle data.
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices
The following functions are available in the
inf
otainment system to deactivate and acti-
vate SEAT CONNECT services:
●
Central deactivation or activation
●
Individual deactivation or activation
Y
ou can rerun the corresponding services af-
ter cancelling their deactivation in the info-
tainment system.
Note
The services required by law and their data
tr
ansmission, such as the public emergen-
cy call system, cannot be disconnected or
deactivated.
Faults
Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT
CONNEC
T services are met, there may be
factors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that
interfere with the execution of such services
or prevent them. These may be specifically:
●
Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software
update and technical expansion of telecom-
munication equipment, satellites, servers and
data banks.
●
Change of the mobile telephony standard
for the transmission of mobile data by the tel-
ecommunications service provider, for exam-
ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.
●
Disconnection of an existing mobile phone
standard by the telecommunications service
provider.
●
Interference, disturbance or interruption in
the reception of the mobile phone and GPS
signal due to aspects such as high-speed
driving, solar storms, meteorological influen-
ces, topography, blocking equipment and the
intensive use of mobile phones in the radio
cells in question.
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-
bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-
ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very
tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
External information from third party sup-
plies available with limitations, incomplete or
incorrect, e.g. representations of maps.
●
Countries and regions where SEAT CON-
NECT is not offered.
Service management
Open the settings in Users and go t
o Privacy
and Services. You can do the following in the
infotainment system:
●
Check which SEAT CONNECT services are
currently available in the vehicle.
●
The number of SEAT CONNECT services
that are enabled or disabled.
●
Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT
services.
More information at https://my.seat.
Privacy and Services Settings
SEAT CONNECT services can be activated
and deactivated individually. To do this, just
check the box corresponding to the service
you want to activate or deactivate. Use the
privacy mode option if you want to deacti-
vate all of the services at the same time.
Privacy mode
Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv-
ices depending on the selected privacy level.
T
racking
Share location. Main users and co-
users can vie
w position data on the
SEAT CONNECT portal or app.
L
ocation
Use location. P
osition, vehicle, and
user data are used for services.
186
Data transfer
P
ersonal
No location. Only the v
ehicle data
and user data are used for services.
Incognit
o
Maximum privacy. Y
our services are
disabled. Only services required for
legal reasons use data.
Setting options are not available in all mar-
k
ets or in all vehicle models.
Note
If you deactivate each and every SEAT
CONNEC
T service, the OCU may continue
to transmit data.
Full Link
Intr
oduction
With Full Link it is possible to view and use the
cont
ents and functions that are shown on the
mobile phone device on the infotainment
screen.
To do this, the mobile phone device must be
connected with the infotainment system
through a USB interface.
Some technologies can also be used by
Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in-
terface and a Wi-Fi connection.
The following technologies may be availa-
ble:
●
Apple CarPlay™
●
Android Auto™
●
MirrorLink®
The availability of the technologies that Full
Link includes depends on the country and the
mobile phone device used.
You will find more information on the SEAT
website (www.seat.com).
Access the Full Link main menu
Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on
the infotainment system used.
●
Click on Full Link.
Configure Wireless Full Link
In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first
pair the mobile phone device with the info-
tainment system. To do this, proceed as fol-
lows:
Connect a mobile phone device for the first
time.
●
Unlock the mobile phone device.
●
Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on
the mobile phone device.
●
Connect the mobile phone device to the in-
fotainment system using a USB cable or via
Bluetooth®.
●
Access the Full Link main menu, unless it
appears automatically.
●
Select the mobile phone device and the
technology you want.
●
Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo-
bile phone device to grant the necessary au-
thorisations to the infotainment system.
●
Disconnect the USB connection and con-
nect with the infotainment system again via
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now
configured.
The pairing has concluded. The connected
mobile phone device can also use Wireless
Full Link from now on without the USB con-
nection.
If pop-up menus are rejected during the con-
nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be
available. In this case, SEAT recommends de-
leting the devices in both the telephone set-
tings and the infotainment system, and re-
starting the connection process.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
distr
act your attention from the traffic. Any
distraction affecting the driver in any way
can lead to an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
»
187
Infotainment system
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or
e
xecute incorrectly may cause damage to
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
Protect the mobile phone device and its
applications from inappropriate use.
●
Never carry out modifications to the ap-
plications.
●
Follow instructions in the instruction
manual for the mobile phone device.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
caused t
o the vehicle as a result of the use
of applications that are of poor quality or
are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
coverage of the network, the loss of data
during transmission or the improper use of
mobile phone devices.
Note
●
Wir
eless Full Link may not be compatible
with all technologies.
●
Wireless Full Link (Android Auto ™ and Ap-
ple CarPlay ™) is disabled in countries
whose radio frequency regulations do not
allow it to operate.
Applications (apps)
With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con-
t
ents of SEAT applications and other provid-
ers installed on mobile phone devices can be
transferred to the infotainment screen.
In the case of third-party applications, there
may be compatibility problems.
Applications, their use and the necessary
mobile phone connection may be pay per
use.
The offer of applications can be varied and
designed for a vehicle or a specific country.
The content and volume of applications, as
well as the companies that offer them, may
vary. Some applications also depend on the
availability of third-party services.
It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-
tions offered will work on all mobile phone
devices or with all their operating systems.
The applications offered by SEAT can be
modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated
and extended without prior notification.
To avoid distracting the driver while driving,
only certified applications can be used.
Full Link symbols and settings
To show more information
T
o open the Full Link settings menu
To select Apple CarPlay technology.
To select Android Auto™ technology.
To select Mirror Link® technology.
Apple CarPlay™
In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following
r
equirements must be met:
●
The iPhone™ must be compatible with Ap-
ple CarPlay™.
●
Voice control (Siri ™) must be activ
e on the
iPhone™.
●
Apple CarPlay™ must be active without
limitations in the iPhone™ settings.
●
The iPhone ™ must be connected to the in-
fotainment system via a USB connection. On-
ly USB connections with data transmission
are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.
●
The USB cable used must be an original
Apple™ cable.
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and
Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™.
Establish connection
When you first connect an iPhone™, follow
the instructions on the infotainment system
screen and on the iPhone ™.
The requirements must be met to use Apple
CarPlay™.
188
Data transfer
Launch Apple CarPlay™:
●
Press Full Link t
o access the Full Link
main menu.
●
Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con-
nection with the iPhone™.
Disconnecting
●
On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the
SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
The representation of function buttons on the
screen may vary.
Special characteristics
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth® connections between the
iPhone™ and the infotainment system are not
possible.
●
If there is an active Bluetooth® connection,
it is automatically interrupted.
●
The phone functions are only available
through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-
scribed for the Infotainment system are not
available.
●
The connected iPhone™ cannot be used as
a multimedia device in the Media main menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-
tion system at the same time. The last route
started interrupts the one that was previously
active.
●
Depending on the infotainment system you
use, on the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone and Media
mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
Voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press this button for a long time to start
voice control (Siri™) of the connected
iPhone™.
Note
●
The av
ailability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible iPhones, certi-
fied applications and their availability on
the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car-
Play ™ websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
Android Auto™
Requirements for Android Auto™
In or
der to use Android Auto™, the following
requirements must be met:
●
The mobile phone device, called smart-
phone from here on, has to be compatible
with Android Auto™.
●
The smartphone must have an Android Au-
to™ application installed.
●
The smartphone has to be connected
through the USB connection with data trans-
mission with the infotainment system.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
bl
e provided by the smartphone manufactur-
er.
Establish connection
When you first connect a smartphone, follow
the instructions on the infotainment system
screen and on the smartphone.
The requirements must be met to use Android
Auto™.
Launch Android Auto™:
●
Press Full Link to access the Full link
main menu
●
Press Android Auto™ to establish a connec-
tion with the smartphone.
»
189
Infotainment system
Disconnecting
●
In Android Auto™ mode, press the Exit/SEAT
icon t
o access the Full Link main menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Android Auto™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active Android Auto™ device can be
connected at the same time via Bluetooth®
(HFP profile) with the infotainment system.
●
It is possible to use the phone’s functions
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™
device is connected at the same time via
Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, the
telephone function of the infotainment can
also be used.
●
An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a multimedia device in the Media
main menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation
system at the same time. The last route star-
ted interrupts the one that was previously ac-
tive.
●
On the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone and Media
mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press and hold this button to start voice
control (Google Assistant) on the connected
smartphone.
Note
●
The av
ailability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible mobile phone
devices, certified applications and their
availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)
and Android Auto™ websites, or at SEAT
dealerships.
MirrorLink®
Requirements for MirrorLink®
In or
der to use MirrorLink™, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
MirrorLink™.
●
The mobile phone device must be connec-
ted to the infotainment system via a USB con-
nection that is suitable for data transmission.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
ble provided by the mobile phone device
manufacturer.
●
Depending on the mobile phone device
used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable
for using MirrorLink® must be installed.
Establish connection
When you first connect a mobile phone de-
vice, follow the instructions on the infotain-
ment system screen and on the mobile phone
device.
The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
Link™.
Launch MirrorLink®:
●
Press Full Link to access the Full Link
main menu.
●
Press to establish the connection with the
mobile phone device.
Disconnecting
●
In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APP icon
to access the Full Link main menu.
●
OR: press to access the MirrorLink® main
menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active MirrorLink® connection, the
following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active MirrorLink® device can be con-
nected to the infotainment system at the
same time via Bluetooth®.
190
Data transfer
●
If the Mirr
orLink® device is connected to the
infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the tele-
phone function of the infotainment system
can be used.
●
You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de-
vice as a multimedia device in the Media
main menu.
●
On the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not dis-
play any indication to turn or the Media
mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
Function buttons
Function buttons and their function:
Return the Full Link main menu. Here you
can end the MirrorLink® connection,
connect another mobile phone device or
select another technology.
Press to close the open apps. Then press
the apps to be closed or the Close all
function button to close all the open ap-
plications.
Press to display the mobile phone device
screen on the infotainment system
screen.
To open the MirrorLink® settings.
APP
Press to return to the MirrorLink® main
menu.
Note
You will find information about technical re-
quir
ements, compatible mobile phone de-
vices, certified applications and their avail-
ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and
MirrorLink® websites, or at SEAT dealer-
ships.
WLAN access point
Intr
oduction
3 Not av
ailable for model: Media System
The infotainment system can be used to
share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-
ces
›››
page 191, Configuration for sharing
a connection over WLAN.
The infotainment system can also use the
WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-
vide Internet to the devices connected to the
hotspot (WLAN client)
›››
page 192.
Note
●
Dat
a transmission may incur charges.
Due to the high volume of data exchanged,
SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-
iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-
erators can provide the relevant informa-
tion.
●
The exchange of data packages may
gener
ate additional costs, depending on
your mobile phone rate, particularly if you
are abroad (for example, roaming rates).
Configuration for sharing a con-
nection o
ver WLAN
Establishing the connection with the wire-
l
ess network (WLAN)
●
Press the Settings button.
●
Activate the wireless network. To do this,
press the function button Wi-Fi > Infotain-
ment system as hotspot.
●
Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the
device that is to be connected. If necessary,
refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-
ual.
●
Activate the mobile device assignment in
the infotainment system. To do this, press the
function button Enable as hotspot and
check the checkbox.
●
Enter and confirm the network key dis-
played on the device.
The following adjustments can also be made
in the Infotainment system as hotspot
menu:
»
191
Infotainment system
●
Securit
y level: WPA2 encryption automati-
cally generates a network key.
●
Network key: Network key automatically
generated. Press the function button to man-
ually change the network key. The network
key must have a minimum of 8 characters
and a maximum of 63.
●
SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32
characters).
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed. To complete the connection, it may be
necessary to enter other data into the device.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
There is also the option of scanning the QR
code by connecting the device directly to the
infotainment system’s Wi-Fi network without
having to enter the password: select Settings
> Wi-Fi > Quick connection to infotainment
system.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
3 This depends on the equipment and the coun-
try in question.
Wi-Fi Pr
otected Setup can be used to create
a ciphered local wireless network quickly and
simply.
●
Establish the connection with the wireless
netw
ork (WLAN).
●
Press the WPS button on the WLAN router
until the warning light on the router starts
flashing. If the WLAN router does not support
WPS the network must be configured man-
ually.
●
OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the
WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router
starts flashing.
●
Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
Configure Internet access
The infotainment system can use the WLAN
hotspot of an e
xternal device to establish an
Internet connection.
Establishing the connection with the wire-
less network (WLAN)
●
Activate and check the wireless hotspot on
the external device. If necessary, refer to the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
●
Press the Settings button; OR access
the Media and press the Settings menu.
●
Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu
and put a check in the checkbox.
●
Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and se-
lect the device you want from the list.
●
If necessary, enter the network key of the
device in the infotainment system and con-
firm with OK.
Manual settings:
●
To manually enter the network settings of
an external (WLAN) device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed. To complete the connection, it may be
necessary to enter other data into the device.
Note
Due to the large number of devices on the
mark
et, it is not possible to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions.
192
Infotainment operation
Infotainment operation
V
oice control
Introduction
Voice control works both online and offline. In
online mode
, commands are recorded more
accurately, as more data is available.
Voice control understands questions and ex-
pressions without having to learn commands.
Commands can be formulated freely and
can be colloquial. You will find proposals for
commands in the infotainment system.
Functions are reduced in offline mode.
Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can
cause malfunctions, as well as confusing
phrases and answers.
Languages available depending on the
market
Online and offline: German, American Eng-
lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish
and Czech. These languages have advanced
functions such as Online Commands, air con-
ditioning control,natural interaction, etc.
The other languages of the infotainment sys-
tem do not offer Online Commands, air con-
ditioning control or natural interaction.
Requirements
●
Online and offline: v
oice control with the
corresponding infotainment installed in the
vehicle.
●
Online current active SEAT CONNECT Plus
contract.
Note
●
V
oice control only recognises commands
in the language that is set in the infotain-
ment system.
●
Test the voice control with the vehicle
stopped before starting to move to famili-
arise yourself with its operation.
●
Additional information and examples can
be found in the menu Help > Voice con-
trol
Activation word and commands
Voice control activation words
If you hav
e connected the voice control via
the wake word, the connected infotainment
responds with How can I help you?. It then
scans the words spoken in the vehicle after
the activation word.
Voice control starts when the infotainment
recognises the activation word.
Connect and disconnect the activation
word
●
Press Settings > Voice control > Acti-
vate/deactivate wake word.
Activation word: Hola Hola
Commands
F
or voice control to recognise commands re-
liably, bear in mind the following tips for the
commands to work properly:
●
Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands
ar
e not recognised. Speak in a normal tone of
voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving
at high speed.
●
Avoid outside noises. Open windows and
doors can interfere with voice control.
●
Avoid other secondary noises, such as con-
versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air
flow from the outlets towards the microphone
or the interior lining of the roof.
●
Do not use a very strong accent or dialec-
tal.
●
Do not make long pauses.
Voice control is active and recognises the
w
ords pronounced.
Note
●
When the activ
ation word is disconnec-
ted, the infotainment system cannot be
»
193
Infotainment system
activated by means of the activation word.
V
oice control is still available via the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
●
Availability depends on the country and
equipment.
●
Depending on the content of the phone
book and to ensure reliable recognition of
the names of the phone book, it may be
useful to change the order of the first and
last name of the contact in question.
Start and stop voice control
Depending on the equipment, you can start
v
oice control in different ways.
Start voice control
●
Voice control activation: say the word that
activates voice control.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the
voice control button .
The voice control ends automatically, if you
use infotainment functions, if the parking sys-
tem is activated or by incoming calls.
In some cases you can also start voice con-
trol of the connected mobile phone device,
by pressing and holding the voice control
button.
Manually ending voice control
Voice control can be cancelled with the Can-
cel command.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the
voice control button twice in a row, or a
long press.
194
Infotainment operation
Radio mode
Intr
oduction
Fig. 156
Schematic representation: Radio view
In Radio mode you can tune in the available
r
adio stations in different frequency bands
and memorise your favourites on the preset
buttons to access them quickly.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country. In certain countries, frequency
bands may stop broadcasting or not be
available again.
Access the RADIO menu
●
Press >
›››
Fig. 156.
Access the settings
●
Press > .
Online functions in Radio mode
Online functions in Radio mode are only
available under the following conditions:
●
SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus
equipment.
●
You have an active SEAT CONNECT user
account.
●
Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-
count.
●
You have a corresponding data package
acquired from the In-Car store or have a data
volume for your own mobile phone device via
Wi-Fi access point.
Note
●
F
or streaming services you need to have
an account with the provider in question.
●
Radio stations are responsible for the
content of the information they transmit.
Additional electrical equipment connected
to the vehicle can cause interference in the
reception of the radio signal and noise in
the speakers.
»
195
Infotainment system
●
F
oil or metal-coated stickers attached to
the windows may affect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
Radio equipment and symbols
The functions, as well as the types of recep-
tion and fr
equency bands available depend
on the equipment and the country.
●
AM tuner.
●
Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).
●
Summarised FM station list.
●
Fusion of DAB and FM stations into one list.
●
Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-
t
ons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta-
tions.
●
Station logos.
●
DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that
are emitted sequentially.
●
Internet radio.
Universal symbols in Radio mode
To select the desired AM frequency
band.
To select the desired FM/DAB fre-
quency band.
To select the type of Internet
radio reception.
AM
FM/DAB
Online radio
Next to the name of the station, monitor-
ing of active traffic information stations
(TP).
Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band
To display the frequency band for man-
ual selection of the FM frequency. Only
possible when the summary station list is
disconnected.
DAB not available.
DAB stations support presentations (sli-
deshow).
Symbols on the AM frequency band
Manually updating the station list.
To display the frequency band for man-
ual selection of the AM frequency.
Menus in Internet radio mode
Show station selection.
Open text search.
Show the last online radio stations
heard.
Show the 100 most played radio stations
and podcasts.
Show available online radio podcasts.
Show online radio stations, grouped by
country.
Show online radio stations by the de-
sired language.
TP
Show online radio stations whose pro-
gramme belongs to the desired musical
genre.
Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-
tion
Select the frequency band
Bef
ore selecting a station you have to select
a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-
ferent stations are available depending on
the frequency band selected or the type of
reception.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country.
●
Select the frequency band or type of re-
ception: AM, FM/D
AB, FM (for devices that do
not have DAB), Internet radio.
Search and select a station
You can select radio stations in different
ways. The options vary depending on the fre-
quency band and the type of reception.
Select via the frequency band (AM and
FM)
●
Activate the frequency band.
196
Infotainment operation
●
Click on the cursor
, scroll through the fre-
quency band and release it when you reach
the frequency band you want.
●
OR: press on a point on the frequency
band. The cursor will automatically jump to
the corresponding frequency.
The station of the set frequency is tuned.
Select from the station list (AM and
FM/DAB)
The station list shows the stations that are
currently tunable. In the AM frequency band,
you may have to update the station list if you
are no longer in the area where you last ac-
cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-
quency band, the station list is automatically
updated.
●
Open the station list
●
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned. In the case of
FM/DAB and if the station is available, the
best quality reception is automatically selec-
ted.
Search and filter stations (Internet radio)
In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered
by categories and can be searched by text.
●
Open the station list.
●
Select the category by which the stations
are to be filtered.
●
OR: press to start the text search. The in-
put field is displayed.
●
Enter the name of the station you want. The
list of the stations found is updated while en-
tering the text.
●
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned.
Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)
In SCAN mode the stations are automatically
tuned in a sequential manner and each of
them is played for approx. 5 seconds.
●
To start the SCAN mode press SCAN.
SCAN mode starts and the station currently
tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a
SCAN function button.
●
To select a station press SCAN.
SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.
The SCAN function button is hidden.
Storing the station on the preset buttons
You can store up to 36 stations of different
frequency bands and reception types as fa-
vourites using the preset buttons.
●
Tune the station you want.
●
Access the preset buttons.
●
Press the preset button and keep it pressed
until the station is stored.
●
OR: press the station on the station list and
keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-
played.
●
Press the preset button.
The station is stored in the selected preset
button.
If a station was already stored in the preset
button, it is overwritten with the new station.
Special functions in Radio mode
Traffic information (TP)
The TP function monit
ors the announcements
of a station with traffic information and auto-
matically reproduces them in the Radio mode
or in the multimedia playback that is active.
To do this, you have to be able to tune into a
station with traffic information.
Some stations without their own traffic infor-
mation support the TP function by broad-
casting traffic information from other stations
(EON).
In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-
dia mode, a station with traffic information in
the background is automatically tuned while
it is possible to tune into a station with traffic
information.
»
197
Infotainment system
If no station with traffic information can be
t
uned in, the device automatically searches
for stations with tunable traffic information.
Stations with traffic information are not avail-
able in all countries.
Activating and deactivating the TP func-
tion
●
In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press
Settings > Traffic station (TP).
Online radio
Online radio is a type of reception for Internet
radio stations and podcasts that are inde-
pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-
net transmission, reception is not limited to
the region.
Online radio is only available through the In-
ternet connection of the active infotainment
system. The use of online radio can generate
expenses due to the transmission of data
from the Internet.
●
In Online radio mode, press and set the au-
dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra-
dio.
Station logos
In the case of some frequency bands, station
logos may already be pre-installed in the in-
fotainment system.
If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the
automatic selection of station logos is ac-
tivated, station logos are automatically as-
signed to the stations.
In the Online radio mode, the infotainment
system accesses the station logos of the on-
line database and automatically assigns
them to the stations
Assign station logos manually
●
In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.
●
Press on the icon and then select the
station to which a station logo is to be as-
signed.
●
Select the station logo. If desired, repeat
the same process with other stations.
●
OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.
198
Infotainment operation
Media Mode
Intr
oduction
Fig. 157 Schematic representation: Multimedia
vie
w
In Media mode you can play multimedia files
fr
om data media and streaming services
through the infotainment system.
Depending on the equipment, the following
data media can be used:
●
USB storage support (for example, a USB
stick, a mobile phone connected via USB).
●
Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile
phone or a tablet).
Depending on the equipment, the following
types of multimedia files can be played:
●
Audio files.
●
Video files (depends on the system).
You can also use streaming services. The
availability of streaming services depends on
the equipment and the country.
To use streaming services you need to have
your own user account in the streaming serv-
ice in question.
Access the MEDIA menu
●
Press >
›››
Fig. 157.
Access the settings
●
Press > .
Limitations and indications of data media
Data media may not work if they have been
exposed to high temperatures or have been
damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-
turer’s indications.
Quality differences between data media pro-
duced by different manufacturers can cause
multimedia playback malfunctions.
Incorrect configuration on a data media may
cause the data media to be unreadable.
Playlists only specify a playback order and
refer to the storage location of the multime-
dia files within the folder structure. In a
»
199
Infotainment system
playlist there are no multimedia files saved.
T
o play a playlist, multimedia files have to be
found in the storage places of the data media
to which the playlist refers.
Note
SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora-
tion or l
oss of files on data storage devices.
Features of the multimedia equip-
ment and symbol
s
Audio, multimedia and connectivity:
●
Multimedia playback and control via Blue-
t
ooth®.
●
Audio playback in these formats: AAC,
ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.
●
Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1
and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX
3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264
(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10
(.wmv, .asf).
●
Playlists on any type of device.
●
Multimedia streaming (online).
●
Multimedia search.
Universal symbols in Media mode
To start playback.
To pause playback.
To change to the previous title.
To change to the next title.
Repeat the current track.
Repeat all titles.
To activate the shuffle playback order.
To display the favourites list.
Add multimedia file as favourite.
Top right: Select multimedia source.
Access the settings.
Open the search.
To return to the top folder of the multi-
media source.
Select and play a multimedia
source
Select multimedia source
Bef
ore playing multimedia files you must first
connect a multimedia source.
To use streaming services you must be con-
nected to the Internet.
●
Connect an external multimedia source.
●
Select the connected media source to be
used for playback.
Playing audio and video files
You can search and play multimedia files
from an available multimedia source in differ-
ent ways.
Search in the folder structure
Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate-
gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My
media this category view is always dis-
played. The classic folder structure of individ-
ual USB data media is also found in My me-
dia.
Activate the folder structure.
The folder structure of the selected mul-
timedia source is displayed. When My
media is selected, the categories (mu-
sic, videos, playlists) and connected
multimedia sources are displayed first.
Search for the title you want in the folder
structure.
OR: press to start the text search. The
input field is displayed.
Enter the name of the desired title. The
list of the titles found is updated while
entering the text.
Press the desired title.
If at the beginning of the playback your
selection is in a folder of a multimedia
source, the multimedia files that are in it
are also added to the playback.
1.
2.
3.
4.
200
Infotainment operation
If a playlist is played, all available titles
in the pl
aylist are added to the play-
back.
Close your selection with .
Select favourites
In favourites you can save titles, music gen-
res, artists and albums individually for play-
back.
●
Access favourites .
●
Press the favourite you want.
Depending on your selection, all the titles be-
longing to the favourite are added to the
playback.
Configure streaming services
Depending on the equipment you can use
streaming services directly through the info-
tainment system. For this you need to have a
premium user account of the streaming serv-
ice in question and you have to log in with it in
the infotainment system. You also need to be
connected to the Internet.
Select Streaming as the multimedia
source.
A list of available streaming services is
displayed.
5.
1.
Select the streaming service you want.
Follow the steps indicated by the info-
tainment system.
The streaming service is added to the list
of multimedia sources as a new function
button.
Save favourites
Only multimedia files in My media of the info-
tainment system can be saved as favourites.
You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al-
bums, artists and music genres individually as
favourites.
Start playback.
Access favourites.
Tap a favourite that is not assigned.
OR: press on an existing favourite and
old for approx. 3 seconds.
Select from the selection list: Title, Al-
bum, Artist, Music genres, Playlist.
The selection is saved instead of the previ-
ously selected favourite. If the favourite was
already assigned, the previously saved fa-
vourite is overwritten.
The selectable options in the selection list
depend on the data attached to the multime-
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
dia file. If the music genre is not indicated in
the music files, for example, you cannot save
the music genre as favourite.
If a video file is playing, only that video can
be saved as favourite.
Playing entertainment content in
the infotainment system
Depending on the infotainment system, vid-
eos can be pl
ayed.
Video mode
When in video mode, a video can be played
on the infotainment screen if this is stored on
a data media, in My media or is sourced from
a streaming service. In this case, the video
sound is played through the vehicle's speak-
ers.
The image is only displayed if the vehicle is
stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in-
fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the
video can still be heard.
A stable Internet connection is required for
playback from a streaming service. In this
case, telephony costs may be generated.
201
Infotainment system
Navigation
Intr
oduction
Fig. 158 Schematic representation: Navigation
vie
w
A global satellite system determines the cur-
r
ent position of the vehicle and the sensors
mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes
taken. All measured values and possible traf-
fic events are compared with the available
maps to allow optimal navigation to the des-
tination.
Navigation announcements and graphic rep-
resentations will guide you to your destina-
tion.
Navigation management is carried out on the
screen.
Depending on the country, some functions of
the infotainment system will not be available
on the screen when travelling above a certain
speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to
compliance with legislation.
Navigation announcements
Navigation announcements are acoustic indi-
cations for driving referred to the current
route.
The type and frequency of navigation an-
nouncements depend on the driving situation,
for example, starting the guide to the destina-
tion, driving on the motorway or on a round-
about and the settings.
If the exact destination cannot be reached
because, for example, it is in a non-digitised
area, indications relating to the address and
the distance to the destination are displayed
on the screen.
During dynamic route guidance, you will re-
ceive information about reported traffic con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is provided if the route is re-
calculated due to traffic congestion.
While a navigation announcement is playing,
its volume can be adjusted. The following
navigation announcements provided will be
played with the newly adjusted volume.
202
Infotainment operation
Limitations during navigation
If the inf
otainment system cannot receive da-
ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel
or in an underground garage, navigation con-
tinues using the vehicle's sensors.
In areas that are not digitised or are only par-
tially digitised on the infotainment memory,
the infotainment system will still attempt to
provide route guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-
tion data, it may not be possible to determine
the exact position of the vehicle. This may
mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-
al.
Roads and streets are subject to constant
change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads
closed to traffic, changes to street names
and building numbers). If the navigation data
is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur-
acies during the route guidance.
Managing the navigation map
To allow an optimal view, you can also man-
age the navigation map with additional finger
movements.
Move the map (tip: use your index finger).
●
Move the map with your finger.
Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger).
●
To increase the view in a certain position,
double-click on the map.
Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and
middle fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time.
Change view (tip: use your index finger).
●
Press twice on the map and keep your fin-
ger pressed on the screen.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move your
finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the
map, move your finger downwards.
Change view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move one
finger towards the other. To zoom in the view
of the map, move one finger away from the
other.
Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and horizontal to each other, keep
them pressed.
●
To tilt the view of the map forward, move
your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the
map backward, move your fingers down-
wards.
Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To rotate the map view, turn your fingers
clockwise anticlockwise.
Saved data
The infotainment system saves certain data,
for example, frequent routes and position da-
ta, to make the entry of the destination more
agile and optimise the route guidance.
Delete saved data
●
Press Settings > Basic function settings >
Delete and then OK
WARNING
Select the settings, enter the destination
and the modifications f
or navigation only
with the vehicle at a standstill.
Note
●
If a det
our is passed during route guid-
ance, navigation may recalculate the
route.
●
The quality of the navigation recommen-
dations given by the Infotainment system
depends on the navigation data available
and any reported traffic congestions.
»
203
Infotainment system
●
Navigation announcements ar
e not emit-
ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment
system.
Navigation functions and symbols
Navigation
Navigation functions depend on the equip-
ment and country.
Functions
●
Entering destination and route calculation
(offline and online).
●
Displaying two navigation maps at the
same time (displ
ay and instrument cluster).
●
Update of online maps.
●
Predictive navigation.
●
3D urban maps.
●
Online traffic information
●
Dynamic POIs (points of interest)
Symbols on the map
The buttons and indications depend on the
settings and the current driving situation.
Symbols for traffic events and points of inter-
est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-
ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-
esting stopovers, provided navigation has
such data
›››
page 207.
Current position
Search for destinations.
Destinations along the route.
Final destination
Home address
Work address
Favourite destinations
Additional window with more options.
Additional window with route options.
Centre the map on the current position.
Change view: 2D oriented to the north,
or 2D oriented to the direction of travel,
or 3D to the direction of travel.
Information about the current route
guidance.
Map scale.
Symbols in the additional window
●
To open the additional window, press .
Repeat the last navigation announce-
ment.
Volume of navigation announcements.
Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night
mode.
Offer new guidance routes.
360° electric range indicator (hybrid ve-
hicles)
|
Other symbols
Entering the detailed destination for an
address.
Search for destinations.
Frequent destinations.
Last destinations.
Favourite destinations
Back
Symbols in the route details
Current position.
Destination of the current guidance.
POI symbols (points of interest)
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the
map, provided the navigation has said data.
Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to
start a route guidance
›››
page 205.
Petrol station.
Parking lot.
Tourist information offices.
Train station.
Restaurant.
Traffic information.
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the
map, provided the navigation has said data
›››
page 207.
204
Infotainment operation
Click on a traffic event to open an additional
windo
w with further details
›››
page 207.
Slow traffic.
Traffic jam.
Accident.
Broken down vehicle.
Slippery surface (ice or snow).
Road closed to traffic.
Slippery road hazard.
Danger.
Road works.
Strong wind.
Reduced visibility.
Navigation data
The Infotainment system is equipped with a
built
-in navigation data memory. Depending
on the country, the necessary navigation da-
ta may already be pre-installed.
To provide correct route guidance and make
the most of the functions offered, the infotain-
ment system should be updated on a regular
basis.
Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur-
ing navigation. Current routes cannot be
traced or the route guidances will lead to
mistaken destinations.
Ensure navigation data is updated at all
times.
Online updating of navigation data
The navigation data of the regions through
which you travel frequently is automatically
updated in the background if the Internet
connection is established and the privacy
settings are valid.
●
With the ignition switched on, the naviga-
tion data is updated automatically.
Manual update of navigation data
Current navigation data for large regions, for
example Western Europe, can be downloa-
ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB
data devices. Navigation through USB data
devices is not possible.
●
Download the navigation data to a USB da-
ta device.
●
Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.
●
Connect the USB data device to the info-
tainment system. Navigation data is automat-
ically updated in the background.
The map version is displayed in Settings >
System information.
WARNING
If you update the navigation data manually
whil
e driving, it may cause accidents with
serious injuries.
●
Update the navigation data only with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Note
Automatic update of the navigation data is
sub
ject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni-
to” mode, no update is carried out.
Start route guidance
Depending on the country and equipment,
diff
erent functions are available to enter des-
tinations.
The different functions for entering destina-
tions are found in the navigation main menu.
Opening the Navigation main menu
●
Press Navigation.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press .
Select the desired destination. You can
chose from Frequent destinations,
Last destinations and Favourite
destinations.
»
1.
2.
205
Infotainment system
OR: pr
ess and enter the address in
the input screen.
OR: detailed address.
Press Start.
Frequent destinations
The destination synopsis uses recorded data
to propose possible destinations.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Select the desired destination. The route
guidance starts automatically.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
Last destinations
Navigation saves the last destinations to
make them available for a route guidance.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Press the desired destination.
Press Start.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Favourite destinations
Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.
To save a destination as a favourite press
in the split screen when entering the destina-
tion.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Press the desired destination.
Press Start.
Note
Enter the destination as accurately as pos-
sibl
e. If you enter a destination incorrectly,
the route guidance will not be able to start
or it will guide you to an incorrect destina-
tion.
Start route guidance by selecting
fr
om the map
The navigation map includes active areas at
many points that ar
e suitable for entering the
destination. To do this, press the desired posi-
tion or place on the map. If there is map data
at this point, you can start a route guidance.
Whether it is possible to enter the destination
through the navigation map depends on the
1.
2.
3.
state of the data and it is not possible for all
positions.
To start “offroad navigation”, press an empty
area without position data.
Start navigation
●
Press .
●
Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation map
can be used by means of additional finger
movements
›››
page 203.
●
Press the desired destination on the map.
●
Press Route.
Offroad navigation
“Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-
lected destination points using unknown da-
ta. When a destination point is outside the
known roads or position data, navigation
finds the route to the next point of the known
road and completes the path to the next des-
tination point with a direct connection.
Start navigation
●
Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation map
can be used by means of additional finger
movements
›››
page 203.
●
Press on any point on the map without posi-
tion data.
●
Press Route.
206
Infotainment operation
Start route guidance using contact
det
ails
Start route guidance with the saved address
dat
a of a contact. Contacts saved without
address data cannot be used for route guid-
ance.
Start navigation
●
Press .
●
Press on the contact you want.
●
Press R
oute.
Note
If the address details of a contact are ob-
sol
ete, the route guidance will nevertheless
take you to the registered address. Check
that the contact address is updated.
Traffic information
The infotainment system receives detailed
tr
affic information automatically if the Inter-
net connection is established. This informa-
tion is shown with symbols and highlighting
the road network in colour on the map.
Traffic incidents
Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or
congested traffic, are shown on the naviga-
tion map using symbols.
With an active route guidance, traffic inci-
dents that are on the current route are shown
in the route details. Such traffic incidents can
be avoided
›››
page 207.
Hazard information
Hazard information is shown on the naviga-
tion map with symbols in the same way as
traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this
information is another vehicle that has detec-
ted the hazard and has uploaded the infor-
mation to the service provider.
The hazards shown are: accident, broken
down vehicle and slippery road surface.
Traffic flow indication
The navigation map shows traffic flow ac-
cording to current traffic events, highlighting
the road network in colour.
●
Orange: Slow traffic.
●
Red: Traffic jam.
Note
Traffic information receipt is subject to the
priv
acy settings. In maximum Privacy
mode, no traffic information is received.
Tracking or Location level setting is neces-
sary.
Function descriptions
Route details
The r
oute details contain information on all
incidents, for example, the starting point,
stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-
tion, provided the navigation has such data.
If you press on an incident, an additional win-
dow opens providing more options. The avail-
able options depend on the incident and the
current settings.
Open and close the route details
●
To open, press
|
or s
wipe it.
●
To close, press
|
or swipe it.
Edit route guidance
To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to
the destination in the TripView view.
●
Hold the desired destination pressed until it
is visibly highlighted.
●
Move the destination to the desired posi-
tion.
●
Remove your finger from the screen. The
route will recalculate.
Avoid traffic incidents
The details of the route show the current traf-
fic incidents if the navigation has such data.
»
207
Infotainment system
Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details
›
››
page 207.
●
Press on a traffic event.
●
Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.
Split screen
When handling navigation functions, an addi-
tional window with other options may open.
Possible options depend on the function be-
ing used.
Close the additional screen
●
Press on an empty area outside the addi-
tional window.
●
OR: press .
●
OR: press Accept.
Functions in the additional window:
Show on map Show what is selected on the
map
.
Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid-
ance
.
Direct route Starts direct route guidance.
Delete Delete a stopover from the route
guidance
.
Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-
cal
culate.
Functions in the additional window:
Stopping route
guidance
Ends the current route guidance.
Close the additional window.
Add a destination to favourites.
Learn usage pattern
When the v
ehicle is in motion, navigation
saves routes and destinations used to auto-
matically generate destination proposals.
Destinations are learned based on the time of
day and the day of the week.
Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the
same time. The proposed routes may be dif-
ferent from the routes of the normal route
guidance.
If one of the proposed destinations is selec-
ted, the guide to that destination is started.
The route guidance follows the selected route
until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case,
the route is recalculated and takes you back
along the most direct path to the initially se-
lected destination.
Important traffic jams are taken into account
in the route guidance, and are avoided if al-
ternative routes are available, provided navi-
gation has such dat
a.
You can activate and deactivate the function
whenever you want.
Enable and disable learning usage pattern
The setting is in the corresponding navigation
menu > Basic function settings.
●
To activate the function, activate Learn us-
age pattern.
●
To disable the function, disable Learn us-
age pattern.
●
To delete saved data, press Delete usage
pattern.
360° electric operating range display
3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles
The 360° operating range display shows the
possible range with the current charge level
of the high voltage battery.
Switch on the 360° electric operating
range display
●
Open the additional map window and
press the symbol .
208
Infotainment operation
Telephone interface
Intr
oduction
Fig. 159
Schematic representation: Phone view
You can use the telephone interface to con-
nect your mobil
e to the infotainment system
and operate phone functions through it. The
sound is played through the vehicle's speak-
ers.
You can connect up to two mobile phone de-
vices simultaneously to the infotainment sys-
tem.
High speeds, poor weather or road conditions
and a noisy ambience (even outside of the
vehicle), as well as the quality of reception
can all affect the quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicle.
Note
●
As a gener
al rule, pairing a device (for ex-
ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-
essary once. You can restore the device
connection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with the
infotainment system whenever you want
without having to pair the device again.
●
The availability of some telephone func-
tions will depend on the mobile phone con-
nected to the infotainment system.
Telephone interface equipment and
symbol
s
Equipment features
●
Hands-free function.
●
Use up to two phones at the same time.
●
Phone book with up to 5,000 contacts, de-
pending on the inf
otainment system.
●
SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS reading,
SMS writing (templates included), SMS play-
back, message history.
●
Email functions via Bluetooth®: reading
email, writing email.
»
209
Infotainment system
●
Connection t
o wireless charging option.
●
Connection to the microphone mounted on
the vehicle.
Symbols in the main menu
Contacts.
List of incoming and outgoing calls.
Enter telephone number.
Text messages (SMS and emails).
Telephone interface settings.
Symbols for calls
The symbols may be different depending on
the infotainment system.
Start a call or bringing it to the fore-
ground.
End or reject a call.
Open contact list.
Enter telephone number.
Mute the sound of the hands-free
Hold call.
Continue call.
Start conference call.
Pass call to private mode
Make an emergency call.
Get help in case of breakdown.
Obtain information on the SEAT brand
and selected additional services related
to traffic and your travel.
Voice mail.
Call list symbols
●
To open the call lists, press .
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Missed call.
Telephone number (company).
Telephone number (private).
Mobile telephone number (company).
Mobile telephone number (private).
Fax (private).
Fax.
Symbols for text messages
The symbols may be different depending on
the infotainment system.
●
To open the text messages, press .
Activate voice control input
›››
page 193.
Templates for text messages.
Places with special regulations
Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele-
phone int
erface in places with a risk of explo-
sion. These places are not always clearly
marked. They include, for example:
●
The vicinity of chemical pipelines and
tanks.
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-
uefied gas (such as propane or butane).
●
Places where the air is laden with chemi-
cal
s or particles such as flour, dust or metal
powder.
●
All other places where the vehicle engine or
telephone must be switched off.
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of e
xplosion!
Note
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobil
e phones is forbidden, it
must be switched off at all times. The radi-
ation produced by the mobile phone when
switched on may interfere with sensitive
technical and medical equipment, possibly
resulting in malfunction or damage to the
equipment.
210
Infotainment operation
Pair, connect and manage
Requirement for pairing:
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone de
vice.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment
system.
●
Depending on the mobile device, it will be
necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu open
or activate the Visibility option so that the
device is visible from the infotainment system.
Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel-
ephony with the infotainment system to use
the telephone interface functions. On the first
connection, the mobile phone device is
paired with the infotainment system. Doing so
saves a user profile
›››
page 211.
The pairing can take a few minutes. The func-
tions available depend on the mobile phone
device used and its operating system.
Pair a mobile phone device
●
Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-
ces on the mobil
e phone device and select
the name of the infotainment system.
●
Please note and, if necessary, confirm the
messages that appear on the mobile phone
device and on the infotainment system. If the
pairing was successful, the phone data is
saved in the user profile.
●
Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-
sage on the mobile phone device.
Active and passive connection
To use the functions of the telephone inter-
face, there must be at least one mobile
phone device connected to the infotainment
system. If there are several mobile phone de-
vices connected to the infotainment system,
you can switch between active and passive
connections. To use the telephone interface
with the desired mobile phone device, estab-
lish the active connection with the infotain-
ment system.
Difference between connection types
Primary
The mobile phone device is paired and
connect
ed. The functions of the tele-
phone interface are performed with the
data of said mobile phone device.
Secon-
dary
The mobile phone device is paired and
connect
ed. Calls can be managed but
the phone book, messages or other
functions will not be active.
Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the
inf
otainment system, even if they are not cur-
rently connected.
Connect a mobile phone device
Requirement: the mobile phone device is
paired with the infotainment system.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone device.
Establish an active connection
Requirement: several mobile phone devices
are connected to the infotainment system at
the same time.
●
Select the desired mobile phone device
from the drop-down menu. All other mobile
phone devices are automatically in the pas-
sive connection.
User profiles
For each of the paired mobile phone devices
an individual user profile is automatically cre-
ated. In the user profile, data from the mobile
phone device is stored, for example, contact
details or settings. A maximum of four user
profiles can be saved in the infotainment sys-
tem at the same time.
WARNING
If you perform the pairing while driving, it
coul
d cause an accident or injury.
●
Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a
standstill.
»
211
Infotainment system
Note
●
In the pairing of some mobil
e phone devi-
ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of
the mobile phone device. Enter that number
in the infotainment system to complete the
pairing.
●
While the infotainment system is in the
Known mobile phones menu, the wireless
charging function is disabled. When you
exit this menu, the wireless charging func-
tion is activated again.
Basic and Comfort Telephony
Depending on the equipment, two types of
t
elephone interface can be used:
●
Basic telephone interface.
●
Comfort telephone interface.
Basic telephone interface
The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-
tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This inter-
face allows the use of telephone functions
through the infotainment system and play-
back through the vehicle's speakers.
Comfort telephone interface
Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com-
fort telephone interface also uses the Blue-
tooth® HFP profile.
The Comfort phone interface can be equip-
ped with the wireless charging function
›››
page 213.
In order to use the functions of the wireless
charging function, you have to place a suita-
ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor-
age compartment. The mobile phone device
will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This
improves the reception and sound quality of
calls.
To call
Open the telephone interface
●
Press T
elephone.
Make a call
Select a phone number to start a call. Differ-
ent functions are available for selecting a
phone number:
Contacts
If a contact has several registered phone
numbers you have to select one.
●
Press and press a number on the list to
start the call.
●
OR: press and enter the contact name in
the input field to search for it. Press on the
contact to start the call.
●
OR: press a favourite in the telephone inter-
face main menu to start the call.
Calls
The telephone interface shows the call list of
the mobile telephone device. Start a call from
the call list.
●
Press > All and press a number on the list
to start the call.
●
OR: press and filter the call list entries
(for example, missed calls or dialled num-
bers). In filtered list, press a number to start
the call.
Dial
Manually enter a phone number to start a
call. While entering the phone number, con-
tacts that match that number are shown on
the infotainment screen.
●
Press and enter telephone number.
●
Press to start the call
The last call is dialled by pressing and hold-
ing the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Send messages
Depending on the mobile phone device and
the inf
otainment system used, you can send
212
Infotainment operation
and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel-
ephone int
erface.
Send an SMS
●
Press > Text message > Enter new
message and enter the message on the
screen.
●
Enter the contact you want in the search
bar.
●
To send the message press OK.
Send an e-mail
●
Press > E-mail > Enter new message
and enter the message on the screen.
●
Enter the contact you want in the search
bar.
●
To send the message press OK.
Phone book, favourites and speed
dial buttons
In the first connection of a telephone with the
inf
otainment system, the phone book is saved
in the infotainment system. It may be neces-
sary to confirm the data transmission on the
mobile phone.
Each time the phone is reconnected, the
phone book is updated.
If conference calls are supported, the phone
book can be accessed during a call. If there
is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis-
played in the list next to the entry.
Favourites
A speed dial button can be assigned to a
phone book favourite up to a maximum of six.
If there is a registered photo saved to the
contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.
All speed dial buttons have to be manually
edited and will be assigned to a user profile.
Assign the speed dial button
●
In the Favourites menu, press the button,
then open the phone book to select a con-
tact as a favourite. If the contact has several
phone numbers, press on the number in the
list.
Edit the speed dial button
●
To edit or delete a favourite contact press
on the icon in the Favourites menu screen.
You can delete one or more favourites.
Call a favourite
●
Press the assigned speed dial button.
Note
Favourites are not updated automatically.
If you change a cont
act's phone number,
you have to reassign the speed dial button.
Connectivity Box
Fig. 160
In the centre console: pad for the mo-
bil
e phone connection.
The Connectivity Box includes different func-
tions that will help t
o use your mobile device.
These are:
●
Wireless Charger
1)
.
»
1)
It only includes the wireless charge functionali-
t
y.
213
Infotainment system
●
Signal amplifier / (Mobil
e Signal Amplifier)
(Wireless Charger)
The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices
with Qi
1)
technology to be charged without a
cable.
To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:
●
Place your mobile device in the middle of
the pad with the screen facing up
›››
Fig. 160
›››
.
Mak
e sure there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone.
The mobile phone will start charging auto-
matically. For further information about
whether your mobile device uses Qi technol-
ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit
the SEAT website.
Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier)
It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehicle
and have better reception.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that
you pair the system and the mobile using
Bluetooth
®
and place it on the Connectivity
Box pad, for the best reception without hav-
ing to handle the mobile phone.
To establish a connection with the vehicle's
external aerial:
●
Place your mobile device in the middle of
the pad with the screen facing up
›››
Fig. 160
›››
.
Mak
e sure there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone.
Your mobile phone will automatically be
ready to make use of the external aerial.
WARNING
Notifications on the screen of the mobile
phone de
vice can distract the driver’s at-
tention and increase the risk of a serious
accident.
●
Place only one suitable mobile phone de-
vice, Qi compatible if applicable. For cor-
rect operation, remove the protective case
and ensure that it has maximum dimen-
sions (width x length) of 80 mm x 140 mm
(3.15 x 5.512 inches). Place on the
Connectivity Box base as per the indica-
tions.
●
If the mobile phone device is not placed
on the base of the Connectivity Box in the
correct position, or if it is larger than the
detailed dimensions, it may not be recog-
nised or charge correctly. Under certain
circumstances, the infotainment system in-
dicat
es that there is a foreign object in the
storage compartment. Using a suitable mo-
bile phone device and correcting its posi-
tion can eliminate the fault.
●
If necessary, remove any objects that
may obstruct the cover's closing function.
WARNING
●
The mobil
e phone may heat up due to the
wireless charging. Think about this before
you pick it up, and take care when removing
it.
●
There must be no metallic or other ob-
jects between the mobile phone and the
housing, to prevent the functionality of the
Connectivity Box from being affected.
Note
●
Y
our mobile device must support the Qi
inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.
●
The charging time and the temperature
vary in accordance with the device used.
●
The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.
●
Qi technology does not allow you to
charge more than one mobile device simul-
taneously.
1)
Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-
bil
e phone wirelessly.
214
Infotainment operation
●
No impr
ovement in reception can be
guaranteed if there is more than one mo-
bile phone on the pad.
●
You are advised to keep the engine run-
ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-
ing.
●
When a telephone with Qi technology is
connected by USB, it will be charged by the
means specified by the manufacturer.
Multimedia
USB por
t
Fig. 161
Centre console: USB port.
Fig. 162 Rear part of the centre console: USB
connect
ors with power outlet function.
The USB port can be found in the storage
compartment ar
ea of the front centre con-
sole
›››
Fig. 161.
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
These USB ports are located at the rear of
the console, between the front seats
›››
Fig. 162.
215
Driving
Driving
St
art and driving
Starting and stopping the
engine
Ignition and start button
Fig. 163 In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: start button.
The engine can be started with a start button
(Pr
ess & Drive). For this there must be a valid
key inside the passenger compartment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off
If you only want to switch on the ignition
(without starting the engine), briefly press the
start button once without pressing the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal
›››
.
The
push-button text flashes
lik
e a heartbeat when the system is ready for
the ignition to be turned on or off.
Automatic ignition disconnection
When the vehicle detects that there is no
driver once the engine has stopped, after a
certain time the ignition is switched off auto-
matically. If at that time the dipped beam
headlights are on, the side lights will stay on
for approx. 30 minutes. The side lights can be
turned off by blocking the vehicle
›››
page 101, or manually
›››
page 119.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on
vehicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is
enough charge in the battery). If the driver
locks the vehicle or manually turns off the
light, the side light goes out.
Switching off the ignition when leaving the
vehicle, with hybrid drive
When the ignition is not switched off in E-
MODE operating mode, a certain amount of
time after the journey is complete it switches
off automatically to prevent draining the 12-
volt vehicle battery.
“My Beat” function
For vehicles with a convenience key there is
the “My Beat” function. This feature provides
an additional indication of the vehicle ignition
system.
When entering the vehicle, the start button
›››
Fig. 163 flashes to draw attention to it.
When the ignition is on/off, the engine start
button flashes. With the ignition is switched
off, the start button goes off after a few sec-
onds.
With the engine running, the start button light
stays on, indicating that the engine is running.
The time elapsed between the moment the
user starts the engine with the start button
and the lighting changes from flashing to
fixed will depend on specific engine size
characteristics. When the start button is used
to stop the engine, the button starts flashing
again.
216
Start and driving
In vehicles with the St
art-Stop system, the
“My Beat” function also offers additional in-
formation:
●
When the engine stops during the Stop
phase, the light of the start button stays on,
as the Start-Stop system remains active even
though the engine is off.
●
When the engine cannot be started again
with the Start-Stop system,
›››
page 223, and
needs to be started manually, the start but-
ton flashes to indicate this situation.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, d
o not
press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due car
e, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
authorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
Note
●
Bef
ore leaving the vehicle, always dis-
connect the ignition and, if appropriate,
take into account the instructions on the
scr
een of the dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the engine off and the ignition on, the
12-volt vehicle battery might be dis-
charged and it might not be possible to
start the engine.
●
In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until
the warning light
›››
page 217 goes off
before starting the engine.
●
If during the STOP phase you press the
button, the ignition is switch-
ed off and the push-butt
on flashes.
●
If the indication is displayed on the in-
strument panel display “Start-Stop system
deactivated: Start the engine manually”;
the
button will flash.
Starting the engine
●
Vehicles with manual transmission: put the
gear l
ever in neutral, press the clutch pedal
and keep it pressed in this position until the
engine starts.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: press
the brake pedal and keep it pressed in this
position until the engine starts.
●
Press the starter button
›››
Fig. 163; do not
press the accelerator. There needs to be a
valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to
start. After starting the engine, the lighting of
the
button remains fixed indicat-
ing that the engine is running.
●
Once the engine starts, release the start-up
butt
on.
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait
for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
perform an emergency start
›››
page 219.
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer
than usual to start on cold days. During pre-
heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To
avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-
heating.
The preheating time depends on the coolant
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
atures above +8°C, the warning lamp will
light up for about one second. This means
that you can start the engine almost immedi-
ately.
Starting a diesel engine after having run
out of fuel
If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run until
completely empty, after refuelling it can last
longer than normal to start the engine, even
up to a minute. This is because the fuel sys-
tem must eliminate air first.
»
217
Driving
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined
spaces, as ther
e is a risk of poisoning.
●
The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-
ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
ness and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
ed. The v
ehicle could then suddenly move
or something strange could happen that
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
pl
ode or cause the engine to run at high
revs. Doing this risks injury.
CAUTION
●
The st
arter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try to restart the engine im-
mediately after switching it off.
●
When the engine is cold, you should
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full
throttle and over-loading the engine, as
this could cause engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the v
ehicle stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Note
●
El
ectrical components with a high power
consumption are switched off temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite
normal, and no cause for concern.
●
When the outside temperature is below
+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some
smoke may appear under the vehicle when
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
●
In vehicles with a natural gas engine
(CNG), by default, the engine starts with
gas, with the exception of the following ca-
ses:
–
Coolant temperature below -15°C.
–
After refuelling CNG.
Turning off the engine
●
Bring the vehicle to a full stop
›
››
.
●
With manual transmission, press the clutch
all the w
ay down. If fitted with an automatic
gearbox, activate the parking lock by press-
ing button P.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Briefly press the start-up button
›››
Fig. 163.
Car wash function (hybrid vehicles)
When the ignition is turned off with gear N ac-
tivated, the vehicle can roll for the next 30 mi-
nutes. After that time, if the vehicle is stopped
the parking lock P activates automatically.
The corresponding warning message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster display one
minute before this happens.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehi-
cl
e is moving. This could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the
engine off. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the
engine is not running. You need more
strength to steer when the engine is switch-
ed off.
●
If the ignition is switched off, the steering
column could be locked, making it impossi-
ble to control the vehicle.
218
Start and driving
WARNING
Always take the key with you when you
l
eave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
they might otherwise be able to start the
engine or use power-operated equipment
(e.g. the electric windows), which could
cause injuries.
CAUTION
●
If the v
ehicle is stopped and the Start-
Stop system switches off the engine, the ig-
nition remains switched on. Make sure that
the ignition is switched off before leaving
the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
discharge.
●
If the engine has been driven at high
speed for a prolonged period of time, it
may overheat when switched off. To avoid
damage, allow the engine to run for ap-
proximately two minutes in neutral before
switching it off.
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator
f
an may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if
the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-
ble that the fan turns itself on once more if
the coolant temperature increases due to
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
partment or due to its prolonged exposure
to solar radiation.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons fr
om driving the vehicle.
In the key there is a chip that automatically
deactivates the electronic immobiliser.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically
activated when the key is outside the vehicle.
If the following message is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle
cannot be started.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-
ed if genuine SEAT k
eys are used.
Emergency starting function
Fig. 164
In the centre console: emergency
st
art.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emer
gency start-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:
●
Immediately after pushing the start button,
place the key in the drink holder of the centre
console
›››
Fig. 164, as close as possible to
the Kessy logo.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
219
Driving
Instructions for the driver on the in-
strument panel displ
ay
Press the clutch
●
This message appears on vehicles with a
manual gearbo
x if the driver tries to start the
engine without having the clutch pedal
pressed. The engine will only start if you press
the clutch pedal.
Press the brake
●
This message appears on vehicles with an
automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start
the engine without having the brake pedal
pressed.
Press the brake to engage a gear
●
This indication is displayed when starting or
st
opping the engine if the automatic trans-
mission selector lever is in position D or R and
the brake pedal is not depressed. The engine
can only be started and stopped in these po-
sitions.
Move the selector lever to P; the
vehicle can move; the doors can only
be locked in P
●
For safety reasons, this driver message ap-
pears and an audible warning sounds if the
parking lock button P is not pressed after
switching off the engine. Press the button P,
otherwise the vehicle could move.
Ignition is switched on
●
This driver message is displayed and a buz-
zer is sounded when the driver door is
opened with the ignition switched on.
Driving with electric drive
Switching on the hybrid drive sys-
tem
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Switching on the hybrid drive activates the
vehicle's propulsion system. When the vehi-
cle’s drive system is switched on, the electric
drive is activated. The combustion engine
starts automatically when the charge level of
the high-voltage battery is not sufficient to
run with the electric drive, or if high drive
power is required.
To access driving with the electric drive in the
infotainment system:
●
> Vehicle > Exterior > Electric
drive.
R
equirements for switching on the drive
system
The drive system can be switched on when
the following conditions are met:
●
The high v
oltage battery has a sufficient
charge level.
●
There is no charging cable plugged in.
●
The temperature of the high-voltage bat-
tery is within the operating range.
●
There is a valid remote control key in the
vehicle.
Switching on the drive system
●
Press the ignition and start button once.
The ignition must be switched on.
●
Press the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
●
Set the gear selector switch to position N or
activate the parking lock P.
●
Press the ignition and start button
›››
Fig. 163 until indicator lamp lights up
on the instrument cluster. Do not press the
accelerator. Release the ignition and start
button when the indicator lamp lights up
on the instrument cluster. The mark on the
power display changes from to .
●
If the indicator lamp does not light up,
cancel and repeat the operation.
●
If the vehicle has been locked with the re-
mote control key, the ignition and start button
is deactivated. If you are inside the vehicle
and have to start the engine, first unlock the
vehicle or perform an emergency start
›››
page 219.
220
Start and driving
Detecting the drive system
With the el
ectric drive, the motor makes no
noticeable noise when the drive system is
switched on or while driving. Therefore, you
cannot defect that the vehicle's drive system
is on by engine noise. Instead, the following
characteristics show that the vehicle is ready
to drive:
●
The power display on the instrument cluster
displays
›››
page 80.
●
The display light on the instrument cluster is
on, regardless of whether the vehicle’s exteri-
or lighting is on.
●
The indicator lamp on the instrument clus-
ter switches on .
●
An audio signal is heard.
Switching on the drive system in very low
outside temperatures
If the outside temperature is very low (ap-
proximately -27°C (-16°F) or lower), the high-
voltage battery may freeze and stop working.
In this case it's not possible to switch on the
drive system.
As soon as the temperature of the high-volt-
age has increase enough, the drive system
can be switched on again.
To ensure that the drive system can be
switched on, even in very low outside temper-
atures, SEAT recommends parking the vehicle
in a place protected from the cold.
Note
A click is heard when the drive system is
t
urned on. This is completely normal and
does not mean there is a problem.
Vehicle sound
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
The electric drive makes much less noise
than a combustion engine. In the versions for
some countries, artificial vehicle sound is
generated to allow the vehicle to be heard
better from the outside. At higher speeds,
when the noise produced by the tyres and
the wind increases, the vehicle's sound auto-
matically fades out.
WARNING
During electric driving, the auditory per-
ception of the v
ehicle by other road users
may be much lower. This is especially true
in traffic-restricted areas and when ma-
noeuvring or reversing. Accident hazard!
Troubleshooting
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Drive: Fault! Stop the vehicle safely
The warning lamp lights up red. There is
a fault in the vehicle’s drive system. The
vehicle's drive system is no longer avail-
abl
e. Park the vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible. Seek professional as-
sistance.
Drive: Fault! The electric drive is not
working properly. Visit a workshop
The warning lamp lights up yellow. There
is a fault in the vehicle’s drive system.
Drive slowly to a specialised workshop
to have the fault repaired.
Drive: Warning! Power is limited.
Check the manual
The warning lamp lights up yellow. Per-
formance limited. The high-voltage bat-
tery may not be sufficiently charged or
may have reached its operating temper-
ature limit, for example in very cold out-
side temperatures.
Vehicle sound: Fault! Pedestrians
cannot hear the vehicle. Visit a work-
shop
The warning lamp lights up yellow. There
is a vehicle sound fault. Drive with utmost
care, as other road users may not be
able to hear the electric vehicle. Go im-
mediately to a specialised workshop to
have the fault repaired.
221
Driving
Operating mode selection
Oper
ating mode selection
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
The vehicle has different operating modes so
that it can always be optimally adjusted to
every situation while driving. Once the drive
system has been turned on, and provided
that all of the operating conditions required
for this purpose have been met, the E-MODE
operating mode is always activated in the
first instance for electric driving.
Operating mode selection
●
Switch on the drive system
›
››
page 220.
●
Press button on the control panel of the
upper centre console.
●
Press the E-Mode or Hybrid function but-
ton in the infotainment system.
Further information about the operating
mode can be found in .
E-MODE (electric driving)
1)
In the E-MODE electric driving mode, the ve-
hicle basically drives in electric only mode. To
the extent possible, the vehicle's combustion
engine is not used.
All of the following conditions must be met for
E-MODE to be activated:
●
The high voltage battery has a sufficient
charge level.
●
The vehicle speed is lower than 130 km/h
(80 mph).
●
The high voltage battery temperature is
above -10°C.
If, while driving in E-MODE mode, the neces-
sary conditions are no longer met, the com-
bustion engine starts and electric driving is
suspended. In this case, the display lights
up on the instrument cluster display.
The combustion engine starts when a kick-
down occurs in E-MODE. However, E-MODE
remains activated.
Hybrid (use the battery's charge)
1)
This is the operating mode that allows you to
save most fuel.
The operating mode control unit tries to make
the most of the battery charge. For this pur-
pose, with active directions the navigation
data are also accessed.
In this operating mode, the electric motor and
the combustion engine share the work of
driving the vehicle.
In hybrid operating mode, the power from the
battery charge is used optimally. If route
guidance is activated, the vehicle may auton-
omously recharge the high-voltage battery
using the combustion engine.
Manual control of the battery charge
Manual control of the battery charge is only
possible in Hybrid operating mode. The op-
tion selected by the user is only valid until the
ignition is switched off or the vehicle is switch-
ed to Hybrid mode or E-MODE.
Press the function button and use the sym-
bols ,
=
and to control the battery charge:
Pressing this symbol selects a higher
theoretical charge level. The vehicle
tries to reach that new theoretical high-
voltage battery charge level while driv-
ing. The vehicle is powered by the com-
bustion engine. If the combustion engine
has “excess” power, it is used to charge
the high-voltage battery. This option in-
creases fuel consumption. SEAT there-
fore recommends using the charging
1)
The displayed symbol varies depending on the
activ
e operating mode and the charge level of
the high-voltage battery.
222
Start and driving
socket to charge the high-voltage bat-
t
ery, whenever possible
›››
page 308 .
The high-voltage battery charge level is
kept at around the current level while
driving. If you accelerate harder or in-
crease the vehicle speed, the combus-
tion engine starts up. When permitted by
the driver’s demand for acceleration and
the vehicle speed, the vehicle switches
back to electric mode.
Pressing this symbol selects a lower the-
oretical charge level. The vehicle only
uses the battery's charge when it is
above the selected theoretical charge
level. The rest is kept until the end of the
journey.
The Intelligent Hybrid App allows the user to
save electrical energy until reaching home
(charging point) with just “one click”. If this
option is not selected, the maximum amount
of electrical energy will be consumed until
the selected destination is reached. If the
user has no active route, the function will offer
the activation of a predictive route and BMA
mode from the widget itself with just one
click.
Show the active operating mode
The operating mode active at any given time
is displayed on the instrument cluster display,
e.g. .
=
WARNING
Switching to a different operating mode
whil
e driving can distract you from traffic
conditions and cause accidents.
Note
Information about the operating mode that
is curr
ently active is displayed on the in-
strument cluster display, along with the
charge level of the high-voltage battery.
Troubleshooting
The E-MODE oper
ating mode is not
available
The indicator lamp lights up in white.
The E-MODE operating mode
(driving in
electric mode) cannot be used temporarily
because one or more conditions are not met.
●
The conditions must be met to use the E-
MODE oper
ating mode
›››
page 222.
Start-Stop system
Control lamps
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active.
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
disconnect
ed.
Instructions for the driver on the instru-
ment panel displ
ay
Start-Stop system deactivated. Start
the engine manually
●
This indication for the driver shows that the
Start-Stop system cannot start the engine
again.
Start-Stop system: Fault! Function
not available
●
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.
Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the
fault repaired.
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
and r
educe CO
2
emissions.
»
223
Driving
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
cally s
witch off when the vehicle stops or is
stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine automatically switches back on
when required.
In this scenario, the light of the
button stays lit.
When the ignition is s
witched on, the Start-
Stop function is automatically activated.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
●
When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put
it into neutral and release the clutch pedal.
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will light up. The engine can be stopped
before stopping completely (approximately 7
km/h).
●
When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
gine will start up again. The warning lamp will
switch off.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Brake until the vehicle has come to a stand-
still, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or
activate the Auto Hold system so that the ve-
hicle remains braked. The engine will switch
off. The warning lamp will appear in the
display. The engine can be stopped before
stopping completely (approximately 7 or 2
km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).
1)
●
When you take your foot off the brake ped-
al the engine will start up again. The warning
lamp will switch off. With the Auto Hold sys-
tem, the engine will not start if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts
when you press the accelerator pedal.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop
mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine has reached operating temper-
ature.
●
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
●
The vehicle must not be on a very steep
slope.
The engine does not turn off for various
reasons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The
engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the re-
quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
●
The temperature selected on the climate
control has not been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 155.
●
Park assist is switched on.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
ing turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
●
In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth
time, the engine will not stop any more.
●
With ESC disabled.
●
After emergency braking or loss of adhe-
sion.
●
With a trailer attached.
●
In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth
time, the vehicle will not stop any more.
●
When the battery charge level is low.
●
While the particle filter is regenerating (die-
sel engines).
1)
In the mHEV version (semi-hybrid), above 20
km/h.
224
Start and driving
is displ
ayed on the instrument cluster
screen; it is also displayed in the driver infor-
mation system, .
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may
be interrupted in the following situations. The
engine restarts by itself without involvement
from the driver.
●
The interior temperature differs from the
temperature selected on the climate control.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 155.
●
The brake has been pressed several times
consecutively.
●
The battery is too low.
●
High power consumption.
●
The vehicle rolls forward or backward with
the engine off.
●
ESC deactivated.
●
The accelerator pedal (automatic trans-
mission), or the clutch (manual transmission)
is pressed.
●
The steering wheel turns slightly (except
mHEV version).
●
When the air conditioning is activated.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
positions D, N and S, as well as in Tiptronic
mode. When the parking lock button P is acti-
vated, the engine will also remain off when
you remove your foot from the brake. In order
to start the engine up again the accelerator
must be pressed, or another gear engaged or
the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-
ped, the engine will start up again.
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
start up again in certain operating conditions
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle
ahead drives off again.
WARNING
●
Ne
ver switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
and steering will not be fully guaranteed.
More force will be needed to turn the steer-
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an
accident and even serious injuries.
●
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched off when working
in the engine compartment
›››
page 226.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be
s
witched off when driving through flooded
areas
›››
page 238.
Note
●
In v
ehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
switch off or not by reducing or increasing
the brake force applied. While the vehicle
remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic
jams with frequent stopping and starting
for example. As soon as strong pressure is
applied to the brake pedal, the engine will
stop.
●
When stopped, the brake pedal must be
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
●
If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
box, it can be directly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
●
With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
placed in position D, N or S after engaging
reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
direction must be reached for the system to
be in a status to stop the engine.
225
Driving
Manually connecting and discon-
necting the St
art-Stop system
Fig. 165
On the Infotainment system screen.:
St
art-Stop system connected. View in the
main menu. View with the Infotainment sys-
tem off.
If you do not want to use the system, you can
disconnect it manually thr
ough the Infotain-
ment system:
●
Select > Assistants > Smart Assistants.
When the symbol appears orange
›››
Fig. 165 the system is activated and will
stop and start. When the symbol appears
in white the system is disconnected.
Note
The system switches on every time the en-
gine is t
urned off voluntarily.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 166 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man-
ual gearbo
x
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbo
x lever
›››
Fig. 166.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
›››
Fig. 166
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
Changing do
wn gears
While driving, changing down a gear must al-
ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
rectly below and when the engine speed is
not too high
›››
. Changing down while by-
passing one or v
arious gears at high speeds
or at high engine speeds can damage the
clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch
pedal remains depressed
›››
.
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
st
art to move as soon as a gear is engaged
and the clutch released. This also happens
if the electronic parking brake is switched
on.
●
Never engage reverse gear when the ve-
hicle is moving.
226
Start and driving
WARNING
If the gear is changed down inappropriate-
ly by sel
ecting a gear that is too low, you
may lose control of the vehicle, causing an
accident and serious injuries.
CAUTION
When travelling at high speeds or at high
engine speeds, sel
ecting a gear that is too
low can cause considerable damage to the
clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-
cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held
and it does not engage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage and avoid premature
w
ear, please observe the following:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure applied by your
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector
forks.
●
Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-
al; although the pressure may seem insig-
nificant, it can cause the premature wear of
the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you
do not need to change gear.
●
Always ensure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped before engaging the re-
verse gear.
●
Always press the clutch to the floor when
changing gears.
●
Ne
ver hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on
hills with the engine on.
Automatic gearbox/DSG au-
t
omatic gearbox
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly contr
olled manual gearbox. Torque be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They
replace the torque converter found on con-
ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-
hicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually
›››
page 228,
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode.
Control lamps
It lights up green
The brake is not pressed.
T
o select a gear range, press the brake pedal.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 167
In the centre console: selector lever.
The selector lever position is shown when the
corr
esponding sign lights up. The engaged
gear is also displayed on the screen on the
manual gearbox positions M, D, S and E
(when the ECO driving profile is selected
›››
page 234).
– Parking lock
When the P button is pressed, the drive
wheels are locked. Only press P when the ve-
hicle is stationary
›››
.
T
o press the P button you must press the
brake pedal simultaneously.
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling
›››
.
»
227
Driving
To engage reverse gear R, you must pr
ess the
brake pedal simultaneously. The reverse
lights switch on when the reverse gear R is
selected and the ignition is on.
– Neutral
In this position, the gear is in neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at
speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
.
– P
ermanent forward drive position
The D/S position enables the gears to be op-
erated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S).
To select Sport mode S, move the lever back-
wards. Pushing the lever again will select nor-
mal mode D. The selected driving mode is
displayed on the instrument panel screen.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the
best gear ratio. This depends on the engine
load, the road speed and the dynamic gear
control programme (DCP).
Sport mode (S) should be selected for a
sporty driving style. This setting makes use of
the engine's maximum power output. When
accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-
ble.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-
tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch
tiptronic mode
›››
page 228, to adapt the
gears to suit the road conditions.
WARNING
●
T
ake care not to press the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-
hicle could start moving immediately (in
some cases even if the parking brake is en-
gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
●
Never move the lever to R position when
driving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident or failure.
●
With the lever in any position , the foot
brake must be pushed down whenever the
engine is running. This is because an auto-
matic gearbox still transmits power even at
idling speed.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your
vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is
engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
●
If the l
ever is moved accidentally to N
when driving, release the accelerator and
let the engine speed drop to idling before
selecting gear range D or S again.
●
If the power supply is interrupted while
the P parking lock is active, it will not be
possible to move the lever. If this should
happen the manual release can be used. In
this case, you should seek professional as-
sist
ance.
Note
●
If a gear has been sel
ected, the vehicle
does not move forwards or back. Proceed
to the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engag-
ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
the gear range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the
required direction, there is a system
malfunction. Seek specialist assistance
and have the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode
Fig. 168 Steering wheel: automatic transmis-
sion l
evers
228
Start and driving
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to
change gears manually.
When you change t
o the Tiptronic pro-
gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
system is not changing gear automatically
due to a traffic situation.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel
paddles
The gear shift paddles can be used when the
selector lever is in the D/S position.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
+
to select a
higher gear
›
››
Fig. 168.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
–
to select a
l
ower gear.
●
To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-
hand gear shirt paddle towards the steering
wheel for approximately 1 second.
To keep Tiptronic mode permanently switch-
ed on, move the selector lever to the S posi-
tion. If the selector lever is in position D and
the gear shift paddles are not operated for
some time, the Tiptronic mode will automati-
cally be switched off.
CAUTION
●
When accel
erating, if a higher gear is not
selected, it will automatically change
shortly before reaching the maximum per-
mitted RPM.
●
Al
so, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-
tem will not change until it detects that the
engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
cally as the v
ehicle moves.
The engine can only be started with the lever
in the N position and the P button must be lit
up (the parking lock remains active).
Driving down hills
Under certain circumstances it may be ad-
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
lect the gear manually according to driving
conditions
›››
.
St
op/Park
To park on flat ground, just press the P button
›››
Fig. 167. On slopes the parking brake
should first be applied and then press the P
button.
If the driver door is opened and the P button
has not been activated, the vehicle could
move. The following warning is displayed on
the instrument panel: Gear change: se-
lector lever in the drive position!.
Additionally, a buzzer will sound.
Stopping on a downhill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,
apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
Do not accel
erate while a range of gears is
engaged to prevent the car from rolling
downhill
›››
.
St
arting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-
tion
●
Once you have engaged a gear, take your
foot off the brake pedal and gently press the
accelerator.
Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold
function
●
Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
●
Once you have engaged a gear, gently
press the accelerator and pull on the elec-
tronic parking brake button.
Back-up programme
If all the positions of the lever are shown over
a light background on the instrument cluster,
there is a system fault and the automatic
gearbox will operate with the backup pro-
gramme. It is still possible to drive the vehicle,
however, at low speeds and within a selected
range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may
not be possible.
»
229
Driving
Parking lock manual release mechanism
If
, in the event of a power failure (e.g. the 12-
volt vehicle battery is drained), the vehicle
must be towed and the parking lock can be
released manually. In this case, you should
seek professional assistance.
Kick-down
The kick-down device provides maximum ac-
celeration when the gear selector lever is in
the positions D, S or in Tiptronic mode.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
to a lower gear, depending on road speed
and engine speed. This takes advantage of
the maximum acceleration of the vehicle
›››
.
The upshift t
o the next higher gear is delayed
until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Selec-
t
or lever positions on page 228.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not
use the brake pedal too often or for long
periods, as the brakes can overheat. This
reduces the braking power, increases the
braking distance or even causes a brake
system fault.
●
If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or
parking brake.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or w
et, the kick-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
could result in skidding.
CAUTION
●
If you st
op the vehicle on a gradient, do
not attempt to stop it from rolling by de-
pressing the accelerator when a gear has
been selected. This could cause overheat-
ing and damage the automatic gearbox.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll with the
lever in position N and the engine off, the
automatic gearbox will be damaged due to
a lack of lubrication.
●
In certain driving situations or traffic con-
ditions, the gears could overheat and be
damaged! If the warning lamp lights up,
stop the vehicle as soon as you can and
wait for the gearbox to cool
›››
page 232.
●
If the gearbox operates with the backup
programme, take the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop and have the fault repaired
without delay.
Launch-control program
The Launch-control programme enables
maximum accel
eration from a standstill.
Condition: the engine must have reached op-
erating temperature and the steering wheel
must not be turned.
The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-
ent on petrol and diesel engines.
To use the Launch-control you must discon-
nect the traction control (TCS) or activate the
ESC Sport mode, using the Infotainment sys-
tem menu: press the function button > As-
sistants > ESC menu. The warning lamp
will remain on.
●
Press the brake pedal with your left foot
and hold it down for at least one second.
●
Set the selector lever to position S or Tip-
tronic, or select the sport driving profile from
the SEAT Drive Profile
›››
page 234.
●
With your right foot, press the accelerator
down to the full throttle or kick-down position.
The engine speed will stabilise at about
3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about
2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
●
Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The
vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
WARNING
●
Al
ways adapt your driving style to the
traffic conditions.
●
Only use the Launch control programme
when road and traffic conditions permit,
and make sure your manner of driving and
accelerating the vehicle does not
230
Start and driving
inconvenience or endanger other road
users.
●
Make sure that the ESC remains switched
on. Pl
ease note that when the TCS and ESC
are deactivated, the wheels may start to
spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk
of accident!
●
After moving off, you should activate the
TCS or deactivate the ESC “sport” mode
again using the Infotainment system: func-
tion button > Assistants.
Note
●
Aft
er using the Launch control pro-
gramme, the temperature in the gearbox
may have increased considerably. In this
case, the programme could be disabled for
several minutes. The programme can be
used again after the cooling phase.
●
Accelerating with the launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
the vehicle. This can result in increased
wear and tear.
downhill assistant
Downhill speed control is activated when the
l
ever is in the D/S position and the brake is
applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-
ed.
The assistant attempts to maintain the speed
at which the vehicle was travelling when the
brake was applied, within logical limits. It may
be necessary to correct the speed by press-
ing the brake.
The assistant can only change down as far
as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep
slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic
mode and thus manually change down to
2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine
braking and take the load off the brake sys-
tem.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as
soon as the road levels out again or you press
the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with a cruise control system
›››
page 242, downhill speed control is acti-
vated when you set a cruising speed.
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the
l
aws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot
be maintained constant in all situations. Al-
ways be prepared to use the brakes!
Inertia mode and inertia discon-
nection
The inertia mode allows you to travel certain
dist
ances without using the accelerator,
which saves fuel.
When driving with the selector lever in posi-
tion D without pressing the accelerator or
brake, the vehicle rolls (coasting). The gears
will automatically disengage and the vehicle
will roll freely, without the effect of the engine
brake.
Activation of the inertia mode
Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less
than 12 % and speeds between 20 and 130
km/h.
●
Gently take your foot off the accelerator.
The indication will be shown on the instru-
ment panel , the engaged gear and cur-
rent consumption will disappear and the
word “Inertia” will be displayed.
While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at
idling speed.
Activating the inertia disconnection
Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less
than 12 % and speeds between 40 and 160
km/h (it is deactivated when the lever is in po-
sition S).
●
Gently take your foot off the accelerator.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
section with less energy) and inertia discon-
nection (= shorter section without the need
for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption
and emission balance. In the inertia
»
231
Driving
disconnection mode, the engine is not only
disconnect
ed but also turns off.
The indications and will be displayed on
the instrument cluster, the selected gear will
disappear, the RPM of the combustion engine
will drop to 0 and the text “coasting” will ap-
pear under current consumption.
Stopping inertia mode
●
Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
To take advantage of the engine's inertia
mode, simply remove your foot from the ac-
celerator.
If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile
›››
page 234, the inertia mode can be activa-
ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In
Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-
ating conditions are met, regardless of the
smoothness with which the foot is removed
from the accelerator.
WARNING
●
If the iner
tia mode has been switched on,
take into account, when approaching an
obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-
ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!
●
When using inertia mode while travelling
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident!
●
If other users drive your vehicle, warn
them about inertia mode.
Note
●
The oper
ation of the inertia mode in com-
bination with hybrid engines (MHEV and
PHEV) can cause the combustion engine to
switch off.
●
The inertia mode will be automatically
disconnected on gradients steeper than
15%.
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Clutch
Clutch overheating! Please stop!
●
The clutch has overheated and could be
damaged. St
op and wait for the gearbox to
cool with the engine idling and press the P
parking lock button. When the warning lamp
and the driver message turn off, go to a spe-
cialised workshop to get the fault repaired. If
they do not turn off, do not continue driving.
Seek specialist assistance.
Faults in the gearbox
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle
and place the lever in the position
P.
●
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve-
hicle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may
continue driving.
●
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving with restrictions.
Reverse gear disabled
●
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving in D until switch-
ing off the engine
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
●
Continue driving at moderate speeds.
When the warning lamp switches off, you can
continue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and en-
gage a gear again.
●
If the warning was caused by the tempera-
ture of the gearbox, this driver message will
be displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
232
Start and driving
Gear-change recommenda-
tion
Sel
ecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instru-
ment panel scr
een, a recommendation is
shown with the gear that should be engaged
to optimise consumption.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, it is
only displayed when driving in Tiptronic
mode
›››
page 228.
No recommendation will appear if the opti-
mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be
displayed.
Display Meaning
Optimum gear.
Changing to a higher gear is rec-
ommended.
Changing to a lower gear is rec-
ommended.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the par
ticulate filter
When the exhaust system detects that the
particulate filter is close to saturation, this
system’s self-cleaning function recommends
the optimal gear for that function
›››
page 325.
WARNING
The gear change recommendation is an
auxiliary function and in no case shoul
d be
a substitute for careful driving.
●
Responsibility for selecting the correct
gear, depending on the circumstances,
rests solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear indication turns off
when the clut
ch pedal is or when the vehi-
cle is no longer in Tiptronic mode.
Steering
Inf
ormation relating to different ve-
hicle processes.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
el
ectronically to the speed of the car, torque
and steering angle.
Even if the power steering fails or the engine
is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
the steering wheel as long as the key remains
in the ignition, but more force must be ap-
plied.
Progressive steering
Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or
may not incorporate a progressive steering
system.
In city traffic you do not need to turn so much
on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.
On the road or on the motorway, progressive
steering transmits, for example, in bends, a
sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-
namic driving sensation.
Control lamp
It lights up red
Faulty steering.
Do not continue driving, st
op the vehicle as soon as
possible and in a safe manner.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired as soon as possible.
»
233
Driving
It lights up yellow
Limited steering operation.
Driv
e carefully to a specialised workshop to have the
steering checked.
If the warning light does not come on again after re-
starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is
not necessary to check the steering.
OR: The 12-v
olt battery was disconnected and re-
connected.
Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).
It flashes yellow
The steering column is jammed.
When st
opped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions.
OR: The st
eering column does not unlock or lock.
Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider the
messages shown on the instrument panel display.
Do not continue driving if the steering column re-
mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek
specialist assistance.
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is s
witched on. It
should go out once the engine is started.
WARNING
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
●
If the warning lamps and the correspond-
ing messages ar
e ignored, the vehicle may
stall in traffic, causing serious damage or
accidents and injuries.
●
St
op the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
SEAT Drive Profiles
Intr
oduction
The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to
choose betw
een the Eco, Normal, Sport and
Individual profiles, which modify the behav-
iour of several vehicle functions, providing dif-
ferent driving experiences.
In models fitted with adaptive chassis control
(DCC)
a Comfort profile is also available.
The Individual profile can be configured ac-
cording to personal preferences. The other
profiles have a fixed configuration.
Description
Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicl
e, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
following functions:
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the engine
responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-
celerator being pressed. When the Eco pro-
file is selected, the Start-stop function is acti-
vated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
gear change timing is changed to put the
changes at higher or lower revolutions. The
Eco profile activates the Inertia function,
thereby reducing consumption. The rest of
the driving profiles will activate the inertia use
function when the selector lever is not in the S
position, depending on how the accelerator
pedal is released
›››
page 231. When the ve-
hicle is turned on again, the function is activa-
ted by default to reduce consumption.
With manual transmission, the Eco profile
changes the gear change recommendations
to facilitate more efficient driving.
Dynamic chassis control (DCC)
The DCC continuously adapts the damping
of the suspension system to the characteris-
tics of the road surface and the driving situa-
tion (speed, acceleration and steering wheel
angle) according to the selected driving pro-
file. The vehicle's dynamic behaviour is also
adapted to improve grip on curves and turn-
ing capacity. Within the Individual profile you
can also adjust the DCC level in a custom-
ised manner.
In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the instrument
screen Fault: shock absorber regula-
tion
234
Start and driving
Steering
The po
wer steering varies its driving modes
and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer-
ing the best behaviour for each situation.
Air conditioning
The Climatronic can operate in Eco mode
with particularly limited consumption.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Depending on the driving profile, the perform-
ance of the ACC varies, to allow more sporty
acceleration and braking or a more respect-
ful fuel consumption.
PreCrash system
The PreCrash system adapts according to
the selected configuration. The Sport driving
profile has specific settings to adapt to driv-
ing characteristics
›››
page 24.
SEAT Drive Profile settings
There are several ways to select a driving
pr
ofile using the infotainment system:
●
Press the function button > Drive Profile,
available profiles will be displayed.
●
OR: Press the function button > Vehicle
settings > SEAT Drive Profile, available pro-
files will be displayed.
●
OR: Press the function button , slide your
finger horizontally across the screen to SEAT
Drive Profile. Press on to change the driv-
ing profile or double press on the icon to show
the available profiles.
●
OR: When the infotainment system is off,
pressing on the SEAT Drive Profile icon dis-
plays the available driving profiles.
The icon of the selected profile is displayed
at all times in the upper central part of the in-
strument panel and on the Infotainment Sys-
tem screen when it is turned off
›››
page 89.
Driving pro-
fil
e
Characteristics
Places the vehicle in a low state
of consumption, f
acilitating a
fuel-saving driving style that is
respectful to the environment.
Convenience
a)
It permits more relaxed and
comf
ortable driving, for example
for long motorway journeys. Its
main characteristic is the soft
suspension setting (DCC).
Normal
Offers a balanced driving experi-
ence
, suitable for everyday use.
Spor
t
Provides a complete dynamic
perf
ormance in the vehicle, ena-
bling the user a more sporty driv-
ing style.
Driving pro-
fil
e
Characteristics
Individual
It allows you to personalise the
configur
ation. The functions that
can be adjusted depend on the
equipment fitted in the vehicle.
a)
Only for models fitted with adaptive chassis control
(DCC).
Kick
-down
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
celeration
›››
page 230.
If the Eco profile has been selected in the
SEAT Drive Profile, and the accelerator is
pressed beyond a hard point, the engine
power is automatically controlled to give
your vehicle maximum acceleration.
WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-
t
ention to all traffic: doing otherwise could
cause an accident.
Note
●
When the engine is s
witched off it will
store the driving profile that was selected
when the ignition was turned off. When re-
started, the engine and the gearbox will
start in their Normal mode. To return the en-
gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-
lect the corresponding driving profile.
»
235
Driving
●
Y
our speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-
fic conditions.
●
The Eco profile is not recommended
when towing a vehicle.
Driving tips
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in
ne
w components.
Running-in the engine
A new engine must be driven through a run-in
period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the
internal friction in the engine is greater than
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it
should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-
cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce
engine wear and increase its useful life. Never
drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
engage a lower gear when the engine works
“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or
600 miles, please note:
●
Do not use full throttle.
●
Do not force the engine above two thirds of
its maximum speed.
●
Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
until reaching the maximum speed and high
engine speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
●
Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
›››
page 345.
●
Information about brakes
›››
page 270.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be incr
eased and the engine oil
consumption reduced.
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and w
ear to the engine, brakes and tyres all
depend largely on driving style. Consumption
can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-
cient driving type. The following section gives
you some tips on lessening the impact on the
environment and reducing your operating
costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT®)
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-
vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
ing situation does not require too much pow-
er. The number of active cylinders can be
seen on the instrument panel display.
›››
page 70.
Foresight when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take
advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-
ever possible, with a gear engaged. This
takes advantage of the engine braking effect,
reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-
sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
Changing gear to save energy
An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
vance to a higher gear.
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
second gear as soon as possible. Choosing
the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the
highest possible gear appropriate for the
driving situation (the engine should continue
functioning with cyclical regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-
ally and without reaching the “kick-down”
position.
236
Start and driving
Avoid driving at high speed
Av
oid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is
automatically reduced. In vehicles without
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
the engine, for example, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long
periods of time. When an engine has reached
operating temperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high during
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel
than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature
in order to minimise fuel consumption and
emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures
›››
page 347 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aero-
dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-
move it when not needed. At speeds of
100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby
generating electricity. This implies that any
increase in power consumption also increa-
ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch
off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices
that use a lot of electricity include the blower
at a high setting, the rear window heating or
the seat heating.
Plug-in hybrid drive: brake early and evenly
to take advantage of energy recovery.
Note
●
If you hav
e the Start-Stop system, it is
recommended that it should not be discon-
nected.
●
It is recommended that you close the
windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (37 mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-
age the clutch plate.
●
Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
»
237
Driving
●
Use the engine br
ake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
fl
ooded roads, take the following into ac-
count:
●
The water should never come above the
l
ower edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, brak-
ing eff
ectiveness can decrease if the brake
discs or pads are damp
›››
page 270.
CAUTION
●
Driving thr
ough flooded areas may dam-
age vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission or electrical system.
●
Whenever driving through water, the
Start-Stop system must be switched off
›››
page 223.
Note
●
Check the depth of the w
ater before en-
tering the flooded zone.
●
Do not st
op in the water, drive in reverse,
or stop the engine.
●
Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-
tion cause waves that could exceed your
vehicle's critical height.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion)
›››
page 358.
Trips abroad
●
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
that l
ead-free petrol is available throughout
the journey
›››
page 320, Fuel types. Seek
information about service station networks
selling unleaded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
not be available or the technical services
may only be able to make limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will provide
information about the technical preparation
that your vehicle requires and also about
necessary maintenance and repair possibili-
ties.
CAUTION
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
age t
o the vehicle due to the use of a lower
quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
Driver assistance systems
Gener
al notes
Safety advice
WARNING
●
R
esponsibility for driving rests with the
driver at all times. The drive assist systems
are not a replacement for driver attention.
Focus all your attention on driving and be
prepared to intervene at all times.
●
Use the drive assist systems only when
conditions allow. The driving style must al-
ways be suitable for the weather, visibility,
road and traffic conditions.
●
In order for drive assist systems to react
correctly, sensors and cameras must oper-
ate without limitations. Please read the
notes on sensors and cameras in this chap-
ter.
Note
●
K
eep in mind the specific rules of each
country, especially when it comes to driv-
ing, formation of an emergency corridor,
braking distance, speed, parking position,
wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-
sponsible for always complying with the
specific regulations of each country.
●
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with
238
Driver assistance systems
adhesives, additional headlights or similar
it
ems, as this could have a negative impact
on the operation of the assistants. If the ve-
hicle is not properly repaired or structural
modifications are made to it, the operation
of the assistants may be affected.
●
The repair and adjustment of sensors and
cameras requires special knowledge and
tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT
dealership for this purpose.
System limits
WARNING
●
Driv
e assist systems can not overcome
the laws of physics. Depending on the cir-
cumstances, a collision may not be avoida-
ble.
●
Warnings, notices and indicator lamps
may not be displayed on time, or may be
displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-
proaches too quickly.
●
Corrective interventions by drive assist
systems (e.g. interventions in the steering
or brakes) may be insufficient or may never
occur, depending on the circumstances. As
a driver, you must be prepared to act at all
times.
Note
●
Due t
o the system's detection limits in the
surroundings, the systems may not give
warnings or intervene on time, or they
might do so even if it is not desired. In addi-
tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly
interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result,
warn the driver in an unexpected manner.
●
When the towing mode is selected, some
assist systems may react with limitations,
in an unusual way or may not be available.
Keep in mind the instructions relating to the
towing mode.
Drive assist sensors and
camer
as
Front radar
Fig. 169
On the front bumper: radar sensors.
Fig. 170 Detection area.
A radar sensor may be fitted to the front
bumper of the v
ehicle
›››
Fig. 169. The front
radar detects any objects in its detection
zone
›››
Fig. 170 and provides support for the
following functions:
●
Front Assist
›››
page 245.
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 249.
The radar can have a range of up to 120m
(400ft) depending on road and weather con-
ditions.
WARNING
The visibility of the radar sensor can be im-
pair
ed by dirt or environmental influences
such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects
etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC
functions may stop working. The instrument
panel displays the following message: No
sensor vision! And the Front Assist
»
239
Driving
unavailable or ACC unavailable warning
lights come on.
●
Clean the sensor area on the bumper as
indicat
ed in
›››
page 359, Cleaning the ex-
terior. When the radar sensor starts cor-
rectly detecting again, the message disap-
pears from the screen and the functions
become available again.
CAUTION
●
If the r
adar sensor is dirty or poorly ad-
justed, the Front Assist system may give un-
necessary warnings and apply the brakes
inappropriately.
●
The operation of the radar can be affec-
ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig-
nal. This may occur, for example, in an en-
closed car park or due to the presence of
metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets
used in road works).
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra-
dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor-
rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC
functions to avoid any damage. If this oc-
curs have it adjusted.
Front camera
Fig. 171
On the windscreen: field of vision of
the L
ane Assist system.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may be fitt
ed with a front camera on the front
windscreen
›››
Fig. 171. This camera detects
lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for
the following functions:
●
Lane Assist
›››
page 257.
●
Travel Assist
›››
page 259.
●
Emergency assist
›››
page 262.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
ems, take the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not co
ver the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
Rear radar
Fig. 172 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
z
ones.
Fig. 173
Sensor detection zones
240
Driver assistance systems
The radar sensors are located on the left and
right of the bumper and ar
e not visible from
the outside
›››
Fig. 172. The sensors monitor
both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-
hicle
›››
Fig. 173.
They support the following functions:
●
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
›››
page 265.
●
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
›››
page 267.
●
Door opening warning (Exit Assist)
›››
page 268.
Automatic deactivation of supported func-
tions
The rear radar sensors deactivate automati-
cally when, among other reasons, one of the
sensors is detected to be permanently cov-
ered. This may be the case if, for example,
there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the
sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the
dash panel display.
CAUTION
●
The r
adar sensors on the rear bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the event of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space. This may result in
the system disconnecting itself, or at least
possibly having its functionality diminished.
●
In or
der to ensure that the radar sensors
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
snow and ice and do not cover it.
●
The rear bumper should only be painted
with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de-
parture warning's functions may be limited
or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
●
The visibility of radar sensors may be af-
fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or
dirt, among others. Clean the area in front
of the sensors.
●
Never use the lane departure warning,
the rear cross traffic alert or the door
opening warning if the radar sensors are
dirty.
Ultrasound sensors
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-
sors t
o perform the following functions:
●
Park Assist
›››
page 279.
●
Parking aid Plus
›››
page 287.
●
Rear parking aid
›››
page 290.
CAUTION
●
Damage t
o the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
modify the orientation of the sensors. This
can affect the parking aid function. Have
the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number pl
ate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or
a loss of visibility for the sensors.
Note
●
In or
der to guarantee good operation,
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
of the Park Assist.
241
Driving
Rear View Camera
Fig. 174
In the rear bumper: location of the re-
v
erse assist camera.
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
when r
everse parking or manoeuvring This
provides support to the following function:
●
Rear View Camera
›››
page 291.
WARNING
Fitting a number plate frame may interfere
with the vie
w shown on the screen, as it
may reduce the camera’s field of vision.
CAUTION
●
In or
der to guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow
or ice, and do not cover them with stickers
or other objects.
●
Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or w
arm water to remove
ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so
could damage the camera.
Cruise control system (CCS)
Intr
oduction
The cruise control system (GRA) helps main-
t
ain a constant speed set by you.
Speed range
The cruise control system is available when
driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap-
prox. 20 km/h (15 mph).
Temporarily switching off the cruise con-
trol
The saved speed can be exceeded at any
time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is
suspended during acceleration and is then
resumed with the saved speed.
Status display
When the cruise control system is switched
on, the instrument cluster display shows the
saved speed and the system status:
It lights up grey
The cruise control system is switched on, but regula-
tion is not activ
e.
It lights up green
The cruise control system is switched on and regula-
tion is activ
e.
If there is no speed saved, the instrument
clust
er display shows instead of speed.
Changing gears
As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed,
regulation is suspended and resumes once
the gear change has been made.
Driving down slopes
Shift into a low gear before descending a
long hill. This makes use of engine braking
and relieves the brakes.
WARNING
If it is impossible to drive with sufficient
br
aking distance and at a constant speed,
using the cruise control system may cause
accidents and serious injuries may occur.
●
Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
242
Driver assistance systems
●
Only use the cruise contr
ol system on
paved roads with a firm surface.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions.
●
After use, always switch off the speed
limiter to prevent the speed being regula-
ted against your wishes.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
weather conditions.
Operating the cruise control
Fig. 175
On the multifunction steering wheel:
butt
ons to operate the speed limiter.
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on.
There is no speed saved and regulation is not
yet operating.
Start regulation
●
When the vehicle is moving, press the but-
ton .
The cruise control system saves and regu-
lates the current speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted:
+ 1 km/h (1 mph)
- 1 km/h (1 mph)
+ 10 km/h (5 mph)
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-
celerating or stopping accelerating.
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button.
The cruise control system resumes the saved
speed and regulates it.
Switching off
●
Press and hold the button .
The cruise control system switches off and
the saved speed is deleted.
Switching off the speed limiter
●
Press the button.
●
Select the speed limiter on the instrument
cluster display.
The cruise control system is switched off.
Troubleshooting
Temporarily switching off the cruise
contr
ol
The control lamp switches on yellow.
●
Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise
control system and take the vehicle to a spe-
cialist workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-
edly
●
If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long
time.
●
The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed
for a long time.
●
No forward gear has been selected.
»
243
Driving
●
A br
ake assistance system has intervened,
e.g. TCS or ESC.
●
Front Assist has braked the vehicle.
●
If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer-
gency Assist and consult a specialised work-
shop.
Speed limiter
Introduction
The speed limited helps the driver not to ex-
ceed a set speed.
Speed r
ange
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a
programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph)
approx. and faster.
By selecting the speed limiter
The speed limitation can be interrupted at
any time by depressing the accelerator ped-
al fully, beyond the point of resistance. As
soon as the saved speed is exceeded, the
green indicator light flashes and an audible
warning signal sounds. The speed is stored.
The limiter is reactivated automatically after
returning to less than the set speed.
Status display
When the speed limiter is switched on, the in-
strument cluster display shows the saved
speed and the system status:
It lights up grey
The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is not
activ
e.
It lights up green
The speed limiter is switched on and active.
Driving down slopes
Shift int
o a low gear before descending a
long hill. This makes use of engine braking
and relieves the brakes.
WARNING
After use, always switch off the speed limit-
er t
o prevent the speed being regulated
against your wishes.
●
The speed limiter does not relieve the
driver of their responsibility to drive at the
appropriate speed. Do not drive at high
speed if not necessary.
●
Using the speed limiter under adverse
weather conditions is dangerous and can
cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,
snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed
limiter when the status of the road and the
weather conditions allow it.
Operating the speed limiter
Fig. 176
On the multifunction steering wheel:
butt
ons to operate the speed limiter.
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on.
It does not take effect yet.
Start regulation
●
When the vehicle is moving, press the but-
ton .
The current speed is saved as a limit speed.
Adjusting the speed
The programmed speed can be set:
+ 1 km/h (1 mph)
- 1 km/h (1 mph)
+ 10 km/h (5 mph)
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
244
Driver assistance systems
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Press the butt
on.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button.
The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve-
hicle is moving at a speed lower than the
saved one.
Switching off
●
Press and hold the button .
The speed limiter switches off and the speed
is deleted.
Switch to cruise control (GRA) or adaptive
cruise control (ACC)
●
Press the button.
●
Observe the corresponding message on
the instrument cluster display.
The speed limiter is switched off.
Troubleshooting
The speed limiter is not active.
The contr
ol lamp switches on yellow.
●
Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiter
and go to a specialist workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-
edly
●
You have switched off the Electronic Stabili-
zation Control (ESC).
●
The brakes have overheated. Wait for the
brakes to cool down and check the operation
again.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
For safety reasons, the speed limiter only
switches off fully whenever the driver stops
pressing the accelerator pedal or switches
the system off manually.
Not possible to start regulation
●
The selected driving profile does not allow
regulation to start. Select another profile and
repeat the procedure.
emergency brake assistance
system (Front Assist)
Introduction
The objective of the system is to prevent
head-on collisions against ob
jects that may
be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-
sequences of such impacts.
The function is designed to avoid collisions
against:
●
Parked vehicles.
●
Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are
travelling in the same lane and direction.
●
Pedestrians and cyclists who transversely
cross the vehicle path.
The Front Assist records the mentioned ob-
jects by means of a camera on the top of the
windscreen and a radar sensor on the front of
the vehicle
›››
page 239.
Depending on several factors and how criti-
cal the situation is, the system operates in a
staggered manner.
First informing the driver, and if there is no or
insufficient reaction, then activating an au-
tonomous emergency braking or an evasive
manoeuvre as indicated by the conditions
that will be discussed in the following points.
The system can be cancelled if the accelera-
tor pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is
turned firmly.
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the Front Assist also includes the following
functions:
●
Pedestrian protection
›››
page 247
●
Cyclist protection
›››
page 247
»
245
Driving
●
Dodge assist
›
››
page 247
●
Turn assist
›››
page 247
WARNING
●
Fr
ont Assist is a driving assistance func-
tion that can never replace the driver’s at-
tention.
●
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
physics or replace the driver in terms of
keeping control of the vehicle and reacting
to a possible emergency situation.
●
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-
tion and try to avoid the collision where ap-
propriate.
Warning levels and brake assist
Fig. 177
On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
ance warning indications.
Front Assist is active between 5 km/h (3 mph)
and 250 km/h (
155 mph). Depending on dif-
ferent conditions (vehicle speed, speed and
type of object recognised, etc.), some of the
stages described below are omitted to opti-
mise the performance of the system.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
driver with this indication on the instrument
panel display .
The timing of the warning varies depending
on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and rela-
tive speed between both.
The safety distance warning is active be-
tween approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) and 250
km/h (155 mph).
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 177.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 2
46.
When Front Assist is connected, the indica-
tions of other functions on the screen may be
hidden.
Critical warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene
in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn
the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
sion.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independ-
ent emergency braking by progressively in-
creasing the braking in accordance with the
criticality of the situation.
Driver emergency braking assistance sys-
tem
If the driver, after the critical warning, starts
braking but the system detects that the brake
is not being applied with sufficient force, the
braking intensity will be increased. This brake
assist only occurs if the pedal is pressed firm-
ly.
WARNING
●
The syst
em cannot prevent a collision,
although it can significantly minimise the
consequences by reducing the speed and
the force of the impact.
●
When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front As-
sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
246
Driver assistance systems
pressing the accelerator or moving the
st
eering wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
until it stops completely. However, the
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
manently. Use the foot brake!
Pedestrian and cyclist recognition
The system recognises pedestrians and cy-
clists who tr
avel in the same lane and direc-
tion and pedestrians and cyclists who trans-
versely cross the vehicle's path.
Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technolo-
gy cannot exceed the physically prescribed
limits and works exclusively within the sys-
tem’s limits. The responsibility for braking al-
ways depends on the driver.
The pedestrian and cyclist recognition can
cause undesired warnings and braking inter-
ventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or a
dirty camera field of vision.
Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at any
time.
The pedestrian and cyclist recognition oper-
ating speed range is lower than that of the
Front Assist.
Dodge assist
Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obsta-
cl
e in critical conditions.
Once the Front Assist has activated a critical
warning, if the driver intends on dodging the
object, the dodge assist will help correct the
trajectory. The driver must start and finish the
manoeuvre, as this is an assistance system
and not an autonomous one.
Front Assist is active between approx. 30
km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph).
Limitations
This system does not react to objects that
cross transversely or to animals. The basic
limitations of the Front Assist must also be
taken into account
›››
page 247.
Turn assist
Turn assist can avoid a collision with a vehicle
appr
oaching in the opposite direction, by
braking the vehicle itself when the intention is
to turn.
This system is active up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
Limitations
The turn-off assist function is available if you
have indicated your intention to turn by acti-
vating the turn signal, you have turned the
steering wheel and the turning path has star-
ted.
It only reacts to vehicles that are in the path
of the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.).
The basic limitations of the Front Assist must
also be taken into account
›››
page 247.
System limitations
Fig. 178 On the instrument panel display: ini-
tial syst
em self-calibration indication.
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Thus, in certain circumstances,
some of the reactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after
switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
»
247
Driving
initial auto-calibration. During this phase, the
instrument panel scr
een will display the fol-
lowing indication
›››
Fig. 178.
Unrecognised objects
●
Vehicles travelling outside the reach of the
sensors at close range from your own vehicle.
●
Vehicles that suddenly change to the lane
on which your vehicle is travelling.
●
Pedestrians that cannot be recognised be-
cause they are partially or totally hidden.
●
Objects such as walls, posts, fences, trees
or garage doors.
●
Loads and accessories of other vehicles
that protrude over the sides, backwards or
over the top.
●
Other vehicles crossing the vehicle’s path.
●
In the case of pedestrians or cyclists stand-
ing or approaching in the opposite direction.
Operating limitations:
In the following situations, the Front Assist
may work late or in an undesirable manner.
The following icon is displayed (in yellow)
in the instrument panel, accompanied by the
message Front Assist with limita-
tions.
●
If the Front Assist or the front camera are
disabled or broken.
●
If the radar sensor or the front camera are
dirty or covered.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
When pressing the accelerator firmly or at
full throttle.
●
If the TCS has been disconnected or the
ESC is activated in Sport
›››
page 277 mode.
●
If the ESC is adjusting or is broken.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of dazzling sun or total darkness.
●
Entrances and exits of tunnels.
●
In complex driving situations (such as traffic
islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), Front
Assist may issue warnings and intervene in
braking in an unnecessary manner.
For more details, see section
›››
page 238.
Manual activation and deactiva-
tion of the function
Fig. 179
On the instrument panel display:
Fr
ont Assist deactivated indication.
Front Assist indicators appear on the instru-
ment panel displ
ay.
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is switched on. At the time of starting the
ignition, the Front Assist may not be available
for a short period of time while the system
starts. During this phase, the instrument panel
screen will display the following indication
›››
Fig. 178.
When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are
the advance warning and the distance warn-
ing functions. SEAT recommends leaving the
Front Assist activated except in the situations
presented in
›››
page 249.
248
Driver assistance systems
Switching the Front Assist on and off
With the ignition s
witched on, the Front Assist
can be deactivated or activated as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 86.
●
OR: using the Infotainment system: press
the function button > Assistants > Smart
Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 93.
When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-
cation
›››
Fig. 179 will be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
Each time the ignition is switched on, the
Front Assist will reappear as active.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The advance warning can be activated or
deactivated in the infotainment system using
the function button > Assistants > Smart
Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 93.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
active.
Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-
tem the advance warning function may be
adapted in the following modes:
●
Advance
●
Medium
●
Delayed
●
Deactivated
SEAT recommends driving with the function in
“Medium” mode.
Switching distance warning on and off
The safety distance warning can be activa-
ted or deactivated in the infotainment system
using the function button > Assistants >
Smart Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 93.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends having the safety dis-
tance warning activated except in the excep-
tions described in section
›››
page 249.
Activate or deactivate the dodge and turn
assistant
The dodge and turn assistance systems can
be activated or deactivated in the infotain-
ment system using the function button >
Assistants > Smart Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 93.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends having the dodge and
turn assistance systems activated except in
the exceptions described in section
›››
page 249.
Deactivating Front Assist temporarily in
the following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist
should be deactivated due to the system's
limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
If the radar sensor or the front camera are
faulty.
●
If the radar sensor or the front camera have
suffered a violent blow.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor or the front camera are
temporarily covered by an accessory.
●
When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
transportation.
●
If the windscreen is damaged in an area
that covers the vision of the front camera.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains
a const
ant speed set by the driver. When
approaching another vehicle in front, the
ACC detects it and adapts the speed
»
249
Driving
automatically, maintaining a distance set
by the driv
er.
Does my vehicle have ACC?
Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration
menu in the infotainment system
›››
page 93
and if it has the ACC function buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 180.
Speed range
ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20
mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).
1)
The ACC can brake vehicle until it stops com-
pletely before a vehicle that stops. If your ve-
hicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, you
should pay attention to gear changes. The
ACC could switch off if the RPM gets too high
or low.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations in-
herent to the system. This means that
the driver will have to control the speed
and distance from other vehicles in cer-
tain situations. In this case, the instru-
ment cluster display will tell you to in-
tervene by applying the brake, and an
audio warning will be played.
Radar sensors
The ACC uses the front radar technology.
Read its maintenance instructions and infor-
mation about its limitations
›››
page 238.
WARNING
The ACC’s technology cannot overcome
the syst
em's inherent limitations or change
the laws of physics. If used negligently or
involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Always be prepared to brake or acceler-
ate.
●
If you press the accelerator pedal the
ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not
brake or request any braking intervention.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or
on roads that are steep, with lots of curves
or slippery.
●
Never use ACC when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads.
●
The system may not react in time to sta-
tionary obstacles (such as a traffic jam
queue), particularly at high speeds. React
soon enough to avoid a hazardous situa-
tion.
●
The system may not react to stopped ve-
hicl
es in the same lane. You must react ear-
ly enough yourself in this case.
●
The system does not react to people, ani-
mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap-
proaching in the opposite direction.
●
If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-
ted, the ACC system could automatically
switch off. Switch off the system when
starting off.
●
Brake immediately if the ACC does not
slow down enough.
●
Brake immediately when a driver inter-
vention instruction is displayed on the in-
strument cluster screen.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involun-
tarily after a driver intervention prompt,
brake the vehicle.
●
The brake pedal may move downwards
during braking. Be careful not to position
your foot under the pedal.
Note
If the ACC does not work as described in
this chapt
er, do not use it until it has been
checked by a specialised workshop. Visit-
ing a SEAT dealership is recommended.
1)
When E-Mode is activated in hybrid vehicles,
the ACC speed r
ange may vary.
250
Driver assistance systems
ACC operation
Fig. 180
On the multifunction steering wheel:
butt
ons to operate the ACC
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The ACC does not regulate anything yet
(standby).
Start regulation
●
To start regulation, press the button
›››
Fig. 180.
The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos-
est speed within the valid range (30-210
km/h), as the cruise speed.
Depending on the driving situation, the fol-
lowing indicator lamps come on:
It lights up green
The ACC is active
a)
.
a)
Only on analogue instrument clusters.
It lights up green
ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.
It lights up green
ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.
When the ACC is in standby, the indicator
l
amps light up in grey.
Setting speed
To program the speed, press the
or
›››
Fig. 180 buttons to the desired speed. The
speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5
mph).
When the ACC is active, the button
can be
pressed to increase the desired speed by 1
km/h (1 mph). You can then press
to de-
crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).
Setting your distance level
The distance can be set to one of five levels,
from very short to very long:
●
Press the button and then the button or
›››
Fig. 180.
●
Alternatively, press the button as many
times as necessary to set the desired dis-
tance.
Keep in mind each country’s regulations on
minimum braking distances.
Suspend regulation (standby)
●
Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.
The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed
and distance are saved.
If the ESC TCS
›››
page 277 is disconnected,
the ACC is automatically suspended.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button.
The ACC regulates to the last speed and dis-
tance setting.
Switching off
●
Press and hold the button . The set speed
is cleared.
Exceeding the speed regulated by the
ACC
While driving with the ACC switched on, the
driver can increase speed by pressing the
accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen-
ded until you release the accelerator pedal
›››
.
»
251
Driving
Set the default distance setting
In the Inf
otainment system, you can pre-se-
lect the distance level when connecting the
ACC from:
●
Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very
long using the Infotainment system: > As-
sistants > Smart Assistants > ACC
›››
page 93.
Changing the driving profile
In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving
profile selected can have an influence on the
ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour
›››
page 234.
In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-
haviour of the ACC can also be affected if
any of the following drive profiles are selec-
ted in the infotainment system in Drive assist.
ACC settings will be the same as those in the
SEAT Drive Profile.
WARNING
Before driving off, check that the road is
cl
ear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an
accident and serious injuries. If necessary,
apply the brake.
CAUTION
If you increase speed using the accelerator
pedal, the ACC may not be abl
e to safely
adjust the speed of the distance due to the
limitations of the system.
●
Be prepared to react if required by the
situation.
Status display
Fig. 181
On the instrument panel display: ACC
activ
e.
Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if
the dist
ance to the vehicle is adjusted.
Selected distance level 2.
1
2
This information can be displayed on the
centr
al panel of the Assists view, or in the left
hand information profile
›››
page 68. If these
views are not selected, it will be automatical-
ly displayed in the lower central part of the
instrument cluster in a simplified manner.
The set speed will be displayed next to the
function status indicator described in
›››
page 251, Start regulation.
Special driving situations
Fig. 182 On the instrument panel display: ACC
activ
e, vehicle detected in an outer lane.
Be aware of the limitations and warnings de-
scribed at the beginning of this chapt
er.
›››
in Introduction on page 250.
252
Driver assistance systems
Avoid undertaking on the right
1)
If a v
ehicle is detected in the left lane that is
travelling at a speed slower than that set by
the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the
comfort limits of the system to avoid passing
it on the right
›››
Fig. 182.
You can cancel this regulation by changing
the set speed or by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Overtaking
When the turn signal is switched on for over-
taking, the ACC reduces the distance from
the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking
manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be
exceeded.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Stop&Go function
The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill
(0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops. With
manual gearboxes you will need to keep the
clutch pedal depressed to allow the car to
come to a complete stop.
The ACC remains active and the message
ACC ready to start is displayed on the in-
strument cluster for a few seconds. You can
extend or reactivate this warning by pressing
the button or, depending on your vehicle’s
equipment, by grabbing the steering wheel.
During this time, the vehicle will move off
again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.
To move off when the message ACC ready
to start is not longer displayed, once the
vehicle in front has moved off:
●
Briefly depress the accelerator pedal (and
gently lift the clutch pedal on vehicles with
manual gearboxes).
●
OR: press the button or on the multi-
function steering wheel (only in vehicles with
automatic gearboxes).
The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the
following cases:
●
If the vehicle stops for several minutes.
●
If a door is opened.
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start is dis-
pl
ayed on the instrument cluster display
and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve-
hicle will move off automatically. In this
case, any obstacles in the road may not be
detected. This may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Always check the road before moving off,
and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if
necessary.
1)
Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left
hand side of the r
oad.
253
Driving
ACC system limitations
Fig. 183
V
ehicle on a bend.
Motorcyclist
ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.
Fig. 184 V
ehicle changing lanes. One ve-
hicle turning and another stationary.
The limits of the ACC system mean that it is
not appr
opriate in all situations
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 250.
SEAT does not r
ecommend using the function
in the following cases
›››
:
●
Heavy rain, snow or fog.
●
When going through tunnels.
●
In sections with roadworks.
●
On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain
r
oads.
●
On off-road routes.
●
In covered car parks.
●
On roads with embedded metal objects
such as train or tram tracks.
●
On roads with loose gravel.
Pay special attention when using ACC in the
following situations:
On curves
The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front
on a curve, or may regulate the distance from
vehicles in other lanes
›››
Fig. 183 .
Vehicles outside the sensor zone
In the following situations the ACC may not
react, or may react slowly or inappropriately:
●
Vehicles that are not aligned while driving
or that are outside the sensor's detection
area, such as motorcycles
›››
Fig. 183
●
Vehicles that move into your lane, a short
distance from your vehicle
›››
Fig. 184 .
●
Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro-
trude from the sides, rear or roof.
Objects that are not detected
The ACC function only detects and reacts to
vehicles moving in the same direction. There-
fore it does not detect:
●
People
●
Animals
254
Driver assistance systems
●
V
ehicles travelling in the opposite direction
or crossing the road.
●
Other stationary obstacles
The ACC may not react to stationary vehi-
cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the
ACC turns or moves over and there is a sta-
tionary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not
react to the second vehicle
›››
Fig. 184 .
WARNING
Using the ACC in the above situations can
cause serious accidents and injuries, and
you coul
d break the law.
Troubleshooting
ACC not available
The indicat
or lamp lights up yellow:
●
The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor-
rectly. Take into account the warnings descri-
bed at the beginning of this chapter
›››
page 239
●
There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the vehi-
cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few
minutes.
●
If the problem persists, consult a special-
ised workshop.
The ACC does not work as expected
●
Make sure that the conditions are met for
the radar sensor to operate properly
›››
page 239.
●
If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-
tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and
check the operation again.
●
Unusual noises during automatic ACC
braking are normal and do not indicate any
anomalies.
The following conditions may lead the
ACC not to react:
●
The accelerator or brake is depressed.
●
No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear
R.
●
The vehicle is reversing.
●
ESC is operating.
●
The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
●
A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty.
●
The RPM is too high or too low.
●
The parking brake is applied.
●
Driving on an excessive slope.
Proactive speed adjustment
Introduction
The proactive speed adjustment adapts the
speed t
o the speed limitations detected and
to the road layout (curves, crossings, round-
abouts, etc.).
Proactive speed adjustment is an additional
function of the ACC
›››
page 249 and uses
the traffic signal detection system
›››
page 76 and the navigation data of the in-
fotainment system.
Proactive speed adjustment is available de-
pending on the equipment, although not in all
countries.
WARNING
The proactive speed adjustment smart
t
echnology cannot overcome the limits im-
posed by the laws of physics and it only
works within the limits of the system. Never
allow the enhanced convenience of this
function induce you to take any risk that
compromises safety. If used negligently or
involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Always adapt your speed to suit visibility,
weather, road and traffic conditions.
●
Always pay attention to traffic and al-
ways keep the vehicle environment in mind.
»
255
Driving
●
Al
ways be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself. If the traffic sign recognition sys-
tem is not working properly or the naviga-
tion data is not updated, the speed may
change unexpectedly and suddenly or may
not be suitable for the current traffic situa-
tion. In addition, the speed adjusted by the
system may not suit your driving style.
●
Always be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself. If you drive without any active gui-
ded route, if you leave the route calculated
by the navigation system or if the position
of the vehicle cannot be determined cor-
rectly because the GPS does not provide
accurate data, the speed may change un-
expectedly and suddenly or may not adapt
to the current traffic situation.
●
Always use up to date navigation data.
●
Always take into account the maximum
permitted speed. In the case of speed limi-
tations that are not included in the naviga-
tion data, the maximum permitted speed
may be exceeded.
Note
Also note the information related to the
ACC r
elevant to safety
›››
page 249.
Limitations of the proactive speed
adjustment
In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig-
nal det
ection system
›››
page 76 and of the
limitations of the ACC, proactive speed ad-
justment has the following limitations inherent
to the system:
●
Proactive speed adjustment only recogni-
ses traffic signals that show a speed limita-
tion. The proactive speed adjustment does
not take into account, above all, the rules on
priority of passage or traffic lights.
●
On roads that are not included in the navi-
gation dat
a, or that are included with little
accuracy, proactive speed adjustment is not
available.
●
If a speed limitation is notified based on the
navigation data without it being detected by
the traffic signal detection system, the indica-
ted speed will be adjusted to the speed that
was saved the last time.
●
Proactive speed adjustment is not available
for speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
Activating the proactive speed ad-
justment
In the infotainment system, in the assist serv-
ices menu, you can individually adjust the
t
ype of incident the vehicle should react to
›››
page 93:
●
Response to road layout.
●
Reaction at permitted speeds.
Driving with the proactive speed
adjustment
●
Connect the ACC
›
››
page 251.
●
Set the distance and speed.
●
Activate the proactive speed adjustment.
As soon as the system recognises a speed
limitation or a relevant road layout during the
route, a warning will appear on the instru-
ment panel display. This warning will indicate
the reason and the speed to which the vehi-
cle will adjust due to said limitation.
Adjustment due to a speed limitation.
Adjustment due to a road layout.
In the event of adjustment due to a speed lim-
itation, the detected speed will be saved as
the new desired speed. In the event of
256
Driver assistance systems
adjustment due to the road layout, the vehi-
cl
e will accelerate again after leaving the
reason for the adjustment behind and the
speed will be adjustment to that which has
been saved.
The speeds indicated for curves depend on
the driving profile
›››
page 234.
Interrupting speed adjustment
●
During the warning, press the button .
●
During the adjustment, press the button .
Adjust the announced speed
The announced speed can only be adjusted
in the event of adjustment due to a speed lim-
itation.
Multifunction steering wheel:
+ 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is
adjusting
- 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is
adjusting
+ 10 km/h (5 mph)
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
If you adjust the indicated speed excessively,
the proactive speed adjustment is interrup-
ted.
+
–
Note
●
When a speed limit
ation is recognised,
the proactive speed adjustment also
adapts the saved speed even if the ACC is
switched off. However, it will not adjust.
●
If the speed of travel considerably ex-
ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf-
fic signal detection system, a relevant
warning is displayed in the instrument pan-
el display.
●
In the event of joining a highway without
speed limitation, the recommended speed
is automatically saved as the desired
speed. If a higher speed has previously
been saved for a motorway without a
speed limit, this is used instead of the rec-
ommended speed.
Troubleshooting
A message is displayed indicating that
pr
oactive speed adjustment is not current-
ly available or not in your country.
●
If this message is displayed for a long time
and proactive speed adjustment is available
in your country, contact a specialised work-
shop.
Note
Depending on the anomaly in question, ad-
ditional inf
ormation may be displayed in
Vehicle status
›››
page 92.
Lane Assist
Intr
oduction
The Lane Assist System helps the driver
st
ay in his/her lane within the physical lim-
its of the system. This function is not suita-
ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle
automatically in the lane.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the Lane Assist system detects the limits (lane
lines) dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is
travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to the
detected lane limits, the system alerts the
driver through a corrective motion of the
steering wheel. The driver can cancel the
steering corrective action at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.
System limits
Use the Lane Assist system only on large,
well-maintained motorways and highways.
The system is not available under the follow-
ing conditions:
●
The driving speed allowed is below approx.
55 km/h (30 mph).
●
The system has not detected any lane
lines.
»
257
Driving
●
On tight bends.
●
Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane As-
sist syst
em cannot change the limits im-
posed by the laws of physics and by the
very nature of the system. Careless or un-
controlled use of the Lane Assist system
may cause accidents and injury. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness or manoeuvres when driving.
●
Always adapt your speed and the dis-
tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-
bility, weather conditions, the condition of
the road and the traffic situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time. The
responsibility of staying in the lane is al-
ways the driver's.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect
all road markings. The road surfaces, road
structures or objects in poor condition can
be incorrectly detected as road markings
under certain circumstances by the Lane
Assist system. Immediately counter any un-
wanted intervention of the system.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary if
the traffic situation permits.
●
In the following situations there may be
undesired interventions of the system or it
may be that the system does not intervene
at all. In these situations, special attention
is r
equired from the driver and, where ap-
propriate, the temporary deactivation of
the lane assist warning system:
–
In very sporty driving situations.
–
In adverse weather conditions and
roads in poor condition.
–
When passing through areas undergo-
ing works.
–
Before gradient changes of grade and
river beds.
●
Always observe the vehicle surroundings
carefully and drive proactively.
●
When the area of vision of the camera
becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
Lane Assist system function can be affec-
ted.
Control lamp
It lights up green
Lane Assist system active and available.
It lights up yellow
The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica-
tion of the st
eering.
OFF
It lights up yellow
Lane Assist system
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
witched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Driving with the Lane Assist System
Fig. 185 On the instrument panel display: indi-
cations of the L
ane Assist System.
Lane line detected. The system inter-
v
enes assisting on the represented side.
1
258
Driver assistance systems
Lane line detected. The system does not
int
ervene.
Switching the lane assist system on or off
In some countries, the Lane Assist System is
always activated when the ignition is switch-
ed on. The connection status is shown in the
Driver assistance menu of the Infotainment
system or the driver assistance systems menu
after pressing the corresponding button. The
Lane Assist system can be activated and de-
activated in these menus.
The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-
tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35
mph) and if it has detected the lane limits
(system status: active). The control lamp
emits a green light. When the system inter-
venes by rectifying the direction, the control
lamp emits a yellow light.
If the control lamp of the instrument panel
display is off, it means that the Lane Assist
system is connected but not ready to inter-
vene or it is disconnected.
When you activate a turn signal, the system
temporarily goes into a passive state in order
to allow manual lane change.
An energetic rotation or rectification of the
steering wheel by the driver causes the sys-
tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.
2
Driver intervention prompt
If the st
eering is not corrected manually, the
system prompts the driver through an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings.
If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the
system switches to a passive state.
Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,
through an indication on the instrument panel
display and acoustic warnings, the driver is
also prompted to drive through the centre of
the lane if the steering correction lasts more
than reasonable.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations may result in a steer-
ing wheel vibration:
●
The lane ceases to be recognised during a
sudden intervention in the direction of the
system.
It is also possible to select steering wheel vi-
bration in the Assistants menu of the infotain-
ment system. In this case, when a vehicle with
Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detec-
ted lane marking, the steering wheel will vi-
brate.
Troubleshooting
Error message, the system disconnects
●
Clean the windscreen.
›
››
page 358
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
System behaviour is different than expec-
ted
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-
ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
er
a.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
●
Do not mount objects on the steering
wheel.
In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe-
cialised workshop.
Driving Assist (Travel Assist)
Introduction
The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines
adaptiv
e cruise control (ACC) and adap-
tive lane guidance. Within the limitations
of the system, the vehicle can maintain a
»
259
Driving
distance from the vehicle in front that is
pr
eselected by the driver and remain in
the preferred position within the lane.
Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.
Therefore, carefully read the information
about the ACC
›››
page 249 and the Lane
Assist
›››
page 257 and take into account the
limitations of the systems and the indications
given in the information.
Speed range
Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap-
prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx.
210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of
the adaptive lane guidance function, be-
tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h
(approx. 155 mph).
Driving with Travel Assist
Travel Assist automatically controls the ac-
celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering.
In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita-
tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be-
hind another that stops and automatically
starts again.
You can override assisted adjustment at all
times.
How to know if the vehicle is fitted with
Travel Assist
The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the
multifunction steering wheel has the button
›››
Fig. 188.
Driver intervention prompt
If you remove your hands from the steering
wheel, after a few seconds the system asks
you to take over the steering with an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings.
WARNING
The Travel Assist smart technology cannot
o
vercome the limits imposed by the laws of
physics and it only works within the limits of
the system. If Travel assist is used negli-
gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
accidents and injuries. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
Bear in mind the system limitations and
the indications regarding the control of the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane
Assist.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
●
Do not use T
ravel Assist offroad or on
roads where the surface is not firm. Travel
Assist has been designed for use on paved
roads only.
●
Travel Assist does not react to people or
animal or vehicles crossing your path or
which approach you head-on in the same
lane.
●
Brake immediately if Travel Assist does
not slow down enough.
●
Brake immediately when a braking mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
●
Brake when, after an indication to brake,
the vehicle rolls without it being desired.
●
Keep your hands on the steering wheel at
all times, to ensure you have control over
the steering at all times. The driver is al-
ways responsible for keeping the vehicle in
its own lane.
●
If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
●
If driver intervention is requested on the
instrument panel display, immediately re-
sume control of the vehicle.
●
Always be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself.
260
Driver assistance systems
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Fig. 186
On the instrument panel display: indi-
cation with activ
e adjustment.
Fig. 187
On the instrument panel display: con-
tr
ol lamps.
Displays on the screen
›
››
Fig. 186
The adaptive lane guidance function is
active.
1
Distance set.
In addition, depending on the equipment,
contr
ol lamps indicate the status of the sys-
tem on the instrument panel display:
›››
Fig. 187
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol and adaptive lane guidance function
are active.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol active and adaptive lane guidance
function passive.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol passive and adaptive lane guidance
function active.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol and adaptive lane guidance function
are passive.
Inactive Travel Assist.
Depending on the equipment, more details
may be displayed on the instrument cluster,
such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the
road.
2
A
B
C
D
E
Operating Travel Assist
Fig. 188
Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: buttons for operating Travel Assist.
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The control lamp will light up green. The
following warning is also displayed on the in-
strument panel screen: The Travel Assist
maintains the current speed and the preset
distance from the vehicle in front. At the same
time, if it detects road markings it keeps the
vehicle in the lane by moving the steering
wheel.
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.
The set distance remains saved.
»
261
Driving
Making other adjustments
F
or all else, Travel Assist is operated like the
ACC
›››
page 251.
Troubleshooting
T
ravel Assist is not available or does
not work as expected
The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-
vant warning is also displayed on the instru-
ment panel screen.
●
There is a fault in the sensors. Check the
causes and solutions described in
›
››
page 239.
●
The system limits are exceeded.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
Take the wheel
The warning lamp comes on white or red, de-
pending on the urgency of the intervention. A
message is also displayed.
●
You released the steering wheel for a few
seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and
take control of the vehicle.
●
The system limits have been reached. Take
hold of the steering wheel and take control of
the vehicle.
Travel Assist disconnects automatically
Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have
released the steering wheel for a long period.
●
Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised
workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-
edly
Vehicles without lane departure warning: You
have turned on the turn signal.
Emergency Assist
How it works
Emergency Assist can detect whether
ther
e is inactivity by the driver and can au-
tomatically keep the car within the lane
and stop it altogether if necessary. This
way the system can actively help avoid an
accident or reduce its consequences.
Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-
sist. Therefore, carefully read the information
about the ACC
›››
page 249 and the Lane
Assist
›››
page 257 and take into account the
limitations of the systems and the indications
given in the information.
If the Emergency Assist detects that the driver
does not perform any activity, it requests that
the driver take control of the vehicle. To do
this, it emits optical and acoustic warnings
and causes braking jolts. The seat belt is
tightened (depending on the equipment). The
system slows down the vehicle and keeps it in
its lane.
You can cancel the adjustment at any time
by moving the steering wheel, over-acceler-
ating or braking.
While the emergency assistant is in operation,
other road users are warned as follows:
●
The hazard warning lights are switched on
soon after.
●
The horn sounds (depending on the speed).
The following happens as soon as the vehicle
stops:
●
All doors are unlocked.
●
The interior lighting comes on.
●
Depending on the features, an emergency
call (eCall) is made.
●
The electronic parking brake and gear shift
position P are engaged.
Connecting and disconnecting
Emergency Assist can be connected and dis-
connected in the infotainment system, in the
assist services menu
›››
page 93.
262
Driver assistance systems
When connected, the Emergency Assist is on-
ly activ
ated if the following requirements are
met:
●
The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are
switched on.
●
The system has detected a road lane mark-
ing on both sides of the vehicle.
Troubleshooting
Emergency Assist not available
The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-
vant warning is also displayed on the instru-
ment panel screen.
●
The field of vision of the camera is dirty.
Clean the windscreen.
●
The visibility of the camera is diminished
due to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter-
gent residue or some coating. Clean the
windscreen.
●
The visibility of the camera is diminished
due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the
area around the camera’s field of vision free.
●
The camera has been altered or damaged,
e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-
screen. Check for visible damage.
●
There is a fault or a defect. Turn the drive
system off and on again.
●
If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer-
gency Assist and consult a specialised work-
shop.
WARNING
The smart technology fitted into the Emer-
gency Assist cannot o
vercome the limits
imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the system. The
driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions.
●
The Emergency Assist cannot always
avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.
●
If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
●
If the radar sensor or the camera are cov-
ered or have been altered or damaged, the
system may intervene on the brakes or on
the direction in an inappropriate manner.
●
The Emergency Assist does not react to
people or animal or vehicles crossing your
path or which approach you head-on in the
same lane.
WARNING
If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-
t
unely, serious accidents and injuries may
occur.
●
If the v
ehicle behaves differently than ex-
pected, interrupt the intervention of the
Emergency Assist by over-accelerating,
braking or moving the steering wheel.
●
Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
●
Aut
omatic interventions by the Emergen-
cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted
by pressing the accelerator or brake or by
moving the wheel.
●
Hazard warning lights that come on auto-
matically can be switched off by pressing
the accelerator or the break, moving the
steering wheel or pressing the hazard
warning light switch.
●
If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may
decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a
complete stop.
●
When the Emergency Assist is activated,
it is only available again after the ignition
has been switched off and back on again.
263
Driving
Lane departure warning
(Side Assist) with r
ear cross
traffic alert (RCTA) and door
opening warning (Exit Assist)
Introduction
The lane departure warning (LCA) helps
det
ect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi-
cle.
The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps
the driver when backing out of a parallel
parking spot and when manoeuvring.
The door opening warning (EWA) alerts
the occupant of a possible danger ap-
proaching from behind when opening or
when any of the vehicle’s doors are open.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the l
ane departure warning (LCA) with rear
cross traffic alert (RCTA) and the door
opening warning included cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. Accidents and severe injury may
occur if the lane departure warning or the
rear cross traffic alert are used negligently
or involuntarily. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and saf
e distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
any time.
●
Pay attention to the indicator lamps that
may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol-
low any instructions they may give.
●
The lane departure warning could react
to any special constructions that might be
present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high
or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-
neous warnings.
●
Never use the lane departure warning on
unpaved roads. The lane departure warn-
ing has been designed for use on paved
roads.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
The control lamps of the lane departure
warning may have limited functionality due
to solar radiation.
Note
If the lane departure warning with rear
cr
oss traffic alert does not work as descri-
bed in this chapter, stop using it and con-
tact a specialised workshop.
Control lamp
Fig. 189
Control lamp of the lane departure
w
arning.
Fig. 190 Control lamp of the lane departure
w
arning.
It lights up
It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is
activ
ated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating
the system.
264
Driver assistance systems
It lights up
It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning
has det
ected a vehicle in the blind spot.
Flashes
A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and
the t
urn signal has been engaged in the direction of
the detected vehicle
›››
.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist
›
››
page 257, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-
pear even though the turn signal has not been en-
gaged (Lane Assist “Plus”
›››
page 265).
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
witched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
If there are no indications from the control
lamp of the lane departure warning, this
means that the lane departure warning has
not detected any other vehicles at the rear
area
›››
.
When the e
xterior lighting is low, the intensity
with which the control lamps come on is dim-
med. The user can modify the intensity of the
control lamps with up to 5 levels in the info-
tainment system menu.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages ar
e ignored when they light up,
the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause
accidents and se
vere injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-
sages.
●
Carry out the necessary operations.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-
r
esponding text messages when they light
up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Lane departure warning (Side As-
sist)
The lane departure warning uses radar sen-
sors t
o monitor the areas behind the vehicle
›››
page 9. The system does this by measur-
ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
and its speed differential. The lane departure
warning will not work at speeds of less than
approx. 15 km/h (9 mph).
The lane width is not detected individually,
but is rather pre-configured in the system.
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
there are any), and can also detect station-
ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an
incorrect indication.
Light indication
The control lamp provides an indication on
the corresponding side regarding the traffic
situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to
be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand
side
›››
Fig. 189 indicates the traffic situation
to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control
lamp of the right-hand side
›››
Fig. 190, indi-
cates the traffic situation to the rear right of
the vehicle.
Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane de-
parture warning free of objects, adhesives or
the likes that may interfere with your visibility.
Lane assist Plus.
The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by
activ
ating the Lane Assist
›››
page 257 and
Side Assist functions. In this case its functions
are expanded as described below.
If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu-
vre in a potential critical situation:
●
The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear-
view mirror even though the turn signal has
not been activated.
●
The steering wheel vibrates to warn the
driver of the risk of collision.
●
torque is applied to correct the steering
and return the vehicle to its lane.
265
Driving
Driving situations
Fig. 191
Schematic representation: P
assing
situation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-
cation of the lane departure warning in the
control lamp on the left side.
Fig. 192
Schematic representation:
Sit
ua-
tion of an overtaking in the centre lane and
then moving into the right-hand lane.
Indica-
tion of the lane departure warning in the con-
trol lamp on the right side.
In the following situations, an indication will
be displ
ayed in the control lamp
›››
Fig. 191
(arrow) or
›››
Fig. 192 (arrow):
●
When being overtaken by another vehicle
›››
Fig. 191
.
●
When passing another vehicle
›››
Fig. 192
with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-
erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-
played.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-
er an indication will be displayed in the con-
trol lamp, because the lane departure warn-
ing takes into account the speed differential
with other vehicles. Thus even though the dis-
tance from the other vehicle is identical, the
indication will appear sooner in some cases
and later in others.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the lane departure warning
may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
ly. I.e. in the following situations:
●
on tight bends;
●
in the case of lanes with different widths;
●
in areas with significant gradient changes;
●
in adverse weather conditions;
●
in the case of special constructions to the
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-
ers.
266
Driver assistance systems
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
Fig. 193
Schematic representation of the rear
cr
oss traffic alert assistant: zone monitored
around the vehicle while leaving a parking
space.
Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear
bumper
›
››
page 239 to monitor the traffic
crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of
a parallel parking space or as it is being man-
oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con-
ditions.
When the system detects a relevant vehicle
on the road that is approaching the rear of
the vehicle
›››
Fig. 193, an acoustic alarm
may sound if the relevance so requires it.
In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is
also informed by means of a visual signal on
infotainment system display. This signal is dis-
played in the form of a red or yellow strip at
the back of the image of the vehicle on the in-
fotainment system screen. This strip displays
the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is
approaching in transverse direction
1)
.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
someone else on the road is approaching the
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not
step on the brake, the system will engage the
brakes automatically.
The parking system helps the driver by auto-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any
damage. The automatic intervention on the
brakes takes place when driving in reverse at
approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting
that the vehicle is stationary, the system
keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.
After automatically braking to reduce dam-
age, the system will not be able to automati-
cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by
stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or
the brake pedal in order to regain control of
the vehicle.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the r
ear cross traffic alert cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. The parking assistant function
should not tempt you into taking any risks.
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
The system should never be used in limi-
ted visibility conditions or complicated
traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when
crossing multiple lanes.
●
Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-
cle's surroundings, since the system often
fails to detect things such as bicycles or
pedestrians.
●
The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
1)
It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped
with a parking syst
em.
267
Driving
Door opening warning (Exit Assist)
Fig. 194
Graphic example
Fig. 195
Door: warning lamp
The door opening warning (Exit Assist) warns
occupants of a possibl
e collision when open-
ing the door when the vehicle is stationary.
The system monitors, within the limits of the
system itself, the rear and side environment of
the vehicle using the rear sensors
›››
page 239. It detects moving objects that
approach from behind, such as cars
›››
Fig. 194.
If a critical situation is detected when the
door is opened, it will be alerted by an acous-
tic signal on the door speaker of the corre-
sponding side
›››
Fig. 195. Additionally, the
control lamp of the lane departure warning of
the corresponding door will flash. If the door
has already been opened and another road
user has been detected in a critical situation,
the control lamp of the lane departure warn-
ing on the corresponding side will light up
permanently.
The brightness of the door opening warning
indication cannot be adjusted.
When you want to access the vehicle for the
first time, with the doors closed and locked,
the function will be available 3 minutes after
the first opening of any of the doors. The
function will continue to be available as long
as the vehicle has the ignition connected and
is not moving.
After switching off the ignition, the function
will remain available for approximately 3 mi-
nutes. After that time, the control lamps will
light up indicating the deactivation of the
function.
WARNING
●
Al
ways pay close attention to the traffic
and the surroundings of the vehicle. The
door opening warning (Exit Assist) cannot
replace the necessary attention to be paid
by the v
ehicle’s occupants. The responsi-
bility for opening the doors and exiting the
vehicle always lies with the occupants of
the same.
●
The door opening warning (Exit Assist)
operates continuously as long as the vehi-
cle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system is
deactivated and the lamps light up briefly.
●
It is possible that the traffic situation is
not interpreted correctly and you cannot
be aware of all the objects that are ap-
proaching, such as pedestrians. Always
visually monitor the traffic and the area
surrounding the vehicle.
WARNING
The door opening warning (Exit Assist) is
sub
ject to system limits and cannot warn of
an imminent collision in all cases:
●
If your vehicle is too deep in the parking
space and the adjacent vehicles hide it.
●
In certain circumstances, objects or peo-
ple who approach, e.g. on a bicycle or
scooter, are not detected.
●
The system does not react to stopped
objects.
Note
●
The door opening w
arning (Exit Assist) is
activated/deactivated in the Driver assis-
tance Menu.
268
Driver assistance systems
●
The brightness of the door opening w
arn-
ing indication cannot be adjusted.
●
The system is not available when driving
with a trailer.
Managing the assist systems
Enabling and disabling the assist systems
Both the Side Assist and Exit Assist can be
s
witched on and off by accessing the Assis-
tants menu in the infotainment system.
Exit Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
can also be found in the Park Assist Settings
menu.
Side Assist and the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) can also be switched off and on in the
instrument cluster Assistants menu
›››
page 72.
Open the Assistants menu in the infotain-
ment system.
●
Side Assist
●
Door opening w
arning
●
R
ear cross traffic alert
Open the Park Assist > Settings menu in the
infotainment system.
●
Door opening w
arning
●
R
ear cross traffic alert
Open the Assist
ants menu on the instrument
cluster
●
Side Assist
●
Rear cross traffic alert
If the verification box on the instrument panel
or the infotainment system is checked , the
functionality will be automatically activated
when switching on the ignition.
When the lane departure warning is ready to
operate, the indications in the control lamps
will turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
Trailer mode
The lane departure warning, the rear cross
traffic alert and the door opening warning will
be automatically deactivated and will be
prevented from reactivating if the factory-
mounted tow hook is electrically connected
to a trailer or other similar device.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
message will appear on the instrument panel
display indicating that the lane departure
warning, the rear cross traffic alert and the
door opening warning are deactivated. Once
the vehicle trailer has been disengaged, the
lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic
alert and the door opening warning will return
to the initial state prior to the moment the
trailer was electrically connected.
If the towing hook is not factory-mounted,
then the lane departure warning, the rear
cross traffic alert and the door opening warn-
ing will have to be deactivated manually
when driving with a trailer.
269
Driving
Braking and parking
Br
aking system
Control lamps
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low
›››
page 335 or fault in the
brake system.
Do not carry on driving!
It lights up red
Electronic parking brake
›
››
page 272.
The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-
leased.
It lights up yellow
Front brake pads worn.
Cont
act a specialised workshop immediately.
WARNING
●
When the ignition is s
witched on, the sta-
tus of the brake system and the brake as-
sist functions is automatically checked.
The control lights on the instrument cluster
light up briefly and then turn off again. If a
warning light stays on permanently, there
is a fault. Seek qualified technical assis-
tance immediately.
●
If the brake warning lamp does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there
is a risk of an accident
›
››
page 335, Brake
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.
Obtain technical assistance.
●
If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. When this function
fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under
certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-
cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-
trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.
●
If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-
panied by a warning message on the in-
strument panel display, please go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to check
the brake pads and to replace them if they
are worn.
Information about the brakes
New brake pads
F
or the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200
miles), new brake pads have not yet reached
their maximum braking capacity, and need to
be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
Avoid overloading the brakes while running
them in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
particular problem in urban traffic and short
stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-
perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be
produced when braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers
activated, the brake pads will briefly touch
the brake discs. This takes place, although
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals
to improve the response time of the brakes
when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for
some distance without using the brakes when
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs
and pads can be removed by gently apply-
ing the brakes a few times.
270
Braking and parking
Corrosion
Ther
e may be a tendency for corrosion to
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly
a few times at a moderately high speed
›››
.
F
ault in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to
the nearest specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more
pressure on the brake pedal and allow for
longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)
The electromechanical brake servo only
works when the ignition is switched on and
optimises the force of the foot by increasing
the pressure that the driver exerts on the
brake pedal.
If the electromechanical brake servo is not
working, the brake pedal must be pressed
harder, as the braking distance increases due
to the lack of assistance from the servo brake.
WARNING
Any anomaly in the brake system can in-
cr
ease the braking distance, with the re-
sulting risk of an accident.
●
New brake pads and discs must be run in
and do not have the correct friction during
the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
on the brake pedal a little harder.
●
If you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking effectiveness may be
decreased.
●
Brakes can overheat if used excessively
on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
change down into a lower gear or range.
Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
the brakes.
●
Gentle continuous braking causes the
brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance will increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Apply the br
akes heavily to clean the
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
there is risk of causing an accident.
●
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
●
If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please read the relevant in-
structions.
CAUTION
●
Ne
ver let the brakes “drag” by leaving
your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-
sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-
sulting in longer stopping distances and
greater wear.
●
Before driving down a long, steep gradi-
ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-
lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes. If you still
have to use the brakes, it is better to brake
firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes
continuously.
»
271
Driving
Note
●
If the br
ake servo is out of action, for ex-
ample when the car is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
●
If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-
cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel
covers, it is important that the flow of air to
the front wheels is not obstructed, other-
wise the brakes can overheat.
Electronic parking brake (EPB)
Fig. 196
In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: electronic parking brake button
The electronic parking brake replaces the
handbr
ake
›››
.
Applying the electronic parking brake
The el
ectronic parking brake can be activa-
ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,
even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-
vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-
cle.
●
Pull and hold the
›››
Fig. 196 button.
●
The parking brake is activated when the
control light of button
›››
Fig. 196 and the
red control lamp on the instrument panel is
always on.
●
Release the button.
Disconnecting the electronic parking
brake
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 196. At the same
time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator pedal
slightly.
●
The control lamp of button
›››
Fig. 196 and
the red control lamp on the instrument
panel go out.
Automatic release of the electronic park-
ing brake upon moving off
The electronic parking brake is automatically
switched off when starting if, after the driver's
door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-
tened, any of the following situations take
place:
●
In vehicles with automatic gearboxes: a
gear is engaged or changed to another and
the accelerator is pressed gently.
●
In vehicles with manual gearboxes: the
clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
off and the accelerator is pressed gently.
●
To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
exceptions that allow the automatic parking
brake to be released without the driver's seat
belt being fastened.
The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously
pulling up the
›››
Fig. 196 switch when
starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon-
nected until the button is released. This
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load
is towed
›››
page 294.
Automatic activation of the electronic
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in-
correctly
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly
if:
●
The selector lever is in the D/S or R or is in
tiptronic mode.
●
AND: the vehicle is stationary.
●
AND: the driver door is open.
272
Braking and parking
Automatic activation of the electronic
parking br
ake when turning the ignition off
In vehicles with manual transmission, the
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
matically when turning the ignition off. This
function can be deactivated through the Info-
tainment system
›››
page 93.
Emergency brake function
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot
brake
›››
.
●
Pull and hold the
›
››
Fig. 196 button in
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
the same time, an acoustic warning can be
heard.
●
To stop the braking process, release the
button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking
br
ake can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Never use the electronic parking brake to
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.
Braking distances can be considerably lon-
ger, since, under certain circumstances,
only the rear wheels brake. Always use the
foot brake.
●
Never accelerate from the engine when a
gear range or a gear is engaged and the
engine is running. The vehicle could move,
even if the electronic parking brake is acti-
v
ated.
●
When the electronic parking brake is
switched on or off, there is a slight move-
ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not to
position your foot under the pedal.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
mo
ving when parking it, first apply the
electronic parking brake and then remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
Note
●
In v
ehicles with a manual gearbox, re-
leasing the clutch and accelerating at the
same time automatically disconnects the
electronic parking brake.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is flat, it will
not be possible to switch off the electronic
parking brake. Use the jump-start
›››
page 53.
●
When the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released, noises may be heard.
●
The system performs automatic and au-
dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-
cle if some time elapses without the elec-
tronic parking brake being used.
Auto Hold Function
Fig. 197
In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: Auto Hold function button.
The Auto Hold
›
››
Fig. 197 button's indicator
lamp remains on while the Auto Hold function
is switched on.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-
sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the
»
273
Driving
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-
er can lift their f
oot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator
pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-
ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's
control light goes out
›››
Fig. 197. The elec-
tronic parking brake connects automatically,
if necessary, to park the vehicle safely
›››
.
Conditions f
or keeping the vehicle station-
ary with the Auto Hold function
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and
off
Press the Auto Hold
›››
button. The control
l
amp on the button goes out when the Auto
Hold function is switched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging
the Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with
the Auto Hold button before switching off the
ignition, the function will remain on the next
time the ignition is switched on.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,
it will automatically remain off next time the
ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function connects automat-
ically if the following conditions are met
(all points must be met at the same time
›››
):
The v
ehicle is kept stationary with the
brake pedal on a flat surface or on a
slope.
The engine rotates “correctly”.
The Auto Hold function is automatically
turned off if the following conditions are
met:
If any of the conditions mentioned on
›››
page 274, Conditions for keeping
the vehicle stationary with the Au-
to Hold function are no longer met.
If the engine is running irregularly or an
anomaly is detected.
If the engine stalls.
Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at the same time.
Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is
pressed
Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres
has only minimal contact with the
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-
tion.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the Aut
o Hold function cannot defy the
laws of physics; it only works within the lim-
its of the system. The greater convenience
provided by the Auto Hold function should
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety.
●
Never leave the vehicle running and with
the Auto Hold function switched on.
●
The Auto Hold function cannot always
keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-
hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on
slippery or frozen surfaces.
Note
Before entering a car wash tunnel, always
s
witch off the Auto Hold function and the
automatic connection of the parking brake
when switching off the ignition
›››
page 273,
since if the electronic parking brake is au-
tomatically connected, this may lead to
damages.
274
Braking and parking
Stabilisation and brake as-
sist
ance systems
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by
the system.
The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the
ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.
Flashes
ESC or TCS activated.
It lights up
TCS switched off manually.
Or: ESC in Sport mode
›››
page 277.
It lights up
ABS faulty or does not work.
WARNING
When the ignition is switched on, the status
of the br
ake system and the brake assist
functions is automatically checked. The
control lights on the instrument cluster
light up briefly and then turn off again. If a
warning light stays on permanently, there
is a fault. Seek qualified technical assis-
t
ance immediately.
Brake assist systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps t
o improve safety. It reduces
the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-
ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
detects critical handling situations, such as
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle
by braking individual wheels or by reducing
the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is
intervening .
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the
traction control system (TCS), electronic dif-
ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control
(XDS) and the tractor-trailer sway mitigation.
ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by
changing the torque.
The TCS can be deactivated when wheel
spin is desirable
›››
page 277.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the
vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
K
eep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
pulsate while the ABS is working.
If the running gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is
automatically boosted if you press the brake
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
ger has passed.
Traction control (TCS)
In the event of the wheels spinning, the TCS
reduces the engine torque to adapt to the
road condition. This helps the car to start
moving, accelerate or climb a gradient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
the spinning wheel and directs the power to
the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
»
275
Driving
again automatically when the brake has
cool
ed down.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control
the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.
When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-
matically brake the towing vehicle within the
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
in all countries
›››
page 299.
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.
This may mean that in certain situations the
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other
hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower
drive torque than it could transmit. This can
cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this
case the front axle, which results in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS can detect and correct this effect
via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the requested
trajectory is much more precise.
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
always active, even when TCS is switched off,
or when the ESC is in Sport mode or discon-
nected.
Multi-collision brake
The multi-collision brake consists of automat-
ic braking activated by the Airbag control
unit. It is activated when, in the event of an
accident, the Airbag control unit detects de-
celerations above the activation level, and
braking is managed by the ESC system.
In the event of an accident, the multi-collision
brake can help the driver by braking to avoid
the risk of skidding during the accident and
causing other collisions.
The following actions control automatic brak-
ing during the accident:
●
When the driver presses the accelerator,
the automatic braking does not take place.
●
When the braking pressure through press-
ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
automatically.
●
Multi-collision braking will not be available
if there is an anomaly in the ESC system.
Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)
With the ignition switched on, the electrome-
chanical brake servo supports the force of
the foot by increasing the pressure that the
driver exerts on the brake pedal. When the
brakes are applied by the driver assist sys-
tems, such as those regulated by the ACC
(adaptive cruise control) or emergency brak-
ing, the brake pedal may move downwards.
After disconnecting the ignition, the assis-
tance of the brake servo is progressively re-
duced. Once stopped, immobilise the vehicle
to prevent it from moving.
Please follow the parking instructions
›››
page 278.
If the electromechanical brake servo does
not work, the red symbol indicating failure
in the brake system appears in the instrument
panel. When braking with the faulty electro-
mechanical brake servo, vibration of the
brake pedal may occur.
If the electromechanical brake servo is not
working, the brake pedal must be pressed
harder, as the braking distance increases due
to the lack of assistance from the servo brake.
276
Braking and parking
Brake blending
1)
The br
ake energy recuperation can generate
a braking effect. This braking effect depends
on the selected driving programme and the
level of charge of the high-voltage battery.
If the braking effect caused by the recupera-
tion is very intense, the vehicle’s brake lights
with turn on. The electric engine, when oper-
ating as an alternator, can generate braking
torque on the front wheels based on the RPM
and the temperature and charge level of the
high-voltage battery.
These variable parameters cause fluctuating
electric decelerations which are hydraulical-
ly compensated according to the driver’s de-
sires. This function is called “brake blending”
and it combines mechanical braking with the
engine brake effect.
WARNING
Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
gr
ound can result in loss of vehicle control
and serious injury to the driver and passen-
gers.
●
The ESC, ABS, TCS, EDS or electronic tor-
que management are not in a position to
overcome the limits imposed by physics.
Always bear this in mind, especially on wet
or slippery roads. If you notice the systems
cutting in, you should reduce your speed
immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not be encour
aged to take
risks by the presence of more safety sys-
tems. If you do, an accident may occur.
●
Please remember that the accident risk
always increases if you drive fast, espe-
cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if
you follow too close behind the vehicle in
front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,
EDS and the electronic torque control sys-
tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
dents!
●
Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).
Despite the control systems, the driven
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of
the vehicle: risk of accident!
Note
●
The ABS and T
CS will only operate cor-
rectly if the four wheels have identical
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyres can cause the system to re-
duce engine power when this is not desired.
●
The regulating processes of the systems
can make noises due to their operation.
●
If the warning lamp or lights up,
there could be a fault
›››
page 87.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle
(for example, to the engine, brake system,
running gear or to the combination of
wheel
s and tyres) may affect the operation
of the ABS, TCS and EDS.
Connecting and disconnecting the
ESC and T
CS
The ESC is switched on automatically when
the engine is st
arted, and only works when
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
EDS and TCS systems.
The TCS function should only be switched off
in situations where traction is insufficient.
Depending on the finishes and versions, it is
possible to only switch off the TCS, or to
switch on the ESC in “Sport” mode.
Switching the TCS off and on
●
The TCS can be turned on or off in the info-
t
ainment system: function button > Assis-
tants > ESC menu
›››
page 93. In vehicles
with a driver information system the corre-
sponding indication will be displayed.
When the TCS is switched off, the indicator
lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
»
1)
Valid for hybrid vehicles
277
Driving
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in
“Spor
t” mode
●
The ECS in “Sport” mode can be turned on
or off in the infotainment system: press the
function button > Assistants > ESC Menu
›››
page 93. In vehicles with a driver informa-
tion system the corresponding indication will
be displayed.
When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-
ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,
and the traction control (TCS) interventions
are limited. In addition, the control lamp
lights up on the instrument panel.
WARNING
The ESC Sport mode should be activated
only when tr
affic conditions and the ability
of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
●
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
function will be limited to allow for a sporti-
er drive. The driving wheels could spin and
the vehicle could skid.
Note
If the TCS is switched off or the Sport mode
is sel
ected, the cruise control is switched
off.
Parking
T
o park the vehicle
When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
ments shoul
d be observed.
Always note the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
●
Park the vehicle on a suitable surface
›››
.
●
Connect the electronic parking brake
›
››
page 272.
●
Automatic transmission: switch on the park-
ing l
ock by pressing button P.
●
Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the
steering lock.
●
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse
gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
●
When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with
you.
Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines
Before switching off the engine, rotate the
steering wheel so that if the vehicle should
move, it will be held by the kerb.
●
On slopes, turn the front wheels so that
they are against the edge of the kerb.
●
Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of
the road.
WARNING
●
Av
oid parking the vehicle where the hot
exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,
spilt fuel or flammable materials.
●
Do not leave passengers inside a closed
vehicle, they may not be able to open
doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the
possibility of a rescue.
●
Children should not be left alone in the
vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-
brake or the gears, which could cause the
vehicle to move without control.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the
vehicle. This can be fatal.
278
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Help with parking and ma-
noeuvring
Assist
ed parking system
(Park Assist)
Introduction
The parking assist system is an additional
function of the P
arkPilot
›››
page 286 and
helps the driver find a suitable parking space
from among the following types:
●
park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-
dicul
ar and parallel spaces,
●
park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-
ular spaces,
●
exit a parking space driving forwards from a
parallel space,
●
park in a suitable space driving forward on
angle partially entering into the selected
parking space. The system will centre the ve-
hicle in said parking space.
In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-
tory infotainment system, the front, rear and
side areas are represented, and the position
of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.
The Park Assist system is subject to certain
limitations inherent to the system and its use
requires special attention by the driver
›››
.
WARNING
The technology used in the park assist sys-
t
em involves a series of limitations inherent
in the actual system and in the use of ultra-
sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Any accidental movement of the vehicle
could result in serious injury.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-
sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at
least correctly, these objects or people
wearing such clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-
ted by external sound sources. In certain
circumstances this may prevent them from
detecting people or objects.
●
The ultrasound sensors may have blind
spots in which obstacles and people are
not detected.
●
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all
times, since the ultrasound sensors do not
detect small children, animals or certain
objects in all situations.
WARNING
Quick turns of the steering wheel when
parking or e
xiting a parking space with
Park Assist can cause serious injury.
●
Do not hold the steering wheel during
manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space
until the system requests it. Doing so disa-
bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-
sulting in the parking being cancelled.
CAUTION
●
In cer
tain circumstances, the ultrasonic
sensors do not detect objects such as trail-
er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,
or an open (or opening) rear lid, which
could damage the vehicle.
●
Retrofitting of certain accessories to the
vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-
fere with the operation of the Park Assist
system and cause damage.
●
The Park Assist system uses as a refer-
ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-
jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels
are not damaged while parking. If necessa-
ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-
noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.
●
The ultrasound sensors on the bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the event of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do
»
279
Driving
not apply it directly unless very briefly and
al
ways from a distance of more than 10 cm.
●
A registration plate or plate holder on the
front with larger than the space for the reg-
istration plate, or a registration plate that is
curved or warped can cause:
–
False detections.
–
The sensors to lose visibility.
–
Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre
or defective parking.
●
If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-
aged, the area corresponding to that group
of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and
cannot be activated until the fault is cor-
rected. However, you can still use the sen-
sors of the other bumper as per usual. If
there is a fault in the system, consult a spe-
cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this.
Note
●
In or
der to guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the
bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do
not cover them with adhesives or other ob-
jects.
●
Certain sources of noise, such as rough
asphalt or paving stones and the noise of
other vehicles can induce the Park Assist
system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-
ings. The presence of metal objects can al-
so affect the manoeuvre.
●
In or
der to become familiar with the sys-
tem and its functions, SEAT recommends
that you practice operating the Park Assist
system in an area where there is not too
much traffic or in a car park.
Description of the parking assist
syst
em
The components of the Park Assist system
ar
e the ultrasonic sensors located in the front
and rear bumpers, the to switch the sys-
tem on and off and the messages on the in-
strument cluster display.
Prerequisites for parking
●
The traction control (TCS) must be switch-
ed on
›
››
page 277.
●
Speed when passing next to the parking
space: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31
mph).
●
Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-
tres when driving past the parking space.
●
Space length (parallel parking): vehicle
length + 0.8 meters.
●
Space width (angle parking): vehicle width
+ 0.8 meters.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4 mph) when parking. The vehicle will per-
form an automatic braking only once if this
speed is exceeded. If you exceed the speed
more than once, the Park Assist system
switches off.
Requirements for leaving the parking
space (only for parallel parking)
●
The traction control (TCS) must be switch-
ed on
›››
page 277.
●
Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5
metres.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.
Prematurely stopping or automatically in-
terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or
exiting a parking space
Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for
parking or exiting a parking space in any of
the following cases:
●
Press button in the infotainment system,
> Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys-
tem.
●
When exceeding a speed of approximately
7 km/h (4 mph) more than once.
●
The driver takes control of the steering
wheel.
●
The parking manoeuvre does not end within
6 minutes from the activation of automatic
steering.
●
There is a fault in the system (the system is
temporarily unavailable).
280
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
The T
CS is disconnected.
●
TCS or ESC intervene with regulation.
●
The driver door is opened.
To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that
none of these things occur and that the
button on the infotainment system is pressed
again.
Special characteristics
The Park Assist system is subject to certain
limitations inherent to the system. For exam-
ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit
a parking space on sharp bends.
While entering or exiting a parking space, a
brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to
change between forward and reverse gears
(depending on the case). In successive ma-
noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to
change gears, at the latest, when the contin-
uous audible signal is given (object present at
a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.
When the Park Assist system turns the steer-
ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-
strument panel also displays the symbol .
Keep the brake pedal depressed while the
symbol remains on the dash panel display to
turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This
way, the system will require fewer manoeu-
vres to complete the parking action.
Trailer mode
The Park Assist system cannot be switched
on if the factory-fitted towing bracket
›››
page 294 is electrically connected to a
trailer.
After changing a wheel
If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops
entering and exiting parking spaces correct-
ly, the circumference of the new wheel may
be different and the system may need to
adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and
takes place during driving. Making turns slow-
ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])
for a few minutes may contribute to this
adaptation process
›››
in Introduction on
page 27
9.
Selecting a parking type
Fig. 198
On the instrument panel display: view
of the parking assist syst
em with reduced view.
Fig. 199 On the Infotainment system screen.:
indication of parking modes.
Park assist has the following 5 parking types:
R
everse parallel parking.
Reverse angle parking.
Forward angle parking.
Reverse parallel parking without driving
past first: “Help me”.
Forward parking in a parking bay without
driving past first.
Selecting a parking type after passing in
front of the space
After activating the Park Assist system and af-
ter detecting a parking space, the display on
the instrument panel proposes a parking
type. The Park Assist system selects the
»
281
Driving
parking type automatically. The selected
t
ype is displayed on the instrument cluster
display
›››
Fig. 198 and on the infotainment
system display.
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met
›››
page 280.
●
Press button in the infotainment system,
> Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys-
tem.
●
When the system is switched on, the sym-
bol on the infotainment system display is
highlighted. Additionally, the selected parking
type is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play. You can change the type of parking on
the infotainment system display.
●
If there are more spaces available, another
space can be selected by clicking on it on
the infotainment system display.
●
Follow the instructions displayed on the in-
strument panel while paying attention to traf-
fic and drive the vehicle past the parking
space.
Reverse parallel parking without driving
past first (type )
With this type of parking , press button
so that the system resolves the parking that
has already been started. The system will on-
ly switch on if sufficient progress has been
made with the manoeuvre (the side sensor
must be able to detect the reference vehicle).
If it is impossible to successfully complete the
manoeuvre that has been started, the system
itself will drive out of the parking space be-
fore starting parking in a similar way to type
.
Special case of driving forwards into a
type parking bay without driving past
first
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met
›››
page 280.
●
Move forward towards the parking space
while paying attention to traffic and stop the
vehicle with the front part partially inside the
parking space.
●
Press button once in the infotainment
system, > Assistants > Parking > Park as-
sist system.
●
When the system is switched on, the sym-
bol on the infotainment system display is
highlighted. Additionally, the selected parking
mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play without reduced display.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
9.
282
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Parking with the parking assist system
Fig. 200 On the instrument panel display: paral-
l
el parking. Finding a parking space. Park-
ing position. Manoeuvring.
Fig. 201 On the instrument panel display: angle
parking. Finding a parking space
. Parking
position. Manoeuvring.
Message to move forwards
Y
our vehicle
Parking space detected
Message to park
Message to press the brake pedal
Progress bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
The necessary conditions have to be met to
park with P
ark Assist
›››
page 280 and the
parking mode must be selected
›››
page 281.
Parking
●
Look at the display on the instrument panel
to see if the space has been detected as “ap-
propriate” and if the correct position for park-
ing has been reached
›››
Fig. 200
or
›››
Fig. 201 . The space is considered
“appropriate” if the display on the instrument
panel shows the message to park
4
.
●
Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,
engage r
everse gear, or press the button in
the infotainment system, > Assistants >
Parking > Park assist system.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
9.
»
283
Driving
●
Pl
ease note the following message: Inter-
vention in active direction. Watch
your surroundings!. While you keep watch
around you, carefully start accelerating up to
no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During the
parking manoeuvre, the system only takes
charge of the steering. You, as the driver,
have to accelerate, engage the clutch if
necessary, change gears and brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-
nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to
move forward appears on the instrument
panel display
›››
Fig. 200 or
›››
Fig. 201 ;
OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish-
ed message appears on the instrument panel
display. The progress bar
6
indicates the
dist
ance to cover
›››
page 284.
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking as-
sist system completes the steering wheel
turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the
instrument panel screen.
●
Select first gear.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers
the vehicle forward and back until it centres it
in the space
›››
Fig. 200 or
›››
Fig. 201 .
●
For best results, wait at the end of each
manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has
finished turning the steering wheel. The park-
ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding
message is displayed on the instrument pan-
el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal
sounds.
Progress bars
The progress bar
›››
Fig. 200
6
and
›
››
Fig. 201
6
on the
scr
een of the instrument panel displays the
relative distance to be covered. The greater
the distance, the fuller the progress bar.
When driving forward, the content of the pro-
gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-
versing, it decreases downwards.
Note
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely
during parking, the r
esult may not be the
best.
Leaving a parking space with the
parking assist syst
em (only for par-
allel parking)
Fig. 202
On the instrument panel display: exit
a par
allel parking space.
Your vehicle in reverse gear
Message giving the pr
oposed manoeuvre
to exit the parking space
Progress bar to indicate the distance left
to cover
Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)
The necessary conditions to exit a parking
space with Park Assist have to be met
›››
page 280.
●
Press button in the infotainment system,
> Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys-
tem. When the system is switched on, the
symbol on the infotainment system display
is highlighted.
1
2
3
284
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
T
urn on the corresponding turn signal to-
wards the road you will enter when exiting the
parking space.
●
Engage the reverse gear, or press the but-
ton in the infotainment system.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
9. Please note the fol-
lowing message: Intervention in active
steering. Watch your surroundings!.
While you keep watch around you, carefully
start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h
(4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the
system only takes charge of the steering.
You, as the driver, have to accelerate, en-
gage the clutch if necessary, change
gears and brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-
nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument
panel display shows the forward indication.
The progress bar
›››
Fig. 202
3
indicates the
dist
ance to cover
›››
page 284.
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking as-
sist system completes the steering wheel
turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the
symbol goes out on the instrument panel
screen.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers
the vehicle forward and back until it can exit
the space.
●
The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-
responding message is displayed on the in-
strument panel and, in some cases, an
acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the
steering with the turning angle set by the Park
Assist system.
●
Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park-
ing space.
Automatic operation of the brakes
by the parking assist system
Park Assist helps the driver by automatically
br
aking in certain situations.
The driver is always responsible for braking in
time
›››
.
Aut
omatic braking intervention to avoid
exceeding the speed limit
To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-
prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving
a parking space, the brakes may activate au-
tomatically. After automatically activating
the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a
parking space may continue.
The brakes are only automatically activated
once for each attempt to enter or exit a park-
ing space. If the speed of approximately
7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-
sponding operation is halted.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
Depending on certain conditions, the Park
Assist system can automatically brake the
vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly
actioning and holding down the brake ped-
al
›››
. Following this the driver must press
the br
ake pedal.
Automatic braking intervention to reduce
damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-
ishing.
WARNING
The automatic braking intervention by Park
Assist shoul
d never tempt you to take any
risk that may compromise safety. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness.
●
The Park Assist system is subject to cer-
tain limitations inherent to the system. In
certain situations, the automatic braking
intervention may only work in a limited way
or not work at all.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes your-
self!
●
The automatic braking intervention will
end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-
wards, brake the vehicle yourself.
285
Driving
Parking aid parking and ma-
noeuvring (P
arkPilot)
Introduction
These assist systems help you when parking
and manoeuvring:
–
Plus Parking Aid
›
››
page 287. It is an as-
sist system that provides a visual and audio
warning of obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle .
–
Rear Parking Aid
›
››
page 290. This is an
assistant that gives an audio warning of ob-
jects detected behind the vehicle.
WARNING
●
Al
ways pay attention, by looking directly,
to traffic and the area around the vehicle.
Assistance systems are not a replacement
for driver awareness. Responsibility always
lies with the driver.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not detected. Pay
special attention to children and animals.
●
Always keep visual control of the sur-
roundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
CAUTION
Parking distance warning system functions
can be aff
ected by different factors that
can cause damage:
●
Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,
posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the
sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
der snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-
sors' signals. The system cannot detect
these objects or people wearing such
clothes correctly.
●
Sensor signals may be affected by exter-
nal sound sources. This may prevent them
from detecting people or objects.
●
If the system warns you of the proximity
of a low obstacle, please note that after
being detected by the system, the obstacle
in question may disappear from the meas-
urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-
er, and the system will no longer warn of its
presence. In certain circumstances, ob-
jects such as high kerbs that could damage
the underside of the vehicle are not detec-
ted.
●
If the parking dist
ance warning system is
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-
ble damage.
●
Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
modify the orientation of the sensors. This
can affect the parking aid function. Have
the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or
a loss of visibility for the sensors.
Note
●
The displ
ay on the Infotainment system
screen shows a slight time delay.
●
In certain situations, the system can give
a warning even though there is no obstacle
in the detected area:
–
Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces
with long grass.
–
External ultrasound sources, such as
other vehicles equipped with ultra-
sound systems.
–
Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex-
haust gases.
–
If the number plate is not properly se-
cured to the surface of the bumper.
–
Gradient changes.
286
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
In or
der to guarantee good operation,
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
of the Park Assist.
●
We recommend that you practice park-
ing in an area without traffic.
●
The volume and tone of the signals and
indications can be changed
›››
page 290.
●
In vehicles without an infotainment sys-
tem, these parameters can be changed at
a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
workshop.
●
Please observe information on towing a
trailer
›››
page 291.
Parking System Plus
Description
Fig. 203
Parking aid view on the Infotainment
syst
em display.
Parking aid plus assists the driv
er by giving
visual and audio warnings about obstacles
detected in front of and behind the vehicle.
The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an
obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible
signals and in the Infotainment system
›››
Fig. 203.
When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-
ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-
hicle or behind it by choosing different
sounds.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
A
0.60 m
1.
60 m
0.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency
of the audible signals will increase. The signal
will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop!
If the separation is maintained, the warning
volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.
Parking Aid operation
Manually connecting and disconnecting
the parking aid
●
Press the function button > Assist
ants >
Parking > Park distance control.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: if you drive forward at a speed of less
than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an
obstacle, it is detected when it is optically ap-
prox. less than 95 cm. away, or acoustically
approx. 50 cm. away. If the automatic con-
nection is activated, a reduced display is
shown.
●
OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-
tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx
depending on whether or not an obstacle is
detected)
»
B
C
D
287
Driving
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
●
OR: pr
ess the P parking lock button on vehi-
cles with automatic transmission.
Temporary suppression of sound in Park-
ing Aid
●
Press the function button.
●
OR: activate the electronic parking brake.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle is
equipped with a reversing camera.
●
OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.
●
OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-
tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx
depending on whether or not an obstacle is
detected).
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”)
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: press the RVC
1)
button on the infotain-
ment system display.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up when the sys-
tem is switched on.
Automatic activation
When the Plus P
arking Aid connects auto-
matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the
segments will appear on screen. This function
will be available unless the user has deacti-
vated it.
It only operates every time the speed is re-
duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first
time.
If disabled using the button in the infotain-
ment system ( > Assistants > Parking >
Park distance control) to be automatically
activated again, one of the following actions
must be taken:
●
Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
●
OR: driv
e forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)
approx.
●
OR: activate or deactivate the parking lock
button P
●
OR: switch the automatic activation on and
off in the Infotainment system.
Automatic activation of the park assist can be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem
›››
page 93:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the function button > Assistants >
Parking > Park distance control.
●
Select Automatic activation. If the box is
checked , the function will be switched on.
If activated automatically, an audible sound
warning will only be given when obstacles in
front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-
prox.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking
Aid only w
orks when you are driving slowly.
If driving style is not adapted to the circum-
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
1)
The RVC button will only be displayed when re-
v
erse gear is engaged.
288
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Visual indication segments
Fig. 204
Parking aid view on the Infotainment
syst
em display.
The optical indication of the segments works
as f
ollows:
White and segments: the obstacle is
more than approx. 30 cm away from the
path or in the direction opposite to trav-
el. They are also displayed when the
electronic parking brake is activated.
Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on
the vehicle’s path and are at a distance
of less than approx. 30 cm away.
Red segments: obstacles are less than
approx. 30 cm away.
A wake will indicate the anticipated forward
or backward trajectory, depending on the en-
gaged gear.
–
–
–
If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,
the corresponding audible warning will
sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In
the collision zone, the obstacles are repre-
sented in red (including those out of the
path). Stop the vehicle!
›››
in Introduction
on page 286,
›
››
in Introduction on
page 286 !
Setting the indications and audio
signal
s
The indications and acoustic signals are set
in the Inf
otainment system: function button
> Assistants > Parking > Park distance con-
trol:
Setup
Automatic activa-
tion
On/off
Front volume
Volume in the front and rear
area.
Rear volume Volume in the rear area.
Adjust volume
When the parking aid is
s
witched on, the volume of
the audio source will be re-
duced, depending on the se-
lected option.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message appears on the
instrument clust
er in Park Assist, there is a
fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated
next time the parking aid is connected.
If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in
the areas
A
and
B
are displayed
›
››
Fig. 203. If a front sensor is faulty, only the
obstacles in the areas
C
and
D
will be dis-
pl
ayed. Symbol is displayed.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-
alised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Trailer mode
On vehicles with a factory-mounted trailer
hook
, when the trailer is connected, the rear
sensors will not activate when reverse gear is
engaged or button is pressed in the Info-
tainment system ( > Assistants > Parking >
Park distance control). Therefore, any ob-
jects behind or to the side of the vehicle will
not be indicated on the screen and no audio
signals will sound.
The screen will only display objects detected
at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will
be hidden.
289
Driving
Manoeuvre braking function
The emergency braking function is used to
minimise damage in the e
vent of a collision.
Depending on the equipment, if the Parking
Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring
function activates emergency braking when it
detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that
could cause a collision, driving forwards or in
reverse.
The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is
activated automatically. For the system to
operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-
tween 2.5-7 km/h (1.5-4 mph) for the front
area and between 1.5-7 km/h (1-4 mph) for
the rear.
Following an intervention, the braking while
manoeuvring function will be inactive in the
same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once
the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s
position is changed, the function will be ac-
tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.
The braking while manoeuvring function is set
in the Infotainment system: function button
> Assistants > Parking > Park distance con-
trol.
Temporary suppression of emergency
braking
●
When the function is deactivated with the
Br
aking while manoeuvring button that ap-
pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info-
tainment system.
●
Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or
bonnet are opened.
Rear parking aid
Description
The r
ear parking aid is an optical and audi-
ble assistant that warns of obstacles located
behind the vehicle.
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you
are alerted by audible and visible warnings
on the Infotainment system.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and
the like, as this could affect the system's op-
eration. Cleaning instructions
›››
page 359.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
●
Side area: 0.60 m
●
Central area: 1.60 m
As you appr
oach the obstacle, the frequency
of the audible signals will increase. The signal
will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop!
›››
in Introduction on page 286,
›
››
in Introduction on page 286!
If the separation is maintained, the warning
v
olume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.
Parking Aid connection
●
Select reverse gear.
Parking Aid disconnection
●
Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
●
OR: set the selector lever or N or D, or press
the parking lock button P on vehicles with au-
tomatic transmission.
Setting the indications and audio signals
The indications and acoustic signals are set
in the Infotainment system: function button
> Assistants > Parking > Parking assistant.
Settings
Rear volume Volume in the rear area.
Adjust volume
When the parking aid is
switched on, the volume of
the audio source will be re-
duced, depending on the se-
lected option.
Error messages
If a an err
or or fault message appears on the
instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a
fault.
290
Help with parking and manoeuvring
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicat
ed
next time the parking aid is connected.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-
alised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Towing device
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory, when the trailer is
connected, the parking aid will not be activa-
ted when reverse gear is engaged.
Reverse Assist (Rear View
Camera)
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The r
everse assist does not make it possi-
ble to precisely calculate the distance from
obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-
tem's own limits, hence its negligent use
may cause serious accidents and injuries if
used without due care. The driver should be
aware of his/her surroundings at all times
to ensure safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts
the field of view and displays the objects
on the screen in a way that is different from
reality. Distance perception is also distor-
t
ed.
●
Due to the screen resolution or light con-
ditions, some items may be blurry or not
displayed at all. Take care with thin posts,
fences, railings or trees that might not be
seen on the screen and could damage the
vehicle.
●
The reverse assist has blind spots where
it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the
vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
●
The system is not a replacement for driv-
er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-
noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area
at all times.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images are only two-dimensional.
Protruding objects or holes in the road, for
example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation
of the guide lines. The width represented
by the lines decreases with vehicle load.
Pay special attention to the surroundings
when the inside of the vehicle of the lug-
gage compartment are loaded.
●
In the following situations, objects or oth-
er vehicles appear to be further away or
closer than they actually are. Pay special
attention:
–
If moving from a flat surface to a slope
and vice-versa.
–
If the v
ehicle is heavily loaded.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or
that protrude from it. These objects
may be outside the camera angle when
reversing.
Note
●
It is impor
tant to take great care and pay
special attention if the driver is not familiar
with the system.
●
The reverse assist reference lines disap-
pear when the rear lid is open.
Introduction
A camera fitted to the rear bumper assists the
driv
er when parking or driving in reverse
›››
page 242.
The camera image is viewed together with
orientation lines projected on the Infotain-
ment system screen. Part of the bumper can
be seen at the bottom, which can be used by
the driver as a reference point.
Reverse assist modes
Depending on the equipment, the following
modes are available:
●
Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic-
ular to the road.
»
291
Driving
●
Assist
ance function for hitching a trailer:
helps to hitch a trailer.
●
Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans-
verse direction.
Connecting and disconnecting
Connect the reverse assist
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: in the inf
otainment system select >
Assistants > Parking > Park distance con-
trol.
Disconnect the reverse assist
Drive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
Shown on the display
The system’s functions and representations
may v
ary depending on the equipment.
The assistant's image view changes when the
factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con-
nected to a trailer
›››
page 300.
Reverse assist functions and symbols
When the reverse assist is connected, you
can make adjustments using the function but-
tons. Some adjustments are equipment-de-
pendent.
Exit the current display
Switch to angle parking
›››
page 293
Switch to the trailer hitching assistance
function
Switch to cross traffic
Adjust the display: brightness, contrast
and colour.
Switch to park assist
›››
page 286
Display/hide the parking aid view
Guide lines
Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehi-
cle.
Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the
steering angle.
Assistance function for hitching a trailer
On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, this function can be used to move the
vehicle close to a tow bar.
Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment
system.
Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. The
distance between the lines is approx. 0.25 m
Orange line: precalculated direction of the
tow hitch depending on steering wheel rota-
tion.
|
Cross traffic
This visualization helps to monitor traffic be-
hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam-
ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits.
Requirements
To park with reverse assist, the following re-
quir
ements must be met:
●
Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h
(9 mph).
●
Parking space width: v
ehicle width +
0.15 m (without counting the mirrors).
To display a real image, the following require-
ments must be met:
●
The luggage compartment rear door is
closed.
●
The surroundings are on a flat surface.
●
The vehicle should not be loaded very
heavily at the rear.
292
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Parallel parking
Fig. 205 Display on the Infotainment system
scr
een.: parking with reverse assist.
Key to the Fig. 205:
Finding a parking space
Go t
o the selected parking space
Centre the vehicle inside the parking
space
Road
Parking space
Lateral boundary of the parking space
Rear boundary of the parking space
1
2
3
4
Parking
●
In the infotainment system select > As-
sist
ants > Parking > Park distance control
before passing in front of the selected park-
ing space.
●
With reverse assist connected and in work-
ing order, press the function button .
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space
›››
Fig. 205
2
.
●
Reverse while turning the steering wheel so
that the yell
ow lines enter the parking space.
The green and yellow lines must match the
side boundary lines
3
.
●
Stop the vehicle when the red line has
r
eached the rear boundary
4
.
Troubleshooting
The system behaves differently than ex-
pect
ed
There can be several causes:
●
The camera is dirty
›››
page 359. In addi-
tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be
reduced by detergent residue or any type of
coating.
●
The system requirements must be met
›››
page 292.
●
The camera is covered with water.
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket must not
be electrically connected to a trailer
›››
page 300.
●
The vehicle has some type of damage in
the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-
pact.
●
The field of view of the camera is blocked
by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys-
tem.
●
Changes have been made to the paint in
the camera area, or structural modifications
have been made to a component such as the
running gear.
Camera with no visibility, fault message,
the system disconnects
●
Clean the camera or remove possible ad-
hesives or accessories from it
›››
page 359.
●
Check for visible damage.
Possible solution
●
Temporarily disconnect the system.
●
Check if one of the causes indicated above
has occurred.
●
Once the source of the problem has been
eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
●
If the system still behaves unpredictably,
have it checked by a specialised workshop.
293
Driving
Towing bracket device
T
railer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regula-
tions about driving with a tr
ailer and the use
of a towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for
carrying people, although it can also be used
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding
technical equipment. This additional load has
an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption
and vehicle performance and in some cases
can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
the vehicle, and thus more concentration
from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both
the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted on the coupling device
The maximum technical permitted vertical
load of the trailer's towing bracket on the
hook of the tow-bar is 80 kg.
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No
special char
acteristics need to be taken into
account.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-
nected by pressing the corresponding button
in the lower part of the centre console before
driving with the trailer, and it should remain
off for the rest of the journey
›››
.
V
ehicles with driving profile selection
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use
of the Eco driving profile is not recommen-
ded. You are advised to select another of the
available driving profiles before beginning to
drive with a trailer.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb
correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-
gine performance and the ability to climb
slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
bination must be reduced by 10% for every
1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate
the trailer with the maximum authorised
drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
it.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people,
since it w
ould put their life in danger and is
also prohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a
perf
ect state of repair and is properly se-
cured.
●
Never modify or repair the towing bracket
in any way.
●
In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the event of rear-end collisions and to
avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
when parking the vehicle, cover or remove
the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
er.
●
Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
distribution” or “load compensation”. The
vehicle has not been designed for this type
of towing bracket. The towing bracket
could fail and the trailer could be released
from the vehicle.
294
Towing bracket device
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or l
arge objects can affect driving
properties and even cause an accident.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to overturn than those with a
low one.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking.
●
Reduce speed immediately if you notice
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never drive at more than 80 km/h
(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more
than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-
cumstances). This also applies in countries
where driving at higher speeds is permit-
ted. Take into account the speed limit for
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
country, as it could be less than the speed
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted
by a non-SEAT w
orkshop, the Start-Stop
system must be disconnected manually
whene
ver driving with a trailer. Otherwise
the brake system could be damaged and
could consequently cause a serious acci-
dent or injury.
●
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
Note
●
Bef
ore hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-
ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm
›››
page 99. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
cause the alarm to go off.
●
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
first 1000 km
›››
page 236.
●
If a removable and retractable tow hook
is fitted, it should not be mounted when not
in use. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the damage to the vehicle could be greater
if the tow hook is fitted.
●
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover
the rear towing eye. In these cases, the
towing eye should not be used for tow-
starting or for towing other vehicles. For
this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-
ted with a towing bracket, always keep the
tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are f
actory-mounted with a
towing device meet all the technical and le-
gal requirements for driving with a trailer
›››
page 300.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
the maximum authorised load of the trailer
that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing
bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and
the trailer and must be properly secured to
the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing
bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
structions.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
towing bracket should not impair the bum-
per's function. Do not make modifications or
repairs to the exhaust system or the brake
system. Make regular checks to ensure that
the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem should have sufficient coolant and be
prepared for the additional effort involved in
driving with a trailer.
»
295
Driving
Trailer brakes
If the tr
ailer has its own brake system, please
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-
tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer
›››
page 296.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
the statutory safety regulations
›››
page 296.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
correct, have it checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
accordance with the regulations of the coun-
try in question. The exterior mirrors should be
adjusted before you start driving and must
provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
not the right one
, the trailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
●
If the r
ear lights of the trailer are not cor-
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
current, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces. Only use the connections intended for
providing electric current to the trailer.
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig. 206 Schematic representation: assign-
ment of the pins of the tr
ailer's electrical sock-
et.
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Earth for pin 10
12 Unassigned
13 Earth for pin 9
Power socket for trailer
The v
ehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the connection between the trailer
and the vehicle. With the engine running,
electrical devices on the trailer receive power
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin
10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been
connected, the consumers on the trailer will
receive electricity through this connection
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.
296
Towing bracket device
This powers, for example, the trailer's interior
lighting. El
ectrical devices such as a fridge in
a caravan only receive electrical power if the
engine is running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system,
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin
3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
be available.
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.
However, make sure that the cable does not
rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure
they are working correctly and that they
comply with the relevant safety regulations. If
you connect the trailer to the factory-moun-
ted system, when you turn on the rear fog
lamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle will
turn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
if the following conditions are met:
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an
anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
●
If the trailer is electrically connected to the
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
et.
●
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and
trailer are in perfect condition and have no
faults or damage.
●
If the vehicle is locked with the key and the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
gered if the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
not go off when the electrical connection
with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with
light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connect
ed, it may lead to an excessive
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
Ensure that any repairs that need to be
carried out on the el
ectrical system are
carried out by a specialised workshop.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer
po
wer socket can cause short circuits,
overloading of the electrical system or fail-
ure of the lighting system, and consequent-
ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-
er socket to each other.
●
Make sure any work on bent pins is car-
ried out by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
Do not leave the trailer connected to the
v
ehicle when parked; place it on its support
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
be placed on the towing bracket and the
trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
»
297
Driving
Note
●
In case of anomalies in the el
ectrical sys-
tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in
the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-
spected by a specialised workshop.
●
If the trailer accessories consume energy
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-
charge.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is running
low, the electrical connection with the trail-
er will be automatically cut off.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer
w
eight and vertical load on the coupling
device
The technically permissible maximum trailer
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow
›››
. The vertical load on the coupling is ex-
ert
ed vertically from above on the hook of the
towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
vice contained in the type plate of the towing
bracket are experimental values only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which
may be lower than these figures, are given in
the vehicle documentation. The information in
the vehicle documentation takes precedence
at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the
coupling device
›››
page 294. An insufficient
vertical load has a negative influence on the
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing
vehicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
taining information from a specialised work-
shop regarding which type of trailer is most
suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
must be balanced. In order to do this, the
load must be as close as possible to the max-
imum vertical load technically permissible on
the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-
tributed between the back and front of the
trailer:
●
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
●
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure
›››
page 347.
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
maximum l
oad technically permissible on
the coupling point, the maximum author-
ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-
tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-
ries may occur.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
●
The actual weight on the front and rear
axles must never exceed the maximum per-
missible axle weight. The weight on the
front and rear axles must never exceed the
maximum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-
it
y and security of the towing vehicle and
298
Towing bracket device
trailer, which could lead to accidents and
serious injuries.
●
Always load the trailer correctly.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or str
aps that are suitable and in
good condition.
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
The fr
ont part of the vehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Specific features of driving with a trailer
●
If your trailer has an o
verrun brake, brake
gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-
vent the jerking that can be caused by the
locking of trailer wheels.
●
Due to the gross combination weight of the
towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
tance increases.
●
When going down a slope, go into a lower
gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-
tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-
vantage of the braking power provided by the
engine. Otherwise, the braking system could
overheat and even fail.
●
The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-
bination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle.
●
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
wards slightly when you first start up.
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:
●
Press and hold the brake pedal.
●
Press the button once to disconnect the
electronic parking brake
›››
page 272.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way
down.
●
Engage first gear or set the gear selector
switch to the D/S position.
●
Pull out the button and hold it in that po-
sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and
trailer with the electronic parking brake.
●
Release the brake pedal.
●
Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of
a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch
pedal.
●
Do not release the button until the en-
gine has sufficient power to start driving.
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may
l
ead to loss of control of the vehicle and
serious injury.
●
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the ve-
hicle handling and braking distances.
●
Always drive cautiously and carefully.
Brake earlier than usual.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. Slow down, especially
when driving down hills or slopes.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-
vres.
●
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
speed immediately if you notice that the
trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
●
Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
and tr
ailer combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer
combination is an additional function of the
el
ectronic stability control (ESC).
»
299
Driving
If the system detects that the trailer is weav-
ing, it int
ervenes to reduce the swaying of the
trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-
tion requirements
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a
compatible towing bracket.
●
The ESC and the TCS are switched on. The
control lamp or is not lit up on the instru-
ment cluster.
●
The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-
cle through the trailer power socket.
●
The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
(approx. 37 mph).
●
The maximum vertical load technically per-
missible is not being exceeded on the cou-
pling device.
●
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
●
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
tric st
ability control of the vehicle and trail-
er should not lead you to take any risks that
could compromise your safety.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accel
erate with caution when the road is
slippery.
●
When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
erating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle
and tr
ailer may not correctly detect all
driving conditions.
●
When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-
sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
so switched off.
●
The stability system does not always de-
tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
●
When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
bility system.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
tip over without having previously weaved.
●
If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.
installation of a bicycle rack with lights),
repeated automatic braking may occur in
extreme driving conditions.
Electrically unlocking trailer
hook
Description
Fig. 207
On the left side of the luggage com-
partment: butt
on for unlocking the tow hook.
The towing bracket’s hook is located in the
bumper
. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking
cannot be removed.
There should be no person, animal or object
in the path of the tow hook
›››
.
Unl
ocking the tow hook and removing it
●
Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic
parking brake
›››
page 272.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 207 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically and automatically
300
Towing bracket device
turns outwards. The button's control lamp
fl
ashes.
●
Finish remove the tow hook by hand until
you feel and hear that it has engaged and
the control lamp on the button stays on.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Hitching and connecting a trailer
›››
page 296.
Retracting the tow hook
●
Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
parking brake.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
cal connection between it and the vehicle. If
you are using an adapter, remove it from the
trailer's power socket.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 207 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically.
●
Turn the tow hook under the bumper with
your hand until you feel and hear that it en-
gages and the control lamp on the button re-
mains on continuously.
●
Close the rear lid.
The control lamp
●
If the warning light on the button
›››
Fig. 207
flashes, this means that the tow hook has
not been attached properly or is damaged
›››
.
●
If the w
arning lamp
›››
Fig. 207 remains
on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor-
rectly in place both when extracted and
when covered.
The control light of the lamp switches off ap-
proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-
gaged.
●
Always ensure that no person, animal or
ob
ject is to be found in the path of the tow
hook.
●
Never use a tool or instrument while the
tow hook is moving.
●
Never press the
›››
Fig. 207 button when
there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or
when a carrier system or other accessories
are mounted on the tow hook.
●
If the tow hook is not attached properly,
do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised
workshop and have the towing bracket
checked.
●
If you detect any fault in the electrical
system or in the towing bracket, contact a
specialised workshop and ask them to
check it.
●
If the ball has a diameter of less than 49
mm at any one point, do not use the towing
bracket under any circumstances.
CAUTION
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure
or st
eam devices, do not point the jet di-
rectly towards the retractable tow hook or
the trailer power socket, as this may dam-
age the joints or remove the grease neces-
sary for lubrication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow
hook may be impossibl
e to operate. In this
case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-
tion (for example, a garage).
Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-
tr
actable towbar
The maximum allowed weight of the carrier
syst
em, including the load, is 75 kg. The carri-
er system should not protrude more than 700
mm backwards from the spherical head. On-
ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can
be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles
must be mounted as close to the vehicle as
possible (tow hook).
WARNING
The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-
cycl
e rack mounted on the tow hook can
cause accidents and injury.
»
301
Driving
●
Ne
ver exceed the maximum weight or the
limits indicated above.
●
The bicycle rack may not be mounted to
the neck of the hook below the ball be-
cause, due to the shape of the neck and
depending on the rack model, the rack
could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-
cle.
●
Always read and take the manufacturer
assembly instructions into account.
CAUTION
If the maximum weight and limits indicated
abo
ve are exceeded, the vehicle may suf-
fer considerable damage.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
Note
SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-
sibl
e, all removable parts of the bicycles
before setting off. These parts include, for
example, baskets and saddlebags, child
seats or batteries. This improves aerody-
namics and the centre of gravity of the rack
system.
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Description
Fig. 208
Limits and attachment points for ret-
r
ofitting a towing bracket.
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be
r
etrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-
ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball
head and the road
›››
Fig. 208
C
must never
be l
ess than that indicated. This also applies
when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the
technically permissible maximum vertical
load on the coupling device.
302
Towing bracket device
Distance specifications
›
››
Fig. 208
1)
:
Mounting points on the vehicle
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
1,043 mm
344 mm
564 mm
885 mm (Leon) / 1,162.5 mm (Leon
Sportstourer)
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connect
ed, this may lead to malfunctions
in the entire vehicle electronic system, as
well as to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem to the electrical connections of the tail
lights or any other unsuitable power sour-
ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-
nect the trailer.
●
The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
suit
able, the trailer may separate from the
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
ous accidents and f
atal injuries.
Note
●
Only use t
owing brackets that have been
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
tion.
●
In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
Service.
1)
Measurements may vary depending on differ-
ent chassis combinations.
303
Battery
Battery
High-v
oltage battery
Safety instructions
Introduction
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
WARNING
The vehicle’s high-voltage network and the
high-v
oltage battery are hazardous and
can cause burns and other injuries, includ-
ing fatal electric shocks.
●
It should always be assumed that the
high-voltage battery is fully charged and
that all of its components are live. This may
also be the case when the ignition is
switched off.
●
Never touch the high-voltage cables, the
high-voltage battery or its poles, or allow
them to come into contact with jewellery or
other metal objects, especially if the high-
voltage cables, the high-voltage battery or
its poles are damaged.
●
Never take it upon yourself to perform
any type of work on the high-voltage net-
work, on the high-voltage cables or the
high-voltage battery.
●
Never open or perform maintenance or
repairs on components or parts of the high
voltage network, or disconnect them from
this netw
ork.
●
Never damage, modify or remove the or-
ange high voltage cables or disconnect
them from the high voltage network.
●
Never open, modify or remove the cover
from the high-voltage battery.
●
Work on the high-voltage system, as well
as on any systems that may be indirectly
influenced by it, should only be carried out
by specialized personnel with the corre-
sponding qualifications and training.
●
Work in the immediate vicinity of high-
voltage cables and high-voltage compo-
nents with tools that are sharp, give off
shavings or that have heat sources, such as
hot air, thermal bonding or welding work,
may only be performed after disconnecting
the voltage. The high voltage should only
be disconnected by specialized personnel
with the corresponding qualifications and
training.
●
All SEAT guidelines and standards must
be followed when performing any work on
the high-voltage system and the high-volt-
age battery.
●
The gases that are emitted or leaked
from the high-voltage battery may be toxic
or flammable.
●
Damage to the vehicle or high voltage
battery could cause an immediate or de-
layed leak of toxic gases. The emitted
gases could also cause a fire. Do not inhale
the gases.
●
Never touch the liquids that spill from the
high v
oltage battery and do not touch the
emitted gases, particularly if the battery is
damaged.
●
In the event of a fire, leave the danger
area and call the fire department. Inform
the fire fighters that the vehicle is fitted
with an electric drive system.
●
Always inform the fire fighters and the
emergency service that the vehicle is fitted
with a high-voltage battery.
WARNING
If works are performed on the high-voltage
syst
em and on the high-voltage compo-
nents in an inappropriate manner, this may
lead to faults in the operation, accidents
and injuries.
●
Work on the high-voltage system must
only be performed by authorized special-
ized services with the corresponding per-
mit.
CAUTION
●
If the v
ehicle suffers an accident or colli-
sion with an obstacle, the high-voltage bat-
tery must be checked by specialized per-
sonnel with the corresponding qualifica-
tions and training.
304
High-voltage battery
●
If the 12-v
olt vehicle battery has been
disconnected, discharged or replaced,
there is a chance that the combustion en-
gine may not initially turn off automatically
after moving off. If this situation lasts for
several days, contact a qualified special-
ized workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT partner for this.
High voltage warning lettering
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 209
Warning lettering.
Fig. 210
High-voltage battery warning letter-
ing.
Warning lettering on the vehicle
The f
ollowing parts of the vehicle can be
identified with the depicted warning lettering
›››
Fig. 209,
›››
Fig. 210:
●
Covers and lids behind which live high-volt-
age components are located.
●
All the high-voltage components, including
the high-voltage battery.
●
Under the front bonnet.
The warning lettering
›››
Fig. 209
and
indicate high electrical voltage.
The components of the high voltage system
can become very hot and should not be
touched
›››
Fig. 209
.
›››
Fig. 210
High voltage can cause serious injury or
even death. Never touch the battery
poles with bare fingers, tools, jewellery or
other metal objects.
The high-voltage battery contains haz-
ardous liquid and solid substances. Emit-
ted gases can cause severe burns and
blindness. Suitable eye protection and
protective clothing must always be worn
when working on the high voltage battery
to prevent battery fluid coming into con-
tact with the skin and eyes. If the battery
fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, the affected areas should be rinsed
with clean running water for at least 15
minutes, and then a doctor should be
consulted immediately.
The high-voltage battery may burn. The
high-voltage battery should never be ex-
posed to fire, sparks or naked flame. The
high voltage battery must always be han-
dled with care to avoid damage and fluid
leakages.
The high-voltage battery should always
be kept out of the reach of children.
You will find further information and warn-
ings in the usage instructions and work-
shop documentation.
Incorrect handling of the high-voltage
battery can cause serious injuries or
death. Never disassemble the high volt-
age battery or remove its cover.
»
1
2
3
4
5
6
305
Battery
Incorrect handling of the high-voltage
batt
ery can cause serious injuries or
death. Maintenance work on the high-
voltage battery must only be performed
by specialized personnel with the corre-
sponding qualifications and training. Nev-
er modify the high-voltage battery. When
the high-voltage battery is open, ensure it
does not come into contact with water or
other liquids. Liquids may cause short cir-
cuits, electrical shocks and burns.
Conservation of the high-
voltage battery
Conservation instructions
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Reliability and capacity of the high-volt-
age battery
Lithium ion batteries are subject to ageing
and wear and tear throughout their useful life
due to their physical and chemical charac-
teristics. Correct handling of the high-voltage
battery makes an essential contribution to
keeping it in a reliable state in the long term
and to achieving high battery capacity and
range. Therefore, it is extremely important to
respect the following conservation instruc-
tions for the high voltage battery. These
7
maintenance instructions are essential for
maint
aining the vehicle's value over time.
Please also observe the applicable SEAT
warranty conditions for the high-voltage bat-
tery.
Conservation instructions
SEAT recommends the following conserva-
tion instructions:
●
Only charge the high-voltage battery when
a low charge level is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster, or when the electric range is low
›››
page 81.
●
Do not directly charge the high-voltage
battery after only a short drive in full electric
mode.
●
As much as possible avoid fully discharging
the high-voltage battery, such as by leaving
the vehicle parked for a prolonged time with
a low load level. The charge level must not
drop below 20% for long periods of time
›››
.
●
When the high-voltage battery has been
fully char
ged, start driving immediately if
possible.
Vehicle parking times
●
If there is a frost, do not park the vehicle for
several hours with a charge level of lower
than 40%
›››
.
●
If you plan to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or prolonged periods of time, park with a
charge level of at least 30%. This situation
occurs, for example, when you leave your ve-
hicle at the airport before a trip.
●
Do not expose the vehicle to outside tem-
peratures below -30°C or above 60°C for
over 24 hours.
CAUTION
The high-voltage battery must not be used
as a st
ationary power supply. This can
cause irreversible damage to the high-volt-
age battery.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is parked for a long time with
the high-v
oltage battery discharged, it
may no longer be possible to charge the
battery or start the vehicle. Irreversible
damage could be caused to the high volt-
age battery in the long term.
●
Charge the high-voltage battery at regu-
lar intervals.
306
High-voltage battery
Charging settings in the info-
t
ainment system
Battery Manager Menu
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
The Battery Manager allows you to set or
select departure times for the programmed
charging of the high-voltage battery and for
the vehicle’s electric heating and air condi-
tioning.
Open the Battery Manager menu
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Switch on the infotainment system.
●
Select Batt
ery Manager from the main
menu.
It is possible to change the settings for imme-
diate charging (the next charging process).
●
Reduce the charging current, e.g. when
other major consumers are operating on a
single line of the electrical installation at the
same time. Charging power is reduced and
charging time is extended.
●
Set the desired temperature for the station-
ary air conditioning
›››
page 167.
Departure time settings menu
Programmed charging (departure times) can
be set
›››
page 307.
●
Specify the amount of time for which you
want the high-voltage battery to charge and
the air conditioning to be switched on inside
the vehicle.
Extended Stationary Air Conditioning
Menu
●
Set the desired temperature for the station-
ary air conditioning
›››
page 167.
●
Warm the seats and windscreen for depar-
ture: select the seats in the Infotainment sys-
tem or switch on windscreen heating. The ac-
tive functions will be switched on during sta-
tionary air conditioning (either due to an im-
mediate start or departure scheduling) if con-
sidered necessary by the air conditioning
(cold conditions).
The air conditioning works both when the ve-
hicle is connected to the grid and disconnec-
ted. If you want to use the high-voltage bat-
tery as the power supply, change the setting
in the Settings menu.
Charging settings menu
It is possible to configure the general settings
for the charging process.
●
Lower battery charge limit (minimum de-
sired charge level of the high voltage bat-
tery): a minimum range can be ensured with
this function. The vehicle charges directly
once it has been connected to a charging
station or electrical socket. The function is
available if a departure time has been activa-
ted
›››
page 307.
●
Air conditioning using the high-voltage bat-
tery: if the vehicle is not plugged in to an ex-
ternal network and this option is enabled, the
electric range of the vehicle can be signifi-
cantly reduced!
Departure time settings
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
With programmed charging, the battery
charge can be programmed and delayed so
that the desired battery level is reached at a
certain time when the vehicle is connected to
the charging socket.
Viewing the departure times
●
Select Batt
ery Manager from the Infotain-
ment main menu.
●
Select to open the overview of departure
times.
Departure time settings
To set the desired departure time, touch the
corresponding function button or check the
box .
●
Departure times: Time, day of the week or
set a single or weekly departure time.
»
307
Battery
●
Air conditioning: the v
ehicle interior is
heated or cooled by the departure time
›››
page 167.
●
Trough or night-time tariff: a preferred pe-
riod of time for charging can be set.
Activating the departure time
Activate the departure time by checking the
box in the departure times overview.
Displays
Charging activated at a departure time.
Air conditioning switched on at a depar-
ture time.
The departure time is used regularly.
Charging the high-voltage
battery
Introduction
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Check that the driving mode is deactivated
and that the charging cable and infrastruc-
ture are in perfect condition.
Charging modes
Your vehicle has the following possible charg-
ing modes:
●
Fix
ed AC (alternating current) charging sta-
tion or Wallbox, also known as Mode 3 charg-
ing
›››
page 310: The vehicle can be charg-
ed at maximum power at these stations, e.g.
at a public charging station or home Wallbox.
●
Portable charging station or ICCB (In-Ca-
ble Control Box) cable, also known as Mode 2
charging or cable
›››
page 310: The Mode 2
cable is included as standard and is connec-
ted to a conventional household electrical
socket, meaning that the maximum power will
be limited
›››
. You must plan for a longer
char
ging time, e.g. overnight.
The home's electrical installation must be
verified and in perfect condition.
Direct current (DC) or Mode 4 charging is not
compatible with this vehicle.
Differential protection
The vehicle is fitted with a direct current leak-
age (DC leakage) protection device. This
prevents any DC leaks that may occur during
charging from flowing into the home’s electri-
cal installation through the charging cable.
WARNING
Charging the battery improperly, failing to
observ
e generally applicable safety meas-
ures, using unsuitable or damaged elec-
tricity sockets and charging cables, charg-
ing from an unsuitable electrical installa-
tion or incorrectly handling the high-volt-
age battery can cause short circuits, elec-
trical dischar
ges, explosions, fires, burns,
serious injury and even death.
●
Always follow the steps in the order in
which they are shown to avoid the risk of an
electrical discharge and serious injury
caused by the residual energy present in
the charging accumulator. Never pull on
the mains connector during charging.
●
Only charge the vehicle from correctly
installed power sockets that have been
tested and are undamaged, and from elec-
trical installations in a perfect state of re-
pair. Get specialized personnel to periodi-
cally inspect the power sockets and the
electrical installation.
●
Only plug in the charging cable to an
electrical socket that is protected from wa-
ter, humidity and other liquids.
●
Never charge the vehicle in potentially
explosive atmospheres. The components of
the charging cable can cause sparks and,
therefore, may ignite flammable or explo-
sive vapours.
●
Never use damaged charging connectors
or cables. Before each use, check that the
connector and charging cable are not
damaged.
●
Never use the charging cable with an ex-
tension lead, rolled cable, power strip or
adapter, e.g. adapter for other countries or
timer.
308
High-voltage battery
●
Al
ways protect the connectors to prevent
water, moisture and other liquids from di-
rectly getting inside.
●
For safety reasons, no other work should
be performed on the vehicle while it is
charging.
●
Always end the charging process before
unplugging the mains connector. Other-
wise the charging cable and the electrical
installation may also be damaged.
●
Never charge several vehicles simultane-
ously from electrical sockets of the same
safety circuit. Use a different safety circuit
to charge additional vehicles. Always
check the maximum current or power of the
safety circuit that is used. If necessary,
seek advice from qualified electrical instal-
lation professionals.
●
Only use the charging cables supplied
with the vehicle or the charging station ca-
ble. If the cable needs to be replaced, it is
recommended to exclusively use SEAT
charging cables.
●
Never make changes or repairs to electri-
cal components, particularly the high volt-
age system.
●
Always unplug the charging cable before
starting the vehicle. Place the protective
caps and close the cover of the battery
charging socket.
Note
●
The high-v
oltage battery can only be
charged at charging stations that meet the
following requirements and regulations:
–
IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (type 2 con-
nector).
●
Very low or very high temperatures can
noticeably reduce the high voltage bat-
tery’s charging power.
●
To avoid possible compatibility problems
with charging infrastructures, SEAT recom-
mends the use of cables and home charg-
ing stations recommended by the Volkswa-
gen Group.
●
For charging with alternating current,
SEAT recommends charging the high-volt-
age battery at maximum charging power
from a fixed charging station or Wallbox.
This achieves greater efficiency when
compared to charging from an electrical
socket.
●
Check the technical information about
your vehicle’s charging capacity. You can
get more information from any SEAT dealer.
Identification of compatible charg-
ing infr
astructure
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 211 Identification of alternating current
(AC) and t
ype 2 connector.
Fig. 212
Identification of direct current (DC)
and the v
ehicle's CCS connector
Compatibility between vehicles and
char
ging infrastructure
The following indicators according to DIN EN
17186 report whether the infrastructure's
charging connectors are suitable for the vehi-
cle
›››
.
Indicat
ors
›››
Fig. 211
In the vehicle
»
309
Battery
At the charging station
Indicat
ors
›››
Fig. 212
Voltage up to 500 volts
Voltage of up to 1000 volts.
The indicators are located on the vehicle's
charging socket, on components of the local
charging infrastructure (charging station,
socket) and on the charging cable. The indi-
cators refer to standardized charging sys-
tems as per the DIN EN 62196 standard.
WARNING
Charging the vehicle at unverified electri-
cal inst
allations can cause serious injury
and damage.
●
If there is no indicator or if the charging
infrastructure is unknown, an electrical in-
stallation expert should be consulted first.
AC charging
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 213
Behind the battery charging cover on
the fr
ont left-hand side: Charging socket
›››
Fig. 2
13
charging socket
Charging process display
The battery charger installed in the vehicle
converts alternating current from the public
supply into direct current.
AC Charging Station, Wallbox or mode 2 ca-
ble: The vehicle’s high-voltage battery can be
charged using alternating current (AC)
through the corresponding charging socket
1
.
Connecting the char
ging cable
●
Firstly, connect the charging cable to the
electrical socket, charging station or Wallbox.
Next, fully unwind it.
1
2
●
Char
ging cable for power sockets: The pro-
tection device performs a self-test
›››
page 315.
●
With the vehicle unlocked, the battery
charging cover opens when it is pressed
›››
Fig. 213.
●
Plug the charging connector into the
charging socket. Check that the charging
connector is fully plugged in.
The connector locks automatically.
The LED
2
(charging process indicator) of
the char
ging connector lights up. The indica-
tor lamp lights up on the instrument cluster
display.
Automatic start of the charging process
If programmed charging is not activated, the
charging process starts immediately
›››
page 307. The external charging infra-
structure must be active.
During the charging
The charging process indicator
2
on the
char
ging socket flashes green. The indicator
lamp flashes green on the instrument clus-
ter.
Interrupt the charging process
The charging process can be interrupted:
●
Unlock the vehicle.
310
High-voltage battery
●
Pr
ess the function button to end the charg-
ing process. The charging process display on
the charging socket lights up in white
2
.
●
Unlock the vehicle to unlock the charging
connect
or.
To restart the charging process just press the
function button to start the charging process.
After charging
When the high-voltage battery is fully charg-
ed, the charging process display on the
charging socket lights up green.
●
Unlock the vehicle.
●
Unplug the charging connector from the
charging socket within 30 seconds.
●
Disconnect the charging cable from the
power supply and replace the protective cap.
●
Close the charging cover and make sure
you hear it click into place.
First charge and charging after a long time
If the high-voltage battery is new or has not
been charged for a long time, the maximum
charge level of the battery can only be
reached after several charging processes.
This is for technical reasons and is not a vehi-
cle malfunction.
If the vehicle is not used for a long period of
time, the high-voltage battery must be charg-
ed at least once every four months.
Note
If you leave the charging cable connected
aft
er charging, the vehicle's electrical con-
sumers will not drain the high-voltage bat-
tery.
Charging process display
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 214
Behind the cover of the battery
char
ging socket: charging process display
Fig. 215 On the inside of the cover of the bat-
t
ery charging socket: sticker with information
on the charging process display.
An LED light on the charging socket
›
››
Fig. 214 (arrow) shows the status of the
charging process.
A sticker on the battery charging cover pro-
vides information on the meaning of the LEDs
›››
Fig. 215.
charging process displays:
Green LED
›››
Fig. 215:
Always on: Charge completed success-
fully.
Turn signals: The high-voltage battery is
charging.
»
1
2
311
Battery
Short flashes: Programmed charging is
activ
e. The charging process has not yet
started.
Yellow LED
›››
Fig. 215:
Turn signals: The parking lock P has not
been enabled.
Always on: No electrical network has
been detected. Arrange an inspection of
the power supply and network. Seek pro-
fessional assistance.
Red LED
›››
Fig. 215:
Turn signals: Error in the charging system.
The charging process cannot start or has
paused.
Always on: The charging connector has
not been locked. Unplug the charging
connector and plug it back in to the
charging socket, making sure it is proper-
ly inserted. If the problem persists, check
the compatibility of the cable or ask a
professional for help.
Charging socket lighting
In the dark, the charging socket's side lighting
(white LED) can facilitate orientation in the
vehicle:
Ignition
●
The vehicle has been unlocked.
●
OR: The charging connector has been un-
plugged from the charging socket.
3
4
5
6
Off
●
After unlocking or locking the vehicle, the
lighting s
witches off automatically after a
while.
Note
If the charging process display permanent-
ly indicat
es an error in the power supply or
vehicle’s charging system, you should seek
professional assistance.
Troubleshooting
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Error in the electric drive system
The warning lamp lights up red. You must
park the vehicle in a safe place.
The corresponding error message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster display.
Fault in the electric drive system. The high
voltage components may be damaged
›››
.
●
Park the vehicle outdoors as soon as it is
possibl
e and safe to do so.
●
Switch off the drive system.
●
Seek professional assistance.
The charging process is not possible or
has been paused
An error may be displayed on the instrument
cluster display or on the charging socket’s
charging process display.
You can try the following to solve the problem
before seeking professional assistance:
●
Unlocking the charging connector and plug
the charging cable in again.
●
OR: Make sure that the charging settings
are as desired: “immediate” or “program-
med”.
●
OR: Check if the charging connector is
properly plugged in.
●
OR: Check if a fault is displayed on the
charging station or, depending on the fea-
tures, on the displays of the mode 2 charging
cable.
If the fault cannot be rectified, seek professio-
nal assistance directly.
WARNING
High-voltage components, including the
batt
ery and high-voltage cables, may be
live and damaged. The high voltage system
voltage is dangerous and can cause burns,
other injuries and fatal electric shocks.
●
Do not touch the high voltage compo-
nents!
312
High-voltage battery
Emergency release of the charging
connect
or
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 216
Between the left wing panel and the
engine bonnet hinge: Char
ging connector
manual release mechanism puller.
Unlocking the charging connector
Pr
erequisites:
●
The charging connector is plugged in cor-
rectly
›››
page 310.
●
The vehicle is unlocked.
●
The charging process has ended or has
paused
›››
page 308.
The manual release mechanism must be
used if these prerequisites are met and it is
still impossible to unplug the charging con-
nector.
Manual release of the charging connector
The puller for the manual release is located
on the left hand side of the engine compart-
ment , above the charging socket
›››
Fig. 216.
●
Disconnect the power supply at the charg-
ing station or electrical socket.
●
Open the bonnet and make sure it is held in
place with the prop.
●
Pull the puller
›››
Fig. 216.
●
Immediately unplug the charging connec-
tor.
Note
●
The manual r
elease mechanism of the
charging connector should only be used in
the event of a failure.
●
After using the charging connector’s
manual release mechanism, the charging
socket must be inspected immediately by a
professional.
Charging cable
Intr
oduction
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
The type of charging cable supplied with the
vehicle depends on the delivery volume and
the specific technical specifications of each
country, e.g. charging connector connections
f
or power sockets.
SEAT recommends exclusively using the
supplied charging cable.
Notes on the charging cable
●
Handle with care.
●
Unroll and roll fully.
●
Do not twist or bend it over sharp edges.
●
Do not crush it or drive the vehicle over it.
●
Always unplug it by pulling on the connec-
tor.
●
Children should not use the charging cable.
●
Keep animals away from the charging ca-
ble.
●
After use, store it safely and without twisting
it.
Notes on charging connectors and the
charging cable protection device
●
Do not touch the charging connector’s
contacts.
●
Protect from strong sunlight (outside tem-
peratures no higher than 50°C or 122°F).
●
Do not drop them.
●
Protect from immersion in fluids such as rain
water.
●
Fit the protective caps after each use.
»
313
Battery
Cleaning the charging cable
●
Clean the surface of the charging cable
with a dry or slightly damp cl
oth
›››
,
›
››
.
WARNING
Items that are not secured, or incorrectly
secur
ed can cause serious injury during
sudden manoeuvres or braking, or in the
event of an accident.
●
Store the charging cable securely in the
luggage compartment.
●
Use the organizer/protective cover provi-
ded with the cable for this purpose.
WARNING
Using a charging cable that has been dam-
aged or t
ampered with can cause serious
injury and fatal electric shocks.
●
Before each use check that the connec-
tors and the charging cable are undam-
aged, e.g. check for cracks.
●
Never use a charging cable that is dam-
aged or has been tampered with.
●
If the charging cable does not work prop-
erly, get a SEAT dealer to check it.
WARNING
The charging cable for electrical sockets
must al
ways be connected directly to an
electrical socket. Failure to do so could re-
sult in fire damage and damage to the
charging cable or home electrical installa-
tion.
●
Never connect the charging cable to an
e
xtension lead, cable reel, power strip or
adapter or timer.
WARNING
The high voltage system voltage is danger-
ous and can cause burns, other injuries and
f
atal electric shocks.
●
Only clean the charging cable when it is
unplugged.
CAUTION
The charging cable, as portable electrical
equipment, may hav
e to be checked peri-
odically. This requires a test adapter.
CAUTION
The charging cable can be damaged if not
cl
eaned properly.
●
Only water should be used for this pur-
pose, and never additional cleaning prod-
ucts.
●
Water should be prevented from getting
into the contacts.
For the sake of the environment
Charging cables must be disposed of in an
envir
onmentally friendly way and should
not be thrown in the household waste.
Note
The maximum charging capacity of the
saf
ety circuit that is used must be ob-
served. If the charging cable is planned in-
to an electrical socket on the same circuit
as other consumers, the circuit's fuses may
trip.
Charging cable for alternating cur-
r
ent (AC) charging stations
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 217
Charging cable for alternating cur-
r
ent (AC) charging stations.
The maximum charging current is 16 or 32
amps, depending on the v
ehicle’s features
and the charging cable that is supplied
›››
.
314
High-voltage battery
WARNING
Charging the high-voltage battery with an
inappr
opriate charging cable could cause
short circuits, serious injuries and fatal
electrical shocks.
WARNING
The charging cable should not be used as
an e
xtension lead. The charging process
could be affected.
CAUTION
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
indications when using the char
ging sta-
tion.
Note
Charging with a 16 A charging cable is not
possibl
e in some charging stations that
support 32 A. This depends on the features
of the charging station.
●
Before charging the vehicle, find out
about the available charging technology.
Charging cable for power sockets
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 218
Charging cable for electrical sockets
Fig. 219 On the charging cable for power
sock
ets: Indicator lamps on the protection de-
vice.
›››
Fig. 2
19:
Indicator lamp of the connector and the
power supply.
Control lamp of the protection device
1
2
Control lamp of the vehicle
F
ailure warning lamp
Charging cable information
Before using the charging cable, also follow
the instructions displayed on it and on the
rear of the protective device.
Protection device
The electronic protection device
›››
Fig. 219
ensures that the charging connector does
not receive current until it is plugged in to the
vehicle's charging connector.
Self-check
When the charging cable is plugged into the
electrical socket, the protective device auto-
matically performs a self-test. During this
check, all warning and indicator lamps turn
on briefly and go out one after the other.
Upon completion, the operational status at
that time is displayed.
Operating displays
One or more indicator lamps
›››
Fig. 219
1
,
2
or
3
light up green.
»
3
4
315
Battery
Display
›
››
Fig. 219
Meaning
1
on
The charging cable is plug-
ged int
o the mains but has
not been connected to the
vehicle.
1
,
2
on,
3
flashes
slowly
a)
The high-voltage battery is
charging.
1
,
2
and
3
on
The charging process is
compl
ete. The high-voltage
battery has charged.
a)
The available supply voltage depends on each
country.
Set the char
ging current
The charging cable limits the charging cur-
rent according to the available power supply.
If the local mains supply does not allow
charging at the maximum charging current,
the charging current can be reduced, de-
pending on the charging setting features in
the infotainment system
›››
page 307.
Temperature control
The charging cable temperature control
switches on when the charging cable over-
heats, such as when it has been stored in a
luggage compartment exposed to high tem-
peratures or strong sunlight.
When the charging process is interrupted,
the status indicator that is lit up at the time
switches off and one of the indicator lamps
starts slowly flashing green. Warning lamp
4
starts slowly flashing red.
●
Unplug the charging cable and let it cool
do
wn.
●
If the error occurs again, seek professional
assistance.
If charging continues with a lower charging
current, warning lamp
4
lights up in red in
addition t
o the status indicator. The charging
cable must be allowed to cool down for a
while. The charging current automatically in-
creases again.
Fault display
If the red warning light
4
flashes or turns on
without one of the indicat
or lamps
›››
Fig. 219
1
,
2
or
3
also turning on continuously on
the st
atus indicator, there is a fault.
Display
›
››
Fig. 219
Meaning
1
flashes,
4
on or
fl
ashing
Failure in the power supply.
2
flashes,
4
on or
flashing
Failure in the protection de-
vice.
3
flashes,
4
on or
fl
ashing
Failure in the vehicle.
The charging process pauses or is cancelled.
●
Check the instructions l
ocated on the back
of the protective devices.
●
Seek professional assistance if the fault
persists.
Note
If there is any other mains connection dur-
ing the char
ging process, or if the vehicle is
right next to the high voltage cables,
charging from an electrical socket is not
possible in some cases. Additional mains
connections:
●
Connecting a 12 volt battery charger.
●
Contact with a work tool connect to the
mains, such as a vehicle lift.
316
Checking and refilling levels
Practical tips
Checking and r
efilling lev-
els
Refuelling
Purging the fuel tank
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles.
Fig. 220 Driver's door: tank flap release.
Before refuelling the fuel system must be
depr
essurised
›››
in Refuelling on
page 318. T
o do this, press the button on
the driver’s door.
An audible sound will be played and a warn-
ing will be displayed on the instrument cluster
display.
After a few seconds the fuel tank flap will un-
lock and remain unlocked for a few minutes. If
you have not refuelled after this time, you
must press the button again before refuel-
ling.
Avoid touching the fuel tank flap lock button
›››
Fig. 221 (arrow). The system will interpret
that you have finished and cannot continue
refuelling. Press the button on the driver’s
door again to continue.
Refuelling
Fig. 221 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
v
ehicle.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
●
Hybrid vehicles: Use the button on the
driver’s door to release the tank flap.
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
retainer zone.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap
›››
Fig. 221.
●
Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as
the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the
nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion
chamber in the fuel tank.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››
page 320.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
en in
›››
page 371.
Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-
brids
Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-
rol until the control lamp switches off, and
then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-
sary to ensure that the system works proper-
ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-
ing with petrol.
»
317
Practical tips
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
●
When refuelling, turn off the engine and
t
urn off the ignition for safety reasons.
●
The fuel system of PHEV models is pres-
surized to prevent petrol vapours from es-
caping into the atmosphere.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in
the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-
ter in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. In an accident the canister could be
damaged and could leak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you
have to carry a spare fuel canister, please
observe the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-
ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.
This could cause an explosion. Always
place the canister on the ground to fill
it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-
ble into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of
metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-
tact with the canister during filling. This
helps pr
event an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is
explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
●
If any fuel is spilt ont
o the vehicle, it
should be removed immediately. It could
otherwise damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. The
catalytic converter can be damaged.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run
it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel
engine, the ignition must be switched on for
at least 30 seconds before starting the en-
gine. When you then start the engine it may
take longer than normal (up to one minute)
to start firing.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause
the fuel t
o overflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual r
elease of the fuel tank flap. If nec-
essary, request assistance from special-
ised personnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective
de
vice that prevents the insertion of the
wrong fuel hose
1)
. It is only possible to re-
fuel with Diesel nozzles.
●
If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if
it is very small, it is possible that it will not
be able to open the protective device. Be-
fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by
turning it, try a different pump or request
specialist help.
●
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-
ister, the protective device will not open.
One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in
very slowly.
1)
Depending on country
318
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling natural gas
Fig. 222
Tank cap open: gas filler mouth
1
,
fill
er mouth retainer
2
.
Before r
efuelling, the engine and the ignition,
mobile telephone and heating must be
switched off separately
›››
.
R
ead the instructions on how to use the natu-
ral gas pump carefully.
Refuelling
The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel
tank cap, next to the petrol filler
mouth
›››
Fig. 222.
●
Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth
1
.
●
Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas
fill
er mouth.
●
The fuel tank will be full when the pump
compressor automatically cuts the supply.
●
If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,
press the button on the pump to stop the flow.
If the ambient temperature is very high, the
natural gas pump’s overheating protection
disconnects it automatically.
Closing the fuel tank cap
●
Check that the mouth retainer
2
of the gas
fill
er is not trapped with the filler. If this hap-
pens, replace it in the filler mouth.
●
Insert the plug in the filler mouth.
●
Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
click into place.
WARNING
Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily
fl
ammable substance. Incorrect handling
of the natural gas can cause accidents se-
rious burns and other injuries.
●
Before refuelling with natural gas, en-
gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can
smell gas, stop refuelling immediately.
●
Read and take note
›››
in Natural gas
on page 322.
WARNING
The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-
ur
al gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),
so LNG or LPG should not be used under
any circumstances. Liquid gas can cause
an explosion of the natural gas tanks and
cause se
vere injuries! .
WARNING
If the vehicle underbody touches the
gr
ound or in the event of a rear collision,
there could be damage to the natural gas
tanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks are
full of fuel and can explode, causing seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
●
Even if you don't notice the smell of gas,
take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
immediately and have the natural gas sys-
tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas
again until the natural gas system has been
inspected.
Note
●
The filling no
zzles of natural gas pumps
can differ in the way they are operated. Ask
a qualified employee at the petrol station
to do the refuelling if you do not know how.
●
Noises heard when refuelling are normal
and do not indicate damage in the system.
●
The vehicle natural gas system is pre-
pared both for refuelling with a small com-
pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-
sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta-
tions.
319
Practical tips
Fuel types
Identification of fuel
s
1)
Fig. 223
Identification of fuels according to
Eur
opean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/
Fuels are identified by different symbols on
the pump and on your v
ehicle's tank flap. The
identification serves to prevent confusion
when choosing the fuel.
Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
nol). The number indicates the percent-
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
1
Diesel accor
ding to EN590 standard. The
number indicates the maximum percent-
age of Biodiesel in the fuel. “B7” means a
maximum of 7% Biodiesel.
Synthetic diesel according to EN15940
standard.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas.
Type of petrol
3 V
alid for: vehicles with petrol engines
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded
petrol. The petrol must comply with the
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled
(E10)
2)
. The types of petrol are differentiated
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via
the anti-knock index (AKI).
2
3
4
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 oct
ane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power
loss) may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at
least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
1)
Depending on country
2)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
320
Checking and refilling levels
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
bl
e.
CAUTION
●
Fuel
s high percentage of ethanol, e.g.
E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
vehicles with Totalflex engine
›››
page 321,
Ethanol fuel.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
other metal additives entails a permanent
deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
must not be used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an oct
ane rating higher than the
one required by the engine can be used.
●
In countries in which there is no sulphur-
free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
phur content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
3 V
alid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with the
marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that
›››
page 320, Type of pet-
rol
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
siv
ely with petrol every 10,000 km to de-
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
fuel might have left in the engine.
Diesel
3 V
alid for: vehicles with diesel engines
Please note the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-
tures, thus affecting the start or operation of
the engine. Ask your service station attendant
if their diesel is suitable for winter use.
Water in the fuel filter
2)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-
arator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:
Water in the fuel
filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop so that they can
drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
●
Ne
ver use of FAME (biodiesel that does
not meet the EN590 standard), petrol,
heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents
as they can cause severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
●
If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not
start the engine under any circumstances.
»
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
2)
Depending upon country.
321
Practical tips
Risk of damaging the fuel system and the
engine! Obt
ain technical assistance.
Natural gas
Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid
f
orm, addition to others.
Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)
Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only
be working with CNG (Compressed Natural
Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethane
if it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.
Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq-
uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix-
ture of hydrogen and methane) should not be
used to fill the tank.
Natural gas quality and consumption
Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L
depending on its quality.
Gas type H has a superior heating power and
inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content
than type L. The higher the heating power of
the natural gas, the lower the consumption
will be.
The engine management automatically
adapts to the natural gas used according to
its quality. Therefore, different quality gases
can be mixed in the tank, without the need for
comprehensive draining before applying a
diff
erent quality gas.
Updated information relating to natural gas
quality is shown on the instrument cluster dis-
play.
Regular checks of the natural gas system
The natural gas tanks may be damaged or
corroded by external factors. The walls of the
gas tanks are weakened by deformations,
damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner must
have a specialised workshop check (visual
check) the gas system at least once every
4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replaced
at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Failure to act when you can smell gas in the
v
ehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-
ous injuries.
●
Stop the vehicle immediately.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the doors to appropriately venti-
late the vehicle.
●
Extinguish cigarettes immediately.
●
Move away from the vehicle or switch off
objects that may cause sparks or a fire.
●
If you continue to smell gas, do not con-
tinue driving!
●
Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault
repaired.
●
If necessary, w
arn the emergency serv-
ices.
WARNING
Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-
sult in serious injury or e
ven death.
●
Have the natural gas deposits checked at
least every 4 years (visual check).
●
Natural gas tanks have a limited service
life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced
when required. You can obtain further infor-
mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-
alised workshops.
AdBlue®
Inf
ormation about AdBlue®
AdBlue® consumption depends on your per-
sonal driving st
yle, the temperature of the
system and the outdoor temperature when
the vehicle is used.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C
(+13°F). The system has heating elements
that guarantee its operation even at low tem-
peratures.
The AdBlue® tank has a capacity of approx.
11 litres.
322
Checking and refilling levels
When the r
ange is less than 2400 km the
instrument cluster screen displays a message
requesting an AdBlue® refill.
If this message is ignored, the yellow warning
lamp will come on when the remaining
range is less than 1000 km. . The indica-
tion that in XXX km it will no longer be possible
to restart the engine will appear on the instru-
ment panel display.
If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when
remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will
no longer be possible to restart the engine.
The red warning lamp will light up .
AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the Ger-
man Association of the Automotive Industry
(VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF
(Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
CAUTION
Overfilling with AdBlue® can cause dam-
age t
o the tank system.
Control and warning lamps
It lights up red
The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue l
evel
is too low.
Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then
top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue
›››
page 323.
and
They light up red
The engine cannot be restarted! F
ault in the
AdBlue system.
Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system
checked there.
It lights up yellow
The AdBlue reserve is low.
R
efill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that
are indicated
›››
page 323. SEAT recommends con-
tacting a specialised workshop.
and
They light up yellow
There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable
AdBlue fluid has been used.
Cont
act a specialised workshop. Have the system
checked there.
Several warning and control lamps should
light up f
or a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on, signalling that the function is be-
ing verified. They will switch off after a few
seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Fill AdBlue®
Fig. 224
AdBlue tank cap.
Operations prior to refilling
P
ark the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off
the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a
curb, the level indicator may not detect the
refill properly.
If an AdBlue® warning message is shown on
the instrument cluster display, fill with at
least the minimum required amount (ap-
prox. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount
will the system detect that AdBlue® has been
added and you will be able to start the en-
gine again. The maximum amount that can
be refilled is 11 litres.
Fill with a refill bottle
Only use AdBlue® that complies with the
ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original
containers.
»
323
Practical tips
●
Open the t
ank cover
›››
Fig. 224.
●
Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-
ti-clockwise direction.
●
Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-
tions, indicated on the refill bottle.
●
Check the expiry date.
●
Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
●
Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler
neck vertically and screw the bottle on by
hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.
●
Press the refill bottle in the direction of the
filler neck and hold it in this position.
●
Wait until the contents of the refill bottle
have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do
not compress or break the bottle!
●
Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-
rection and gently pull it upwards
›››
.
●
The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liq-
uid comes out of the bottl
e.
●
Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-
tion until it is tightly closed.
●
Close the fuel tank flap.
Operations before driving
●
After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-
nition.
●
Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-
onds for the system to detect the fluid load.
●
Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds
before starting the engine!
Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue
Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-
duction.
●
Open the tank cap.
●
Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise
›››
Fig. 224.
●
Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the
first time.
●
Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise
until you hear a click.
WARNING
AdBlue® should only be stored in its origi-
nal cont
ainer, which should be tightly
closed and kept in a safe place.
CAUTION
●
When r
efilling, the nozzle grip should be
aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle
will not connect automatically.
●
Do not try to add any more additive after
the nozzle has stopped for the first time.
The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue
could spill out.
●
Only use AdBlue® that complies with the
ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original
containers.
●
Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-
ditives. Any type of damage caused by
such a mixture will not be covered by the
warranty.
●
Ne
ver pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank!
This could result in engine damage.
●
Do not carry the refill bottle inside the
vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-
ture changes or damage to the bottle), the
AdBlue® may damage the vehicle's interior.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-
ment
-friendly manner.
Note
Suitable AdBlue® refill bottles can be pur-
chased fr
om SEAT dealerships.
Engine management and
emissions contr
ol system
Introduction
WARNING
●
Due t
o the high temperatures reached by
the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you
should not park your vehicle near a surface
that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
324
Checking and refilling levels
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the emission control system.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Flashes
Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic
conv
erter.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
It lights up
Particulate filter blocked
›
››
page 325.
It lights up
Fault in the petrol engine management.
Hav
e the engine checked as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop.
When the ignition is switched on, the (El
ectronic
Power Control) lights up and should go off once the
engine has started.
It lights up
Diesel engine preheating system.
The engine can be st
arted straight away when the
lamp switches off.
Flashes
Fault in the diesel engine management.
Hav
e the engine checked as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop.
Note
While the control lamps , , or ar
e
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel
consumption may go up and the engine
might lose power.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
conv
erter
●
Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines.
●
Never run the fuel tank dry.
●
When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount
›››
page 332,
Topping up the engine oil.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
›››
page 53.
If you should notice misfiring, uneven running
or loss of power when the car is moving, have
the vehicle inspected by a specialised work-
shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp
will light up when any of these symptoms
occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can
enter the exhaust system and escape into the
atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also
be damaged by overheating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irr
egular fuel supply can cause
ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to
enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the cata-
lytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
w
orking perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the gases on occasions. This
depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
used. This can quite often be avoided by
changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
3 V
alid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-
late filters
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If
the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
journeys are made continuously), it becomes
blocked with soot and the following indica-
tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-
late filter: cleaned while the vehi-
cle is moving. See Manual. The
»
325
Practical tips
particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera-
tion).
R
egeneration of the petrol particulate fil-
ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h
›››
●
Completely remove your foot from the ac-
cel
erator pedal for a few seconds to let the
vehicle roll with the gear engaged.
●
Consider the legal speed limits as well as
the recommended gears.
●
Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let
roll) until the control lamp turns off.
This procedure involves an autonomous par-
ticulate filter cleaning process and may take
some time.
If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-
mediately to a specialised workshop to repair
the fault.
Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI
2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h
(31-75 mph). This increases the temperature
and burns the soot in the filter
›››
.
●
Consider the l
egal speed limits as well as
the recommended gears.
●
End the regeneration journey once the con-
trol warning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes
of running in regeneration mode, have a spe-
cialised workshop repair the fault
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-
er conditions, r
oads, braking distance and
traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-
eration phase. Route recommendations
should never make you disregard each
country's specific traffic regulations.
CAUTION
●
When the e
xhaust system detects that
the particulate filter is close to saturation,
the self-cleaning function of this system
recommends optimal driving for this func-
tion.
●
Due to the high temperatures caused by
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it
is possible that the radiator fan will acti-
vate after stopping the engine, even it its
operating temperature has not been
reached.
●
Noise, smells and high idle speeds can
occur during regeneration.
●
Always use the correct engine oil and the
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of
the particulate filter is not affected. Also
av
oid making short trips all the time.
Engine compartment
W
orking in the engine compart-
ment
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scal
ding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment
(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).
Always observe the warnings listed below
and follow all general safety precautions.
The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-
tentially hazardous area
›››
.
WARNING
When work is done in the engine compart-
ment, injuries, burns, accidents and e
ven
fires can occur.
●
Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni-
tion e and apply the electronic parking
brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox,
place the lever in neutral; if it has an auto-
matic gearbox, activate the parking lock
(button P). Wait for the engine to cool
down.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam
or drips of coolant being released from the
326
Checking and refilling levels
engine compartment. Wait until no steam
or cool
ant can be seen before opening the
bonnet.
●
Keep children away from the engine
compartment.
●
Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-
ant).
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-
trical system, particularly at the points
where the jump leads are attached
›››
page 53. The battery could explode.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure.
●
Protect face, hands and arms by cover-
ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
Always make sure you have not left any
objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in
the engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for
securing the v
ehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal,
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,
and from the high-voltage ignition system.
You should also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing
and long hair do not get trapped in ro-
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel-
lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear
tight-fitting clothes.
–
Never accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if
the handbrake is applied. Danger of
death.
●
Observe the following additional warn-
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
trical system is necessary:
–
Always disconnect the 12-volt vehicle
battery from the on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extin-
guisher immediately available.
For the sake of the environment
●
Inspect the gr
ound underneath your vehi-
cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-
ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
or other fluids in the area where it was
parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
workshop.
●
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
vironment. For this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
specialised workshop.
Note
In right-hand drive vehicles some brake flu-
id r
eservoirs are on the other side of the en-
gine compartment
›››
Fig. 227.
327
Practical tips
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 225
Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
ea.
Fig. 226
Lever under the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is r
eleased from inside the vehi-
cle.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
against the windscreen.
●
Open the door and pull the lever under the
dashboard
›››
Fig. 225
1
.
●
To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on
the l
ever located under the bonnet, in the
centre
›››
Fig. 226
2
. The arrester hooks are
r
eleased.
●
The bonnet can be opened. Release the
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
●
Slightly lift the bonnet.
●
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
support.
●
At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly
cl
osed. If it opens when driving, it can
cause an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
windscr
een wiper arms, only open it when
the windscreen wipers are in place against
the windscreen.
328
Checking and refilling levels
Checking levels
Fig. 227
Diagram for the location of the various el-
ements.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the v
ehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
›››
page 333
Engine oil level dipstick
›››
page 331
Engine oil filler cap
›››
page 332
Brake fluid reservoir
›››
page 335
Battery
1)
›››
page 337
1
2
3
4
5
Windscreen washer reservoir
›
››
page 336
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine
.
6
1)
In plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHEV) the battery is
in the luggage compartment
›
››
page 339.
329
Practical tips
Engine oil
Gener
al notes
Fig. 228
In the engine compartment: engine
oil l
abel
Fig. 229
In the engine compartment: area
wher
e the engine oil label is located
Key to the
›
››
Fig. 228:
Information about the engine oil stand-
ard.
Information about engine oil viscosity.
A
B
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year r
ound.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
For vehicles with an engine oil label
If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one
of the oils shown on the label
›››
Fig. 228. The
label with the prescribed standard is located
at the front of the engine compartment
›››
Fig. 229
1
. If you use the recommended
engine oil, you can t
op up the oil as often as
necessary.
For vehicles without an engine oil label
Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT offi-
cial service for information about the corre-
sponding standard.
If the engine oil level is too low
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol and CNG engines: VW 504 00,
ACEA C3 or API SN standard.
Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or
API CJ-4, viscosity 0W-30.
–
–
SEAT recommends changing the oil at a spe-
cialised workshop. SEAT recommends an Of-
ficial SEAT Service.
SEAT recommends the use of engine oils ap-
proved according to the appropriate VW
standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet
these quality requirements can cause engine
damage.
SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT
Spare Part engine oils.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
CAUTION
Take the following into account if you have
r
efilled with an engine oil different to those
specified in the aforementioned standards,
or by your SEAT technical service centre:
●
There is no way of completely avoiding
the danger of causing damage to the en-
gine and particulate filter.
●
You can continue driving with the vehicle
if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine
oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon
as possible and request an oil change. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of engine dam-
age.
●
If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of
engine oil, drive with the engine at low load
330
Checking and refilling levels
levels and within the medium RPM range as
a maximum. Do not driv
e at more than 80
km/h and do not travel more than 300 km
(approximately). Go to a specialised work-
shop as soon as possible and request an oil
change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en-
gine damage.
●
You are responsible for the risk of possi-
ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust
system). If in doubt, do not start the engine
and request assistance from the technical
service centre.
●
Do not start the engine if you have top-
ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.
Request assistance from the technical
service centre. Danger of engine damage!
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conf
orms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Warning lamp
It lights up red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine oil pressure too low.
Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
If this warning lamp st
arts to flash, and is accom-
panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-
gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
oil
›››
page 332.
If the warning lamp fl
ashes although the oil level
is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at
idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
It lights up yellow
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
R
eplace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to
do so
›››
page 332.
It flashes yellow
Fault in the oil level sensor.
Hav
e the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-
til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 230
Engine oil dipstick.
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
the oil.
Checking oil l
evel
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
operating temperature is reached and then
stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level
›››
Fig. 230. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
The oil must leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It can never go above zone
A
.
»
331
Practical tips
●
Z
one
A
: do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: you can add oil but keep the level
in that z
one.
●
Zone
C
: add oil until zone
B
.
Depending on ho
w you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine com-
par
tment or on the engine must be carried
out cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compart-
ment, always observe the safety warnings
›››
page 326.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
A
, do not start
the engine
. This could result in damage to
the engine and catalytic converter. Con-
tact a Technical Service.
Topping up the engine oil
Fig. 231
In the engine compartment: Engine oil
fill
er cap.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the w
arnings
›››
in Working in the engine
compar
tment on page 326.
Topping up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening
›››
Fig. 231.
●
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no
more than 0.5 l).
●
To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes
and recheck the oil level
›››
page 331.
●
If necessary, add some more oil.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
›››
Fig. 230
B
, unscrew the engine oil filler
cap car
efully
›››
.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corr
esponding engine compartment il-
lustration
›››
page 329.
Engine oil specification
›››
page 330.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes int
o contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
›
››
Fig. 230
A
,
do not st
art the engine. This could result in
damage to the engine and catalytic con-
verter. Contact a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above zone
›
››
Fig. 230
A
. Otherwise oil can be drawn
in thr
ough the crankcase breather and leak
into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
tem.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conf
orms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
332
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a T
echnical Service.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
hav
e the specialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings
›››
page 326.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,
such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with
your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to
help prevent oil from running down your
arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This coul
d result in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such addi-
tives would not be covered by the factory
warranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
W
e recommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining
the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
all the engine oil.
Cooling system
Cool
ant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the f
actory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive
G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture
gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy
parts of the engine cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-
ant.
To protect the cooling system, the percent-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
additive G12evo for optimal protection
against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13
(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-
tection again corrosion and should be avoi-
ded.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
cool
ant system, the engine may fail lead-
ing to serious damage.
●
Ensure that the percentage of additive is
correct for the lowest expected ambient
temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
cle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very
low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
cle would be immobilised.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be
mix
ed with coolants which are not ap-
proved by SEAT.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
cates that the G12evo additive has been
»
333
Practical tips
mixed with an inadequate coolant. The
cool
ant must be changed as soon as possi-
ble if this is the case!
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate
the envir
onment. If any fluids are spilled,
they should be collected and correctly dis-
posed of, with respect to the environment.
Coolant tank
3 V
alid for: hybrid vehicles.
Fig. 232
Engine compartment: Coolant tanks
The vehicle has 2 independent coolant ex-
pansion t
anks.
›››
Fig. 232
Coolant expansion tank for the combus-
tion engine cooling circuit.
1
Coolant expansion tank for the high-volt-
age cooling cir
cuit. Do not continue driv-
ing if there is a lack of fluid in the expan-
sion tank. Do not top up coolant. Go im-
mediately to a specialised workshop.
Refilling coolant
Fig. 233 In the engine compartment: marking
on cool
ant expansion tank.
2
Fig. 234 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion t
ank cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment
›
››
page 329.
Top up coolant when the level is below the
(minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the marks
›››
Fig. 233. When the engine is hot, it may
be slightly above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
334
Checking and refilling levels
–
Co
ver the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant in the e
xpansion tank, otherwise you
could damage the engine. If there is no
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professional
assistance
›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expansion
t
ank, top up to the upper mark.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-
cialised workshop to have the cooling system
examined.
WARNING
●
The cooling syst
em is under pressure. Do
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
Store the antifreeze in its original con-
tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
CAUTION
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
t
ank, park the car in a safe place and do
not continue driving. Obtain technical as-
sistance.
Brake fluid
Check and r
efill the brake fluid
Fig. 235 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
erv
oir cap.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment
›
››
page 329.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
and markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
light on the instrument panel display monitors
the brake fluid level
›››
page 87.
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid
reservoir is on the other side of the engine
compartment.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-
bl
e/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-
tem may fail or braking power may be re-
duced.
●
Check the brake system and the brake
fluid level regularly!
●
When the brake fluid is used and brakes
are subjected to extreme braking forces,
bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-
tem. These bubbles can significantly re-
duce braking power, notably increasing
braking distance, and could result in the to-
tal failure of the brake system.
●
Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly
meets the VW 501 14 standard.
»
335
Practical tips
●
Y
ou can buy VW 501 14 standard brake
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official
Service. If none is available, use only high-
quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925
CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
●
The replacement brake fluid must be
new.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact
with the v
ehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.
Coll
ect any spilt service fluids and allow a
professional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking the l
evel of the window
washer tank and refilling it
Fig. 236
In the engine compartment: window
w
asher tank cap.
The window washer tank is in the engine
compartment
›
››
page 329.
Check the water level in the windscreen
washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired.
The window washer tank contains liquid de-
tergent for the windscreen and rear window.
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 326.
●
The window washer tank is marked with the
symbol on the cap.
●
Check there is enough windscreen water in
the reservoir.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The capacity of the window washer tank can
be found in
›››
page 371.
CAUTION
If the water from the windscreen washer
does not cont
ain enough anti-freeze, it may
freeze on the windscreen and rear window,
reducing forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventila-
tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on
the windscreen and reduce visibility.
336
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
simil
ar additives with the windscreen wash-
er water. A greasy layer may be formed on
the windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner
recommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
CAUTION
●
Do not mix cl
eaning products recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This
could lead to flocculation and may block
the windscreen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make ab-
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-
ids could cause serious malfunctions and
engine damage!
●
Lack of window washer fluid causes the
view through the windscreen to be ob-
scured.
12-volt battery
Gener
al information
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment
›
››
page 329 or luggage compartment
(PHEV hybrid vehicles)
›››
page 339 and is
practically maintenance free. It is checked
as part of the Inspection Service. Neverthe-
less, check the terminals are clean and have
the correct tightening torque, especially in
summer and winter.
All work on batteries requires specialist
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try
to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-
erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-
tery that could cause an explosion.
Battery warning indications
Wear eye protection.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-
t
ective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any
splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
pr
ohibited.
The battery should only be charged in a well-
v
entilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
Always follow the instruction manual.
Disconnecting the battery
The batt
ery should only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
are lost. These functions will require resetting
after the battery is reconnected.
When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
negative cable and then the positive cable.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm before you
disconnect the battery. Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods
The vehicle has a system for monitoring the
current consumption when the engine is left
unused for long periods of time
›››
page 342.
Some functions, such as the interior lights, or
the remote door opening, may be temporarily
disabled to prevent the battery from running
flat. These functions will come back on as
soon as the ignition is switched on and the
engine started.
Winter conditions
During the winter, the starting power may be
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should
be charged
›››
page 340.
WARNING
Any work to be done on the 12-volt vehicle
batt
ery or electrical system can cause in-
juries, burns, accidents and fires:
»
337
Practical tips
●
W
ear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles
containing lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid
through the vents.
●
Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-
tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If
acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a
doctor immediately.
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
are prohibited. When handling cables and
electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
and electrostatic charge. Never short the
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge.
The batteries should be charged in a well-
ventilated room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and bat-
teries.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative ca-
ble on the battery must be disconnected.
When a light bulb is changed, you need on-
ly switch off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
locking the vehicle before you disconnect
the battery! The alarm will otherwise be
trigger
ed.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before
reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
the positive cable and then the negative
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
connections. This could cause an electrical
fire.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one
which has thawed. This could result in ex-
plosions and chemical burns. Always re-
place a battery which has frozen. A flat
battery can also freeze at temperatures
close to 0°C (+32°F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged
battery immediately.
CAUTION
●
Do not e
xpose the battery to direct sun-
light over a long period of time, as the in-
tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
battery housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
ditions for a long period, protect the bat-
tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be
damaged.
Control lamp
The control lamp lights up when the igni-
tion is s
witched on. It should go out when the
engine has started running.
Indicator lamps and driver messages on the
instrument cluster display or infotainment
system:
Defective alternator
3 Valid only for: conventional vehicles.
The control lamp lights up RED.
The vehicle battery stops charging from the
alternator. You should immediately drive to
the nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
Error: the 12 V vehicle battery
is not charging. Park safely!
The control lamp lights up RED.
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next
opportunity and in a safe place.
The instrument cluster displays a message
due to a DCDC failure (electrical, mechani-
cal or energy balance).
●
Switch the ignition off and seek professional
assist
ance.
338
Checking and refilling levels
Error: 12V power supply. Park
safely! Check the manual
The contr
ol lamp lights up RED.
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next
opportunity and in a safe place.
There is a serious fault in the 12V power sup-
ply.
●
Go to a qualified establishment.
●
Have the electrical system checked.
Error: 12 V vehicle battery. En-
gine cannot be started. Visit the
workshop
The control lamp lights up YELLOW.
The connection between the on-board net-
work and the 12-volt battery has been inter-
rupted. If the drive system switches off in this
situation, it should not be switched on again
and the vehicle should be jump started
›››
page 53 or professional assistance should
be sought.
●
Go to a qualified establishment.
●
Have the electrical system checked.
Low level of the 12 V vehicle
battery. Charge while driving
The control lamp lights up YELLOW.
Starting capacity may be limited. If this driver
message goes out after a certain amount of
time, the vehicle's battery has recharged
while driving and reached a sufficient level. If
the driver message does not go out, take the
vehicle to a specialized workshop.
Replace the 12V vehicle battery.
Go to a workshop
The control lamp lights up YELLOW.
The 12 volt vehicle battery has almost
reached the end of its useful life. Visit a pro-
fessional and request an inspection and re-
placement, if necessary, of the 12-volt vehicle
battery
›››
page 340.
Error: The 12V power supply is
currently limited. Drive with cau-
tion.
The control lamp lights up YELLOW.
The 12-volt power supply is limited, maybe
because the 12 volt battery is discharged or
not working at full performance. The 12-volt
battery can be charged while driving. Until
the warning disappears, you should drive with
care.
Error: 12V power supply. Visit the
workshop
There is a fault in the 12-volt power supply:
●
Go to a qualified establishment.
●
Have the electrical system checked.
Access to the 12 volt battery
Fig. 237
Hybrid vehicles (PHEV): location of
the batt
ery in the luggage compartment
Valid for hybrid vehicles (PHEV)
The 12-v
olt vehicle battery is located under
the luggage compartment floor.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Raise the luggage compartment floor
›››
page 143, to gain access to the 12-volt
battery cover
›››
Fig. 237.
●
A suitable tool must be used to open and
close the cover.
Valid for conventional and Mild Hybrid ve-
hicles
●
Raise the bonnet
›››
in Working in the
engine compar
tment on page 326.
●
Lift the cover that protects the battery
›››
page 329,
›››
Fig. 227.
339
Practical tips
Checking the battery electrolyte
l
evel
Fig. 238
Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt
batt
ery (schematic representation).
The electrolyte level should be checked reg-
ul
arly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-
tries and in older batteries.
●
Check the colour display in the sight glass
on the top of the battery
›››
Fig. 238. Ensure
sufficient lighting to clearly identify the colour
shown in the battery window. Never use
flames or objects that burn without a flame
as a light source.
●
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
The battery's electrolyte
level is too low. Go to a specialised work-
shop to have the battery checked and
replaced if necessary.
The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-
rect.
Charging or changing the battery
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicl
e is not driven for long periods, the 12-volt
battery should be checked by a specialised
workshop more frequently than the service
intervals.
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries using
special technology have been installed and
they must be charged in a controlled environ-
ment.
Yellow or colourless:
Black:
Replacing a vehicle battery
The 12-v
olt vehicle battery has been de-
signed to suit its location and has specific
safety features. If the battery needs to be re-
placed, it is recommended that it be installed
by an official SEAT qualified workshop. These
workshops have the technical documenta-
tion and equipment required to find out the
size, technology, and maintenance and safe-
ty requirements of the new battery.
Always use maintenance-free batteries
according to the TL82506 and VW75073
standards. These standards must be from
October 2014 or later.
The degassing tube must always be connec-
ted to the hole on the negative pole side and
the hole on the positive pole side must be
sealed.
The vehicle’s 12V battery must always be re-
placed by a qualified specialist company, as
the vehicle’s electronics must be adapted
during replacement. In addition, the battery
parameters for functional safety have been
determined based on the original battery.
Only a qualified specialist company has the
right technology to fit the correct replace-
ment battery.
The use of unsuitable batteries could inva-
lidate the vehicle registration certificate.
Start-Stop systems (
›››
page 223) are equip-
ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must
340
Checking and refilling levels
only be replaced with a battery of the same
specifications.
Y
our vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy
›››
page 342.
The power management function ensures
that the battery is charged much more effi-
ciently than on vehicles without a power
management system. To maintain this func-
tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
mend that the replacement battery used is of
the same make and type as the original fitted
battery. To make proper use of the power
management function after the battery has
been changed, have the battery coded to the
power management mode at a specialised
workshop.
WARNING
●
Al
ways use only maintenance free bat-
teries that do not run flat alone and whose
properties, specifications and size corre-
spond to the standard battery. The specifi-
cations are indicated on the battery case.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
›››
in General information on page 337.
For the sake of the environment
Batt
eries contain toxic substances such
as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be
disposed of appropriately and must not be
disposed of with ordinary household waste.
48-volt battery
Gener
al information
3 V
alid for: Mild Hybrid vehicles
Fig. 239 48-volt battery: hazard warning
Never expose the 48 volt battery to sour-
ces of fir
e, sparks or unprotected flames.
The instruction manual and the workshop
information contain further information
and warnings to this regard.
Always keep children away from the 48
volt battery.
If the 48-volt battery is damaged, fluid
can leak and very corrosive acids can
form. The battery should only be handled
by qualified personnel.
1
2
3
4
All maintenance works involving the 48
v
olt battery should only be performed by
duly qualified and trained technical staff .
Take care when handling flammable sub-
stances.
In addition to a 12-volt battery, the vehicle
may be fitted with a 48-volt battery located
underneath the front passenger seat.
The works that are to be carried out on the
48 volt battery should be performed exclu-
sively by a specialised workshop with duly
qualified technical staff, trained according to
the SEAT guidelines.
Overview of the 48 volt system
The 48 volt system consists of the following
components, among others:
●
48-volt battery
●
12V/48V voltage converter
●
48 volt alternator/starter motor
●
Purple 48 volt cables
48 volt battery warnings
There is a hazard warning sign on the 48 volt
battery
›››
Fig. 239.
WARNING
An inappropriate handling of the 48 volt
batt
ery can cause serious injuries or death.
»
5
6
341
Practical tips
●
All maint
enance works involving the 48
volt battery should only be performed by
duly qualified and trained technical staff .
●
Never make any changes to the 48 volt
battery.
WARNING
Make sure the 48 volt battery does not
come int
o contact with water or other flu-
ids.
●
Liquids may cause short circuits, electri-
cal shocks and burns.
Control lamps
3 V
alid for: Mild Hybrid vehicles
Indicator lamps and driver messages on the
instrument cluster display or infotainment
system:
Error: 48V electrical system. Do
not start driving. Check the manual.
The warning lamp lights up yellow when the
vehicle is stopped.
The charge level of the 48 volt battery is too
low.
●
Do not start driving.
●
Leave the engine running with the vehicle
st
opped until the warning lamp switches off.
●
Start driving when all the warning lamps
have switched off.
If the yellow warning lamp does not switch
off within 3 minutes, seek professional as-
sistance.
Error: 48V electrical system.
Stop safely! Check the manual.
The indicator lamp lights up red while driving.
The charge level of the 48 volt battery is too
low.
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
●
Switch off the ignition and wait for 3 sec-
onds.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
●
Leave the engine running with the vehicle
stopped until the warning lamp switches off.
●
Start driving when all the warning lamps
have switched off.
If the yellow warning lamp does not switch
off within 3 minutes, seek professional as-
sistance.
Energy management
Optimisation of the starting ca-
pacity
The power management controls the distri-
bution of el
ectrical energy and thus helps to
ensure that there is always enough power
available to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
will gradually lose its charge because certain
electrical devices, such as the electronic
gearbox lock continues to draw current even
when the ignition is off. In some cases there
may not be enough power available to start
the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-
cantly improves reliability when starting the
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the
battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery diagnosis,
residual current management and dynam-
ic power management.
Battery diagnosis
The battery diagnosis function constantly
registers the condition of the battery. Sensors
342
Checking and refilling levels
detect the battery voltage, battery current
and batt
ery temperature. This enables the
system to calculate the current power level
and charge condition of the battery.
Residual current management
The residual current management reduces
power consumption while the vehicle is
parked. It controls the supply of power to the
various electrical devices while the ignition is
switched off. The system takes the battery di-
agnosis data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery,
switch off the individual electrical devices
one after the other to prevent the battery
from losing too much charge and to ensure
that the engine can be started reliably.
Dynamic power management
While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-
tributes the available power to the various
electrical devices and systems according to
their requirements. The power management
ensures that on-board systems do not con-
sume more electrical power than the alterna-
tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-
mum possible battery power level.
Note
●
Neither is the po
wer management system
able to overcome the given physical limits.
Please remember that the power and use-
ful lif
e of the battery are limited.
●
If there is a risk that the vehicle may not
start, the alternator electrical failure or low
battery charge level warning lamp will be
shown
›››
page 338.
Flat battery
Starting ability has first priority.
Short trips, cit
y traffic and low temperatures
all place a heavy load on the battery. In
these conditions a large amount of power is
consumed, but only a small amount is sup-
plied. The situation is also critical if electrical
devices are in use when the engine is not run-
ning. In this case power is consumed when
none is being generated.
In these situations you will be aware that the
power management system is intervening to
control the distribution of electrical power.
When the vehicle is parked for long peri-
ods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
several days or weeks, the power manage-
ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
vices one by one or reduce the amount of
current they are using. This limits the amount
of power consumed and helps to ensure reli-
able starting even after a long period. Some
convenience functions, such as remote vehi-
cl
e opening, may not be available under cer-
tain circumstances. These functions will be
restored when you switch on the ignition and
start the engine.
With the engine switched off
For example, if you listen to the sound system
with the engine switched off the battery will
run down.
If the energy consumption means there is a
risk that the engine will not start, a text will be
displayed in vehicles with a driver information
system.
This driver indicator tells you that you must
start the engine so that the battery can re-
charge.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical
power, the battery can still become dis-
charged while the vehicle is being driven. This
can occur when a lot of power is being con-
sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-
pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-
tially.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
ing systems in particular use a large amount
of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,
»
343
Practical tips
that the seat heating or the rear window
heat
er is not working, they may have been
temporarily switched off or regulated to a
lower heat output. These systems will be
available again as soon as sufficient electri-
cal power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at a
slightly faster idling speed when necessary.
This is quite normal, and no cause for con-
cern. The increased idling speed allows the
alternator to meet the greater power require-
ment and charge the battery at the same
time.
Wheels
Wheel
s and tyres
General notes
–
When driving with ne
w tyres, be especially
careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
–
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damaged (punct
ures, cuts, cracks or
dents). Remove any foreign objects em-
bedded in the treads.
–
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
–
Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when
put back.
–
When removed, the wheels or tyres should
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important
›››
page 347.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in
poor condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
pact or have been damaged, have a special-
ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-
essary to change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce
speed immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that damage may have occurred. In-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the car inspected.
344
Wheels
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
●
Do not remove foreign bodies if they have
penetr
ated through the tyre wall!
●
If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility
system, where necessary seal the damaged
tyre as shown in section
›››
page 45. Use a
specialised workshop for repair or replace-
ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
wraps around the foreign body and provision-
ally seals the tyre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure
that optimal use is made of tyre properties in
terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise
and wear.
Subsequent fitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
regarding current techniques.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum
speed permitted for the tyres.
max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
tyres with a maximum authorised speed
above 240 km/h (149 mph).
WARNING
●
Ne
w tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
carefully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This
may cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
P
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
Z
W
Y
the vehicle immediately and check the
t
yres.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
by a specialised w
orkshop. There they have
the required knowledge, the special tools and
the corresponding spare parts.
●
Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you
hav
e installed new tyres, drive the first 500
km carefully and at a moderate speed.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
the same type, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, tread pattern.
●
When changing tyres, do not change just
one; change at least two on the same axle.
●
If you want to equip your vehicle with a
combination tyres and rims that are different
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-
cialised workshop before purchasing them
›››
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
your v
ehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity
»
345
Practical tips
or COC document
1)
). The v
ehicle documen-
tation varies depending on the country of res-
idence.
If the type of spare wheel is different form the
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
wheel should only be used temporarily in the
event of a puncture, and the vehicle should
be driven with care. Refit the normal road
wheel as soon as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a difference in the number
of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event
of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the
same perimeter as normal tyres should be
used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the
wheel):
DOT ... 2218 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
WARNING
●
Use only combinations of t
yres and rims,
as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by
SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged, causing an accident.
●
For technical reasons it is not possible to
use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases
not even wheels from the same vehicle
model should be used.
●
Always ensure that the tyres you have
chosen have adequate clearance. When
selecting replacement tyres, do not rely
entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
fer significantly depending on the manu-
facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
danger road safety. Risk of accident!
●
Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
an emergency, and drive with due care.
●
The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
hibited use can cause accidents or can
damage your vehicle.
●
If decorative hubcaps are subsequently
fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Models with aerodynamic wheel rims
and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more
closed design) increase the likelihood of
ice and sno
w accumulating on the inside.
This should be taken into account, depend-
ing on the driving situations, as snow or ice
accumulated in the wheels can cause vi-
bration in the vehicle when it drives at over
40 km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and
snow from the inside of the wheels using
hot water.
●
If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the
likelihood of stones becoming trapped in-
side wheel rims with plastic elements in-
creases when driving at high speed or in a
sporty manner. If you see that there are
stones trapped between the aluminium
wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt
to remove them using pressurised water.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the l
aws in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEAT Service Centr
e should be consul-
ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
different sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
1)
COC = certificat
e of conformity.
346
Wheels
●
Ne
ver mount used tyres if you are not
sure of their “previous history”.
Tyre life
Fig. 240
Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
ing habits will incr
ease the useful life of your
tyres.
●
Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
●
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
●
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
ried by the vehicle
›››
Fig. 240.
●
In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,
save the modified tyre pressure
›››
page 351.
●
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
●
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
time to time.
Tyre pressure
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a
sticker on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
Fig. 240.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,
the tyre pressure should be increased to the
maximum value indicated on the sticker
›››
Fig. 240.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
flated to the highest pressure required for the
road wheels.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare
wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18), inflate to a
pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre
pressure label
›››
Fig. 240.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
ficial Service.
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and
t
yres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-
ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
out.
»
347
Practical tips
●
The driv
er is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-
ted to the right pressure. The recommen-
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 240.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and en-
sure they are maintained at the pressures
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low
could cause overheating, resulting in tread
detachment or even burst tyres.
●
When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
should be that indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 240.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pres-
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they
are cold.
●
Regularly check your tyres for damage
and wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of
tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tread wear indicators
Fig. 241
Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig. 242
Interchanging tyres.
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be
f
ound on the base of the original tyre treads,
ordered at regular intervals and running
across the tread
›››
Fig. 241. The letters "TWI"
or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
the position of the wear indicators.
The minimum permitted profile depth
1)
have
been reached when the tyres have worn
down to the wear indicators. Replace the
tyres with new ones
›››
.
Changing wheel
s around
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
the wheels should be changed round from
time to time according to the system
›››
Fig. 242. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time.
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tr
ead is worn down to the tread
wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
Particularly in difficult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and
be approximately the same on the tyres of
both the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
cient tread depth is particularly evident in
vehicle handling, when there is a risk of
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
348
Wheels
and when driving through corners, and
br
aking is also adversely affected.
●
The speed has to be adapted according-
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control
over the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel nuts ar
e matched to the rims.
When installing different wheels (for instance
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel nuts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system functions
correctly.
The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.
A special adapter is required to remove the
anti-theft wheel bolts
›››
page 48.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or
oil
ed.
●
Use only wheel nuts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the
tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts
and thr
eads can be damaged.
CAUTION
See
›
››
page 51 to find out the recommen-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for
steel and alloy rims.
Winter tyres
–
Winter tyres must be fitted on all f
our
wheels.
–
Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.
–
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres.
–
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
–
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
take into account the correct tyre pressures
listed on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
page 347.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-
sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or with
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC
1)
).
The vehicle documentation varies depending
on the country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also se-
verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
still much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is
stamped on all winter tyres
›››
page 345.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
must have an appropriate sticker attached
so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-
ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-
ice and specialised workshop. Please note
the regulations to this effect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres.
»
1)
COC = certificat
e of conformity.
349
Practical tips
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Pl
ease note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical re-
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of
the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
the basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
f
or the winter tyres fitted on your car can
cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to sum-
mer t
yres at an appropriate moment. In
temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-
ance will be improved if summer tyres are
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
while driving will all be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be fitted t
o the front
wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel
drive.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions.
●
Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having fitted the chains, it is best to disa-
ble the traction control (TCS) in the ESC
›››
page 277, Connecting and disconnect-
ing the ESC and TCS.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
Tyres Wheel rim Chains
195/65 R15 6Jx15 ET43
Max. link 12 mm205/55 R16 6.5Jx16 ET46
205/55 R16 7Jx16 ET43
225/45 R17 7.5Jx17 ET46
Max. link 9 mm
205/50 R17 7.5Jx17 ET46
225/40 R18 7.5Jx18 ET46
225/35 R19 8Jx19 ET49
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Remove any central wheel trims before fitting
sno
w chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
chains coul
d lead to serious accidents and
damage.
●
Always the appropriate snow chains.
●
Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speeds when driving with snow chains.
CAUTION
●
R
emove the snow chains to drive on
roads without snow. Otherwise they will im-
pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres
and wear out very quickly.
350
Wheels
●
Wheel rims may be damaged or scr
atch-
ed if the chains come into direct contact
with them. SEAT recommends the use of
covered snow chains.
Tyre pressure monitor sys-
t
em
Control lamp
It lights up
The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much
l
ower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has
structural damage.
In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text
message is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace
any damaged tyres.
Flashes
System fault
The contr
ol lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute
and then lights up permanently.
If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off
and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitor
indicator
›››
page 351. If the fault continues, go to a
specialised workshop.
Several control and warning lamps light up
f
or a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›
››
in Con-
tr
ol and warning lamps on page 88.
Tyre pressure monitor system
Fig. 243
Instrument panel: warning of loss of
t
yre pressure.
The tyre pressure monitoring system com-
par
es the individual speeds of each wheel
and thus the dynamic radius with the help of
the ABS sensors.
If the rolling circumference of one or more
wheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator will indicate this on the instru-
ment panel through a warning lamp and a
warning to the driver
›››
Fig. 243. When only
one specific tyre is affected, its position within
the vehicle will be indicated.
Loss of pressure: Check left
tyre pressure!
Wheel tread change
The wheel diameter changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is changed manually.
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may
not indicate anything under certain circum-
stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or
unpaved roads, or when driving with snow
chains).
Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-
dicator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the
»
351
Practical tips
same, for example, when the front and rear
wheel
s are swapped.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Memorise the new inflation pressure in the
Infotainment system: function button >
Driving data > Vehicle status
›››
page 92 .
●
OR: from the instrument cluster's Service
menu
›››
page 72.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
speeds the programmed values are collected
and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
tion
›››
Fig. 240.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different
pr
essures or at a pressure that is too low
then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
or fatal accident.
●
If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or
braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring system can
only operate correctly if all of the tyres are
inflated to the correct pressure when cold.
●
If a t
yre has not been punctured and it
does not have to be changed immediately,
drive to the nearest specialised workshop
at a moderate speed and have the tyre
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
sure.
Note
●
Driving f
or the first time with new tyres at
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air
pressure warning.
●
If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-
ted with the ignition on, an audible warning
will sound. In the event that there is a fault
in the system, an audible warning will
sound.
●
Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of
time or driving in a sporty style can tempo-
rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control
lamp shows a fault, but disappears when
road conditions or the driving style change.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre pressure
monitoring system. Regularly check your
tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor-
rect and that the tyres are not damaged
due to puncture, cuts, tears and im-
pacts/dents. Remove objects from the
tyres only when they have not pierced the
tyres.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring indicator
does not function when there is a fault in
the ESC or ABS
›››
page 275.
Spare wheel
L
ocation and use of the temporary
spare wheel
Fig. 244
In the luggage compartment: load
fl
oor raised.
352
Wheels
Fig. 245
In the luggage compartment: remove
the sub
woofer.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under
the fl
oor panel in the luggage compartment
and is attached by a thumbnut.
The temporary spare wheel has been de-
signed to be used for short periods of time.
Have the tyres checked and replaced as
soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or
at a specialised workshop.
The spare wheel must not be switched for a
spare wheel from another vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
●
Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove
the temporary spare wheel
›››
page 143.
●
Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise
›››
Fig. 244.
●
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles
with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-
woofer)
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
move the subwoofer.
●
Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-
gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-
gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it
out.
●
Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-
ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggage
compartment as explained in
›››
page 143.
●
Disconnect the subwoofer
›››
Fig. 245
1
speaker cable.
●
Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-
wise dir
ection
›››
Fig. 245
2
.
●
Remove the sub
woofer speaker and the
spare wheel.
●
When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with
care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”
arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
●
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in
place.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the
punctured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
●
Aft
er fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-
ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-
dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back
of the left front door frame
›››
Fig. 240.
●
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted
on the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Never travel more than 200 km using a
temporary spare wheel.
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary
spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-
dent.
●
No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
●
If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically
switch off during the journey. Switch off the
system when starting off.
353
Maintenance
Maintenance
SEAT Maint
enance Pro-
gramme
Service intervals
Service work and the Digital Main-
tenance Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Main-
t
enance Plan”)
The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
mentation of the service history, it is possible
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
receipt after every service carried out con-
taining all the services carried out on the sys-
tem.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-
able in some markets. In this case, your
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-
rent documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop
documents the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were
changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
the next inspection. This information is docu-
mented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
ised workshop will be able to provide specific
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
f
ormed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
●
Mak
e sure that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
alised workshop.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maint
ain its value, but also its correct oper-
ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
guidelines.
Set Service or Flexible Service In-
t
ervals
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service int
erval display
on the instrument panel display serves as a
reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and
the conditions of use of the car, either the
Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
applied for an oil change service..
354
SEAT Maintenance Programme
How to know which type of service needs
t
o his vehicle
●
Check the tables below:
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI2
Every 7500 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI3
Every 10000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI4
Every 15000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI6 Flexible
According to the service in-
t
erval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
P
articular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
you have to carry out this service, take into
account the individual conditions of use and
personal driving style. A major component of
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
stead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the speci-
fications of the engine oil according to the
VW standard
›››
page 330.
If you do not want to the flexible service
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service interval display
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
ted by the service intervals display:
●
on the instrument panel
›››
page 84
●
in the infotainment system: menu Vehicle
settings; OR Driving data > Vehicle sta-
tus > Service
›››
page 89.
The service interval display gives information
for service dates that involve an engine oil
change or an inspection. When the time for
the corresponding service comes, additional
work required, such as the change of brake
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If
, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
verse conditions of use, some of the work
must be carried out before the next service
period or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time
, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
on equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
»
355
Maintenance
The Service Advisor of your specialised
w
orkshop will gladly inform you about the
need of performing service work between
normal service intervals, always considering
the conditions of use of your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
f
ormed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
●
Have the services conducted at author-
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
shops.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Service sets
Sets of services include all the maint
enance
works needed to ensure the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
divided into inspection and review services.
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
opment of components) the sets of services
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
specialised workshop is always receiving up-
dates in time.
WARNING
The 12 volt battery is a subject to wear. A
r
eduction in battery power can mean that
some important safety systems, such as
power steering, braking intervention, lights
or airbag systems, operate with limitations
or stop working entirely. This may cause
serious accidents and injuries. To avoid
this, it is necessary to take the following
safety measure:
●
Get a professional service centre to re-
place the 12-volt vehicle battery every four
years.
Additional service offers
Appr
oved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceiv
ed for their vehicles and approved by
SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.
These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
facturer's requirements in terms of design,
accuracy of the measurements and materi-
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this
reason, we always recommend the use of
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be
held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manu-
f
acturer's requirements, are an additional
service to you, offering the possibility of re-
placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT appr
oved accessories
for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
suitability of these accessories have been in-
spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
356
SEAT Maintenance Programme
SEAT Service Mobility
Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
v
ehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits
and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
For the first two years after the purchase,
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
ditional costs.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
you carry out the recommended Inspection
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a
fault or an accident, our assistance services
will help you keep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility
Service differs depending on the country in
which the vehicle was purchased. For further
information ask your SEAT dealership or the
SEAT website in your country.
Warranty
F
ault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of ne
w vehicles. Check the pur-
chase agreement or complementary addi-
tional documentation provided by your Tech-
nical Service to see the conditions and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official
Service.
Commercial warranty for the high-
voltage battery of electric and hy-
brid vehicles of SEAT S.A.
1. Compl
ementing the aforementioned war-
ranties, the seller SEAT dealer grants the
high-voltage batteries of the vehicles that it
has sold an 8-year or 160,000-km warranty,
whichever comes first, for any material or fin-
ish defect.
2. The reduction in battery capacity over time
depends on the component itself and is not a
defect from a warranty perspective.
3. The warranty for high-voltage batteries will
be invalidated when the defect is due to use,
handling or maintenance not in accordance
with the content of the instruction manual.
This is particularly applicable the battery
charge.
4. In addition, except for the duration of the
warranty, all conditions relating to the legal
warranty of the SEAT dealer (requirements,
criteria for assessing the absence of defects,
exclusion grounds, processing of entitlements
to benefits, entry into force, start and scope
of the warranty validity period, etc.) shall ap-
ply in r
elation to the high-voltage battery.
357
Maintenance
Vehicle maintenance
Maint
enance and cleaning
Basic observations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain
the v
alue of your vehicle. In addition, it may
become a prerequisite to demand the war-
ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-
work.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions
for application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cl
eaning products and other materials
used for car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe
place, out of the reach of children. Danger
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When pur
chasing car care products,
chose products that are compatible with
the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.
r
emains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
more damage it can cause to the surface.
High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
light, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
distance between the spraying water. Do not
aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof;
the same applies to tyres, rubber hoses,
soundproofing material, sensors or camera
lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
pressure cleaner.
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a dir
ect stream or one that has a rotating
jet for forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed
60°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car
wash.
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
amic sunroof are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator,
especially if your vehicle has detachable
parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-
ing products that do not contain solvents.
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by
hand
To prevent damage to the vehicle when
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner
for matte paint.
358
Vehicle maintenance
Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To
av
oid damaging the surface of the paint, do
not apply too much pressure.
Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with
a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-
bre cloth.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of
water with a leather cloth.
WARNING
●
Only w
ash the vehicle with the ignition
switched off or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk
of accident!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the in-
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of
cut!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
dent! In this case the brakes should be
dried by pressing the brake pedal several
times.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-
view mirrors must always be folded/de-
pl
oyed electrically!
●
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programs that in-
clude the use of wax. This could dam-
age the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them
may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
w
ash bays. These places are prepared to
prevent oily water from getting into the
public drains.
Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
tions
The cleaning and maintenance of individual
components of the v
ehicle can be checked in
the following tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have spe-
cial questions or parts that are not listed. Take
he general considerations into account
›››
in Take special care with... on page 363.
Cleaning the exterior
Windscreen wipers
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers
Headlights / Tail lights
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Sensors / Camera lenses
Problem Solution
Dirt
Sensors: soft cl
oth with a sol-
vent-free cleaning product
Camera lenses: soft cloth with
an alcohol-free cleaning prod-
uct
Snow/ice
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
with no sol
vents
»
359
Maintenance
Wheels
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water
Brake abrasion
dust
Acid-free special cleaning
product
End exhausts
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
uct is r
equired
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if a
st
eel cleaning product is re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Paint
Problem Solution
Paint flaws
Check the paint's colour code
in an authorised service and r
e-
store with a touch-up pencil
Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water
Environmental rust
t
ank
Apply rust remover and then
apply har
d wax. Go you your
specialised workshop if you
have any queries
Problem Solution
Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
shop t
ake care of this
The water does
not cr
eate drop-
lets on the clean
paint
Maintain with hard wax (at
l
east 2 times a year)
No shine de-
spit
e sober main-
tenance/paint
Treat with suitable wax and ap-
ply paint pr
eservative after-
wards if the wax used does not
contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Tanks, e.g. insect
r
emains, bird
droppings, tree
sap, road salt
Immediately soften with water
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
Fat-based dirt,
e.g. cosmetic
products or
sunscreen
Delete immediately with a neu-
tral soap solution
a)
and a soft
cloth
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
t
ed parts
›››
page 358
Decoration slides
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Interior cleaning
Windows
Problem Solution
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and
then dry with a cl
oth
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Plastic parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Damp cloth
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if pos-
sible solvent-free plastic clean-
er
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
360
Vehicle maintenance
Displays/instrument panel
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal
displ
ay cleaner
Control panels
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with
neutr
al soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Seat belts
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, al
-
lowed to dry before retracting
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
Problem Solution
Particles of dirt
st
uck to surfaces
Vacuum cleaner
Water-based dirt,
e
.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Absorbent cloth and neutral
soap solution
a)
Problem Solution
Grease-based
dirt, e
.g. oil, make-
up, etc.
Apply a neutral soap solution
a)
.
Absorb the dissolved grease
and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
must treat it with water after-
wards
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cr
eam etc.
Special stain remove: dry with
an absorbent cloth, if applica-
ble, apply neutral soap solution
afterwards
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Natural leather
Problem Solution
Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
a)
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dry stains: stain remover suita-
ble for leather
Grease-based
dirt, e
.g. oil, make-
up, etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
and suitable stain remover for
leather
Dry stains: grease solvent
spray
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cr
eam etc.
Stain remover suitable for
leather
Problem Solution
Care Apply preservative cream regu-
l
arly to protect from sunlight.
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of water
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean like plastic parts
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
a dry cl
oth or sponge.
●
Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be re-
paired immediately.
»
361
Maintenance
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or sno
w from the camera lenses. Risk of
cracking the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and
exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to
and fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.
Risk of cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the
rear window, do not put stickers over the
heating elements.
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of
damaging the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The screens, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched off and cooled down before clean-
ing.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
age!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
trol panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must nev-
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
should they be allowed to come into contact
with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
ask your specialised workshop to replace the
belt in question.
Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre
●
Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre
with leather care products, solvents, floor
wax, shoe polish, stain removers or similar
products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it
removed there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the
seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro
fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the
seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
362
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
l
onged period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscr
een. In bad visibility conditions
such as humid weather, darkness or when
the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may
be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
blades to make noise.
Note
●
R
emains of insects can be removed much
more easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Remove the vehicle from traffic
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or a long period of time, contact a qualified
workshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-
sion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account the indications relating
to the vehicle’s battery
›››
page 306, Con-
servation of the high-voltage bat-
tery,
›››
page 337, 12-volt battery.
Accessories and modifi-
cations t
o the vehicle
Accessories, spare parts and
repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
f
or advice before purchasing accessories
and replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-
ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-
son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-
cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-
ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official
Service has the latest information from the
manufacturer and can recommend accesso-
ries and replacement parts which are suita-
ble for your requirements. They can also an-
swer any questions you might have regarding
official regulations.
We recommend only using SEAT accesso-
ries and genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has
tested these parts and accessories for suita-
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
correctly and professionally.
Any r
etro-fitted equipment which has a di-
rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is
driven, such as a cruise control system or
electronically-controlled suspension, must
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-
tion symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fit-
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone hold-
ers or cup hol
ders, should never be fitted
on the covers, or within the working range
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent.
Technical modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, softw
are, wiring or data transfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work per-
formed incorrectly.
»
363
Maintenance
For this reason we recommend asking official
SEAT service centr
es to do any necessary
work using genuine SEAT parts®.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or
other w
ork on your vehicle can lead to mal-
functions and cause accidents.
Radio telephones and office equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any r
etrofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
ded that:
●
The antenna is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-
gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The effective transmitting power does not
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio
equipment might interfere with the electron-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
This may be due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial
›››
.
Pl
ease note also that the maximum range of
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
that any such equipment carries the mark.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
type approval for your vehicle and must carry
the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
which is oper
ated inside the vehicle without
a properly installed external aerial can
cr
eate excessive magnetic fields that
could cause a health hazard.
Note
●
The post
erior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.
364
Information for the user
Information for the user
Inf
ormation for the user
Information stored by the
control units
Storage of accident data (Event
Data Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
(EDR).
The EDR’
s function is to record data in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da-
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
ing data and data from the restraint systems,
such as:
●
How different vehicle systems worked.
●
Whether the driver and the occupants were
wearing their seat belts.
●
How hard the acceleration or brake pedal
was pressed.
●
Vehicle speed.
These data will provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
the systems were inactive or active and if
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
aforementioned situations, accelerating or
decelerating the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-
cludes data from systems such as:
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
●
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist).
●
Park Pilot system
●
Parking aid system (Park Assist).
●
Lane Assist
The EDR data are only recorded in specific
accident situations. No data are recorded in
normal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
(such as criminal proceedings authorities)
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
other data sources and create a personal
reference in the context of an accident inves-
tigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
tractual provisions.
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
field research and in order to improve vehicle
system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
ses of research will be treated anonymously
(in other words, no reference will be made to
the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Other important information
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of mat
erials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage re-
cycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
»
365
Information for the user
●
Pl
astic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Recycling of electrical or electron-
ic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
ar
e not permanently fitted in the vehicle must
be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be
discarded as home waste but through selec-
tive waste collection.
Information about the EU Di-
r
ective 2014/53/EU
Simplified EU compliance declara-
tion
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manuf
acturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Addresses of the manufacturers
According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all
r
elevant components must include the ad-
dress of the manufacturer.
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required:
Central control unit (BCM)
Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig
Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12
38122 - Braunschweig, Germany
Phone: 0049 53188890
Keyless Access system
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm
Roemerstr. 66
59075 - Hamm, Germany
Phone: 0049 23817980
Roof antenna
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
366
Information for the user
Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH
Siemensstr
asse 32
63225 Langen, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0
Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Antenna amplifiers
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
Calearo Antenne S.P.A
Corso Matteotti, 1
20121 Milan, Italy
Phone: +39 0444 90 13 11
Website: www.calearo.com
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Navigation antenna
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Connectivity Box
Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH
Märkische Strasse 72
15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany
Phone:+49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Basic infotainment system
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Optional infotainment system
LG Electronics Mlawa SP
LG Electronics 7
06 500, Mlawa
Remote control key
Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau
Äußere Weberstr. 20
02763 - Zittau, Germany
Phone: 0049 358357750
Instrument panel
Analogue SE38x/SE316
Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH
Visteonstr. 4-10
50170 Kerpen, Germany
Analogue all other models
Continental Automotive Spain, S.A.
Crta. de Rubí a Ullastrell, nº 12-30
08191 Rubí (Barcelona - Spain)
FPK (digital)
Continental Automotive GmbH
VDO-Strasse 1,
64832 Babenhausen, Germany
»
367
Information for the user
Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe
GmbH
R
obert Bosch Str. 27-29
63225 Langen, Germany
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech,
s.r.o.
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Front radar sensors
MRR for SE38X
Robert Bosch GmbH
Markwiesenstrasse, 46
72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany
MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona
Automotive Distance Control Systems
GmbH
Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10
88131, Lindau, Germany
Rear radar sensors
Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA
Rixbecker Straße 75
59552 Lippstadt (Germany)
Online Connectivity Unit
LG ELECTRONICS INC.
10, Magokjungang 10-ro,
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea
Frequency bands, station power
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
All SEAT models
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary
heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra
Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating)
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
368
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Bluetooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
Connection to the external antenna of the car
GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Leon, Alhambra and TarracoGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm
Tarraco and Leon
WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm
LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm
Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for assistance systems
76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra
35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco
24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra
Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 5 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m
Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and
Alhambr
a
»
369
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Online Connectivity Unit
EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm
UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm
a)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de-
cl
ares that the radio equipment type LTE-
MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara-
tion of conformity is available at the following
internet address:
http://www.molex.com/doc
Importer for United Kingdom mar-
ket
The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017
This v
ehicle has various radio equipment de-
vices installed.
The following acts as importer of the radio
equipment devices for the United Kingdom
market within the meaning of The Radio
Equipment Regulations 2017:
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd.
Y
eomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN
United Kingdom
370
Indications about the technical data
Technical data
Indications about the
t
echnical data
Important information
Introduction
The values indicated in the technical data
may diff
er depending on optional equipment
or version of the model, as well as in the case
of special vehicles and equipment for certain
countries.
The information in the official vehicle docu-
mentation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-
fications section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used t
o denote engine power.
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the die-
sel combustion po
wer.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock r
esistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle ID number
The v
ehicle ID number can be found in the
following places:
●
One the vehicle's data label.
●
In front, under the windscreen.
●
To the right in the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export
countries do not have a type plate.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om measurements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions de-
pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
gers.
Filling capacities
Tank level
Rigid axle front wheel
driv
e vehicles
45 l, 7 l reserve
Multi-link axle front-
wheel driv
e vehicles
50 l, 7 l reserve
Vehicles with all-wheel
driv
e
55 l, 8.5 l reserve
Plug-in hybrid vehicles
(PHEV)
40 l, 8 l reserve
Natural gas vehicles
approx. 17.3 kg
a)
Additional petr
ol tank: 9
l, of which approx 7.6 l is
a reserve
a)
The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-
t
eristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-
cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200
bar.
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-
tainer
approx. 3 litres
371
Technical data
High-voltage battery
Type and capacity
Plug-in hybrid vehi-
cl
es (PHEV)
Li-ion 12.8 kWh 48V
Weights
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised l
oad on the roof of
your vehicle is 75 kg.
Empty weight, total weight, axle loads
The empty weight of the vehicle with driver
(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)
1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can
increase the empty weight, which means that
the possible useful load decreases propor-
tionally.
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitt
ed weights must not be exceeded.
There is a risk of accident and damage!
372
Indications about the technical data
Engine specifications
Petrol engines
1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop MHEV
1.4 Start-Stop
AC
T
®
Leon
Leon
Spor
tstourer
Leon
Leon
Sportstourer
Leon
Leon
Sportstourer
Leon
Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 66 (90)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,500 81 (110)/5,500 110 (150)/5,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/1,600-3,000 200/2,000-3,000 200/2,000-3,000 250/1,500-4,000
No. of cylinders/displacement
(cm
3
)
3/999 3/999 3/999 4/1,395
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual manual manual manual DSG DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 183 (IV) 184 (IV) 197 (V) 199 (V) 192 (VI) 199 (V) 210 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h
(seconds)
12.6 13.2 10.9 11.2 10.8 10.9 8.8
Maximum authorised weight
(k
g)
1,750 1,750 1,750 1,900 1,860 1,950 1,870
»
373
Technical data
Petrol engine
1.4 TSI Start-Stop PHEV
Leon LEON Sportstourer
TSI engine power in kW (hp) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000
Electric motor power in kW (hp) at 1/min 85 (116)/2,600-6,500
TSI engine + electric motor power in kW (hp) at 1/min 150 (204)/5,000-6,000
TSI engine maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,550-3,500
Electric motor maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 330/0-2,600
Maximum torque of TSI engine + electric motor (Nm at
1/min)
350/0-3,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,395
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox DSG
Top speed (km/h) 220 (V) 220 (V)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,060 2,080
374
Indications about the technical data
Petrol engines
1.5 Start-Stop ACT
®
1.5 Start-Stop ACT
®
1.5 Start-Stop ACT
®
MHEV 1.6 MPI
Leon
Leon
Spor
tstourer
Leon
Leon
Sportstourer
Leon
Leon
Sportstourer
Leon
Power output in kW (PS) at
1/min
96 (130)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000 250/1,500-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 155/3,800-4,000
No. of cylinders/displacement
(cm
3
)
4/1,498 4/1,498 4/1,498 4/1,598
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual manual manual manual DSG DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 208 (V) 209 (V) 217 (V) 218 (V) 217 (VI) 218 (VI)
a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h
(seconds)
9.4 9.7 8.7 8.9 8.5 8.7
a)
Maximum authorised weight
(k
g)
1,860 1,960 1,870 1,960 1,900 2,000
a)
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
»
375
Technical data
Petrol engines
2.0 TSI Start-Stop
Leon LEON Sportstourer
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 140 (190)/4,200-6,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 320/1,500-4,100
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,984
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 231 (V) 233 (V)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.4 7.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,970 2,050
Natural gas / petrol engine
1.5 TGI Start-Stop
Leon LEON Sportstourer
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 96 (131)/5,000-6,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,498
Fuel
CNG
Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual DSG manual DGS
Top speed (km/h) 203 (V) 203 (VI) 203 (V) 203 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.6 10.1 9.9
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,860 1,890 1,960 1,990
376
Indications about the technical data
Diesel engines
2.0 TDI Start-Stop 2.0 TDI CR 2.0
Leon Leon
Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 85 (115)/2,750-4,250 105 (143)/3,500-4,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 300/1,500-2,500 320/1,750-3,000
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,968 4/1,968
Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
Gearbox manual manual DSG
Top speed (km/h) 200 (V) 210 (V) 210 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.2 9.1 9.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,930 1,940 1,970
Diesel engines
2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop 2.0 TDI Start-Stop
Leon LEON Sportstourer Leon LEON Sportstourer
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,000-4,200 110 (150)/3,000-4,200
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,700-2,750 360/1,600-2,750
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,968 4/1,968
Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
Gearbox manual manual DSG DSG DSG 4Drive
Top speed (km/h) 217 (V)
a)
215 (VI) 217 (VI) 214 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1
a)
8.5 8.8 8.4
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,060
a)
1,980 2,080 2,160
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
377
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 246
Leon
Fig. 247 LEON Sportstourer
378
Indications about the technical data
Fig. 246, Fig. 247 Leon LEON Sportstourer
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 888/794 888/1,068
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,686 2,686
D Length (mm) 4,368 4,642
E/F Front/rear
a)
tr
ack width (mm) 1,550/1,520 1,550/1,520
G Width (mm) 1,799 1,799
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,456 1,450
Turning radius (m) 11.2 11.2
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 195/65 R15 ET43.
379
Index
Index
Numbers and Symbol
s
12-volt battery
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 337
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
48-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
A
ABS
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 363
Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Active cylinder management (ACT)
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
AdBlue
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Additional heating
see Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Adjust
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Air conditioning
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Android Auto™
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Anti-trap function
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Apple CarPlay
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
381
Index
Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Aspects t
o think about before starting the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Assistance systems
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 279
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
door opening warning (Exit Assist) . . . . . . . . . 268
driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 245
front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 264
parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
rear camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 264, 267
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 76
safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Audible warning
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . . 273
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 119
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 228
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 166
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
B
Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Backrest of the rear seat
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 152
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
change on the remote control (independ-
ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Battery Manager Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Bicycle carrier
fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . . 301
max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 329
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Braking system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
382
Index
C
Camer
a
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Capacities
natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Care
see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-
cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Charging cable
for charging stations (AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
for sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Charging socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Charging the high-voltage battery
charging cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
charging modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
charging process display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
charging socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
programmed charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
settings in the infotainment system . . . . . . . . 307
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Check lists
requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . 189
requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Childproof locks
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Child seats
group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39, 40
Cleaning the vehicle
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 358
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Climate control
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Connectors
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
electric drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
383
Index
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 264
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 317
remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 165
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277
tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Controls and displays
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Convenience close function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Convenience open function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cooling system
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 170
D
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . 186
Deactivation of cylinders
see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 70
Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Diesel
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Disposal
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Distance control
see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Door opening warning (Exit Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 268
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Drink holder
bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Driving
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 238
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
E
e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
E-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Easy Open
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Electric
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electrical accessories
see Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
384
Index
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 219
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 239
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
dodge assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
pedestrian and cyclist recognition . . . . . . . . 247
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
turn assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency locking of the front passenger
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Emergency opening
driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Emergency operation
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Emissions control system
AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Engine
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
start (driver instructions with the mechani-
cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Engine and ignition
automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 216
emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 217
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 329
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 334
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Engine failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Engine oil
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 333
checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
385
Index
Environment
ecol
ogical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Equipment
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
ESC
electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 275
multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Exit Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Exterior lighting
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Exterior mirrors
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
external audio sources
adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
F
Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Factors that have a negative influence on
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Filling capacities
AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 123
Four-wheel drive
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Front Assist
see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 245
Fuel
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fuel consumption
inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 325
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
G
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gear change
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
H
Handbrake
see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 20
Headlights
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135
High-voltage battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Warning lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
High-voltage battery charging cable . . . . . . . . 313
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Hybrid drive
E-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Hybrid mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
386
Index
switching on the drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
syst
em power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
vehicle sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
I
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Identifying letters on engine (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 170
adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Infotainment system
see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 354
Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 86
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70
Hybrid vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Interior mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
K
Keyless Access
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 102
Keys
assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
instructions for the driver (mechanical con-
tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
pull out the key blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 108
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Lane assist Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Light indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
387
Index
Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 230
L
eaving a parking space with the parking as-
sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 119
cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 123
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Loading the luggage compartment
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 139
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146
Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 139
electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 147
opening and closing controlled by sensors
(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142
variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 143
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Luggage compartment shelf
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Maintenance
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Malfunction
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 279
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Microfiber: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
MirrorLink®
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mirrors
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
388
Index
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 215
f
avourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
N
Natural gas
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319, 322
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
enter an address for a guide destination . . 205
favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 206
navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 208
saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
use the map to enter the destination . . . . . . 206
Net bag
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Net for luggage
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 147
Noise
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 349
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
O
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
rear lid with electric opening and closing . . . 111
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operating fault
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Operation in winter
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
P
Painting the vehicle
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Park Assist
see the assisted parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
at an angle with the reverse assist . . . . . . . . 293
389
Index
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
with the assist
ed parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Parking aid
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 290
parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
see the assisted parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
setting the indications and audio sig-
nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 290
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Parking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287, 290
Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 284
leaving a parking space (only when paral-
lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287, 290
Parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287, 290
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 18
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Power socket
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Power steering
see Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preheating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Press & Drive
start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
R
Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Radio-operated remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 264
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 264, 267
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 114
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rear mounting
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Rear seat
fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 138
Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
390
Index
Refuelling
contr
ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote control key
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 165
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
cross traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
hitching a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68, 80
Road signs
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Rotation direction
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
S
S-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
central airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Save fuel
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Seats
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Selector lever (automatic transmission)
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
391
Index
Service
Digit
al Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Service Menu
identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 228
Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Special characteristics
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 300
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57
tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Speed limiter
indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Start-Stop system
disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . 226
driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 223
the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Stationary air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 70
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 227
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 74
Steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Steering wheel
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 228
Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage compartment accessories
see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
392
Index
Storing objects
bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 150
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Sunshade blind
anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Switching off
telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
T
TCS
see Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Telephone
contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Temperature indicator
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 80
Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 227, 228
To change the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39, 40
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39, 40
Torque
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Towable loads
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297
Tow hook
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Towing device
fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 300
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Traffic programme
see Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 291
power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-
er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297
technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
393
Index
towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
t
owing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 300
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 294, 298
Trailer mode
see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 146
Travel Assist
see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Trips abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Tyre pressure monitor systems
Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tyres
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
U
Unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 143
Vehicle
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . 102
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Vehicle care
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Vehicle sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
voice control
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Volume
set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
W
Warning symbols
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Washing the vehicle
conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 358
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 358
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 349
anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Wheels
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 50
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
394
Index
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
spar
e wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windows
automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Window washer
window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Window washer water
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Winter conditions
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 359
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
395
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.21
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
5D / Sportstourer
Leon
Owner’s manual
5FA012720BP
Inglés
5FA012720BP (06.21)
SEAT Leon 5D / Sportstourer Inglés (06.21)
